Advanced

Toon Boom
Harmony Advanced V15.0
Reference Book

TOON BOOM ANIMATION INC.

+1 514 278 8666

4200 Saint-Laurent, Suite 1020
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2W 2R2

contact@toonboom.com
toonboom.com

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Legal Notices
Toon Boom Animation Inc.
4200 Saint-Laurent, Suite 1020
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2W 2R2
Tel: +1 514 278 8666
Fax: +1 514 278 2666
toonboom.com
Disclaimer
The content of this guide is covered by a specific limited warranty and exclusions and limit of liability under theapplicable License Agreement as supplemented by the special terms and conditions for Adobe®Flash ® File
Format (SWF). For details, refer to the License Agreement and to those special terms and conditions.
The content of this guide is the property of Toon Boom Animation Inc. and is copyrighted.
Any reproduction in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.
Trademarks
Harmony is a trademark of Toon Boom Animation Inc.
Publication Date
01-15-2020
Copyright © 2018 Toon Boom Animation Inc., a Corus Entertainment Inc. company. All rights reserved.

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

2

Reference10

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

12

Add Column Dialog Box

15

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

17

Add Frames Dialog Box

19

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box

20

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

22Advanced Save Dialog Box

24

Auto-Matte Dialog Box

29

Close Gaps Dialog Box

30

Column Properties Dialog Box

31

Column Types Dialog Box

33

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box

34

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

36

Create Cycle Dialog Box

37

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box

38

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

39

Create Palette Dialog Box

42

Database Selector Dialog Box

43

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box

45

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box

47

Element Manager Dialog Box

49

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

51

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box

55

Export to Video Dialog Box

57

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

60

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

64

2

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box

65

Fill Selection Dialog Box

66

Import Images Dialog Box

67

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

74

Marker Colour Dialog Box

76

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box

78

New Scene Dialog Box

80

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

82

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box

84

Palette Browser Dialog Box

85

Palette Operations Dialog Box

88

Paste Preset Dialog Box

90

Paste Special Dialog Box

92

Pose Copier Dialog Box

97

Preferences Dialog Box

99

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box

100

Remove Dirt Dialog Box

102

Remove Hair Dialog Box

103

Save Dialog Box

104

Scene Settings Dialog Box

106

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

114

Select Colour Dialog Box

116

Selection Presets Dialog Box

118

Sequence Fill Dialog Box

121

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

123

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box

125

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box

127

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box

129

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

1313

Table of Contents

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box

135

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

136

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

138

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

139

Versions Dialog Box

149

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box

150

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box

152

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box

154

Chapter 2: Menus

156

Main Menus

157

Animation Menu

158

Drawing Menu

165

Edit Menu

173

File Menu

177

Help Menu

181

Insert Menu

183

Play Menu

185

Scene Menu

187

View Menu

189

Windows Menu

194

View Menus

196

Camera View Menu

197

Colour View Menu

214

Drawing View Menu

217

Function View Menu

229

Library View Menu

231

Model View Menu

233

Perspective View Menu

235

Script Editor View Menu

240

4

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Side View Menu

244

Timeline View Menu

249

Top View Menu

254

Xsheet View Menu

259

Chapter 3: Layers

268

Deformation Layers

270

Bone Layers

271

Deformation Composite Layer

273

Game Bone Layer

274

Kinematic Output Layer

276

Effect Layers

277

Blending Layer

278

Blur Layer

284

Blur-Gaussian Layer

286

Colour-Override Layer

288

Colour-Scale Layer

292

Cutter Layer

294

Glow Layer

296

Highlight Layer

300

Shadow Layer

304

Tone Layer

307

Transparency Layer

311

Image Layers

313

Colour-Card Layer

314

Drawing Layer

316

Move Layers

329

Camera Layer

330

Peg Layer

331

Quadmap Layer

333

5

Table of Contents

Sound Layer

336

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

338

Brush Tool Properties

340

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

360

Close Gap Tool Properties

362

Contour Editor Tool Properties

363

Cutter Tool Properties

366

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties

369

Dropper Tool Properties

371

Ellipse Tool Properties

372

Envelope Tool Properties

379

Eraser Tool Properties

382

Ink Tool Properties

398

Line Tool Properties

400

Morphing Tool Properties

408

Paint Tool Properties

412

Pencil Tool Properties

416

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

426

Perspective Tool Properties

432

Polyline Tool Properties

434

Rectangle Tool Properties

441

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

448

Rigging Tool Properties

450

Select Tool Properties

451

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

460

Stroke Tool Properties

462

Text Tool Properties

464

Transform Tool Properties

467

Zoom Tool Properties

470

6

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Toolbars

472

Top Toolbars

473

Advanced Animation Toolbar

474

Art Layer Toolbar

475

Deformation Toolbar

477

Display Toolbar

480

Easy Flipping Toolbar

481

Edit Toolbar

482

File Toolbar

483

Flip Toolbar

484Game Toolbar

485Mark Drawing Toolbar

487

Onion Skin Toolbar

488

Playback Toolbar

490

Scripting Toolbar

493

Tool Presets Toolbar

494

Tools Toolbar

495

Workspace Toolbar

500

View Toolbars

501

Script Editor View Toolbar

502

Timeline View Toolbar

506

Xsheet View Toolbar

508

Chapter 6: Views

510

Camera View

511

Colour View

518

Drawing View

524

Function View

527

Guides View

530

Integrated Help View

533

7

Table of Contents

Layer Properties View

534

Library View

536

Message Log View

539

Metadata Editor View

540

Model View

542

Perspective View

543

Script Editor View

546

Side View

548

Timeline View

551

Tool Properties View

561

Top View

562

Xsheet View

564

8

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

9Reference

Reference
Harmony has several commands, dialog boxes, and buttons. The Reference section lists all of them along withthe matching definition. To understand how to use these functions in a production context, read the User
guide.
In the Reference guide, you will learn about the various parameters available in dialog boxes, menus, nodes,
toolbars, views, and windows.
The Preferences guide provides additional details about each individual preference.

10Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

11

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes contain controls such as options and lists through which you can carry out a particular commandor task. For example, in the Scene Settings dialog box, you must indicate the resolution and alignment. A typicaldialog box looks as follows:

Add Column Dialog Box

15

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

17

Add Frames Dialog Box

19

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box

20

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

22Advanced Save Dialog Box

24

Auto-Matte Dialog Box

29

Close Gaps Dialog Box

30

Column Properties Dialog Box

31

Column Types Dialog Box

33

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box

34

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

36

Create Cycle Dialog Box

37

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box

38

12

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

39

Create Palette Dialog Box

42

Database Selector Dialog Box

43

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box

45

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box

47

Element Manager Dialog Box

49

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

51

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box

55

Export to Video Dialog Box

57

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

60

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

64

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box

65

Fill Selection Dialog Box

66

Import Images Dialog Box

67

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

74

Marker Colour Dialog Box

76

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box

78

New Scene Dialog Box

80

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

82

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box

84

Palette Browser Dialog Box

85

Palette Operations Dialog Box

88

Paste Preset Dialog Box

90

Paste Special Dialog Box

92

Pose Copier Dialog Box

97

Preferences Dialog Box

99

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box

100

Remove Dirt Dialog Box

102

Remove Hair Dialog Box

103

13

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Save Dialog Box

104

Scene Settings Dialog Box

106

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

114

Select Colour Dialog Box

116

Selection Presets Dialog Box

118

Sequence Fill Dialog Box

121

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

123

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box

125

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box

127

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box

129

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

131

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box

135

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

136

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

138

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

139

Versions Dialog Box

149

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box

150

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box

152

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box

154

14

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Add Column Dialog Box
The Add Column dialog box lets you add a column in the Xsheet view.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one
corresponding drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in theTimeline view, and a node in the Node view.

How to access the Add Column dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Xsheet menu, select Columns > Add Columns.

lClick the Add Columns

lPress Shift + C.

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new column a meaningful name.

Type

Lets you select a type of column to create. Choices include: Drawing, Timing,
Sound, 3D Path, 3D Rotation, Bezier Curve, Ease Curve, Expression andAnnotation.

Drawing Layer Options

15

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Colour Art layer.

Element
Create New Element

Creates an independent column with its own drawing folder.

Vector

Select this option if you want the layer to contain vector drawings.
Deselect this option if you want the layer to contain bitmap images.
Most of the time, the Vector option will be enabled.

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the type of bitmap image to insert in the column. Select SCAN
from the list if you are planning to scan drawings using the Toon Boom Harmony
Scan module.

Scan TypeIf you chose SCAN from the Bitmap Format list, select the kind of scanning you
want to achieve.

Field Chart

When importing traditional animation, lets you indicate the size of paper onwhich the animation or background was drawn. If you are not using perforated
animation paper, leave the 12 field default value as is.

Use Existing Element

Uses drawings from an existing column in the new column. Both columns will be
attached to the same set of drawings, but their timing will remain independent
from one another. If you modify one of the drawings, it will be modified in bothcolumns. This is the same principle as the Clone column.

Name

Lets you select the column to which you want to link your new column.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns
are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as manylayers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns are automatically
numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

16

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Add Drawing Layer dialog box lets you add a drawing layer to your project.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one
corresponding drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in theTimeline view, and a node in the Node view.

How to access the Add Drawing Layer dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, click the Add Drawing Layerl

From the top menu, select Insert > Drawing.

l

Press Ctrl + R (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + R (macOS).

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new layer a meaningful name.

Overlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Overlay Art layer.

Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Line Art layer.

17

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Colour Art layer.

Underlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Underlay Art layer.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns
are automatically numbered incrementally.
Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column

Add

Close

in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as manylayers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns are automatically
numbered incrementally.
Closes the dialog box.

18

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Add Frames Dialog Box
The Add Frames dialog box lets you add frames anywhere in the middle of the scene—before or after aselection. If you select a frame row in the Xsheet view, Harmony will add the new frames before or after theselection, depending on your choice.

How to access the Add Frames dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a frame or a range of frames.

2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Scene > Frame > Add Frames Before Selection or Add Frames
After Selection.

l

In the Xsheet view, right-click and select Frames > Add Frames Before Selection or Add
Frames After Selection.

l

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Add Frames

button to add frame after your selection.

lPress Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + G (macOS) to add frames before the selection, or Ctrl
+ H to add frames after the selection.

The Add Frames dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Number of frames to add

Lets you enter the number of frames needed in the scene.

19Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box
The Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box lets you add or remove a prefix or suffix for a multi-layer selection.

How to access the Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select all the layers to rename or press Ctrl + A (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + A(macOS).

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click the Add Prefix or Suffix Script

button. If the Scripting toolbar is not

visible, you can display it by selecting Windows > Toolbars > Scripting from the top menu. If the
Add Prefix or Suffix Script

button is not visible in the Scripting toolbar.

The Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

SuffixAllows you put a defined set of characters (letters, numbers, symbols) after the
pre-existing layer name.

PrefixAllows you put a defined set of characters (letters, numbers, symbols) before thepre-existing layer name.

Insert Text

Enter a set of characters to be added to the selected layers.

20

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Remove Text

Enter a set of characters to be removed from the selected layers.

21

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box lets you add a drawing layer to your project that will automaticallybe synced with the currently selected layer.
Depending on whether the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option was selected in the Advanced tab of
the Preferences panel, the Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box may look one of two ways.

How to access the Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, right-click on the drawing layer you would like to sync with another layer.
2. From the right-click menu, select Add Synced Drawing Layer.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new layer a meaningful name.

Overlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Overlay Art layer.

Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Colour Art layer.

Underlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Underlay Art layer.

22Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns
are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding column
in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as manylayers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns are automatically
numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

23

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Advanced Save Dialog Box
In Harmony Server, the Advanced Save dialog box lets you save the scene as a new version, overwrite an
existing version, set a new current version, display a list of modified drawings, colour palettes, and modified
colour palette lists.

How to access the Advanced Save dialog Box
1. Make sure that you have the necessary rights to save the current scene version. If you do not, you
can acquire the rights by selecting File > Rights to Modify Scene Version or Rights to Modify
Scene from the top menu.
2. From the top menu, select File > Advanced Save.
The Advanced Save dialog appears.

24Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

File Tab

Parameter

Description‣

Enable this option if you want to save the modifications made to thecurrent scene.

Save

‣

Deselect the Save option if you only want to save specific components ofyour scene listed in the Drawings, Palettes or Palette Lists tabs. This will
disable all option in the File tab.

This Version (number)

Saves the current version of the scene. You can rename the current version by
typing a new name into the field.

New Version (number)

Saves the current scene as a new version. You can name this new version by
typing a name into the field.

Overwrite Existing Version

Lets you select an existing version of your scene from the list to overwrite it.

Description

Use this field to add or edit an existing description for the scene version you wantto save.

Mark as Current

Lets you set this scene version as the current one. This version will be
automatically selected as the default current version when the scene is selected in
the Database Selector dialog box

25

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Drawings (Harmony Server only)
The Drawings tab lists the modified drawings.

Parameter

Description

Drawing list

Lets you select the modified drawings to save, and deselect the ones you do notwant to save.

Select All

Selects all modified drawings in list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified drawings in the list.

Palettes Tab
The Palette tab lists the modified colour palettes.

26

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Colour Palette list

Lets you select the colour palette to save, and deselect the ones you do not wantto save.

Show Recovered

Displays the recovered palettes in the list of modified palettes.

Select All

Selects all modified colour palettes in the palette list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified colour palettes in the palette list.

Palette Lists Tab
The Palette Lists tab lists all the modified colour palette lists.

27

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Palette Lists

Lets you select the modified palette list to save, and deselect the ones you do notwant to save.

Show Recovered

Displays the recovered palettes in the list of modified palettes.

Select All

Selects all modified palette lists in the list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified palette lists in the list.

28

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Auto-Matte Dialog Box
The Auto-Matte dialog box lets you generate a matte for a drawing.

How to access the Auto Matte dialog box
1. In the Camera or Drawing view, select the drawing you want to create a matte for.
2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Drawing > Generate Auto-Matte.

l

In the Camera or Drawing menu, select Drawing > Generate Auto-Matte.

Parameter

Description

Settings
Apply to all Drawings

Creates a matte for all the drawings included in layer.

RadiusLets you increase or decrease the radius value depending on the precision orroughness of your line. Use a lower value, the closer to your lines’ contours thematte will be shaped. The higher the value, the looser the matte will be shaped.

Source Art

Lets you select the layer from which you want the matte created: Line ArtColour
Art.

Destination Art

Lets you select the layer on which you want the matte to be created: Line
ArtColour Art.

Clear Destination Art First

Deletes existing artwork on the destination layer before adding a matte to it.

Copy Strokes in Destination

Copies the contour of your lines as invisible lines in the matte drawing. This isuseful if you need to reuse the lines later.

29

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Close Gaps Dialog Box
The Close Gaps dialog box lets you close up drawing areas that not are closed. This may sometimes happen
when painting. You can close small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes between the two
closest points to close the colour zone. You do not need to trace directly over the gap. You can draw it a few
millimeters away. The two closest points automatically close the gap.

How to access the Close Gaps dialog box
1. Select View > Show > Show Strokes or press K to see a preview of the result.
2. To flatten the strokes you draw, click the Auto-Flatten

button in the Tool Properties view.

3. Select Drawing > Clean Up > Close Gaps or press Shift + F10 (Windows/Linux only).
The Close Gaps dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Size

Lets you set the size of the gap you want to be closed.

Apply to all drawings

Closes all gaps in the drawing of the selected layer.

30Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Column Properties Dialog Box
The Column Properties dialog box lets you add, delete or modify elements (drawing folders) in your scene.

How to access the Drawing dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, double-click on a column name. Do not click on the drawing folder name that thecolumn is linked to (this also appears in the column header just below the column name).

Parameter

Description

Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename the selected
element.

Element

Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename the selected
element.

Vector

Select this option if the new element is a vector drawing or if you want to enable
the parameters on the selected element in the Elements list.

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the file format of the bitmap layer.

Scan TypeIf you're planning to scan elements with the Toon Boom Harmony Scan module,
select the scan type from the list.

31

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Field Chart

If you're importing traditional animation, select the size of the paper on which theanimation was drawn.

32Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Column Types Dialog Box
The Columns Types dialog box lets you show or hide columns in the exposure sheet.

How to access the Columns Types dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, select View > Column Types Manager.
The Column Types dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Column Types

Lets you select the types of columns to display in the Xsheet view.

Save as Default

Makes these new settings the default ones used each time you start Harmony.

Restore Default

Returns the settings to their defaults.

33

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box
The Configure Line Art to Colour Art dialog box lets you modify settings for the Line Art and Colour Art layers.

How to access the Configure Line Art to Colour Art dialog box
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Select tool.
2. In the Tool Properties view, hold down the Shift key and click on the Creatre Colour Art from LineArt button.

Parameter

Description

Use rendered version of thedrawing

Renders the drawing and vectorize it to calculate the position of the centrelinethat will produce the colour art stroke.

Maximum Resolution for
rendered image

The size of the rendered image.

Threshold for rendered image

The value of grey processed to create the rendered vectorized arts.

Fitting error for rendered
Beziers

This value represents how precise the fitting of the colour art zone in relation to
the line art will be.

Source layer

Lets you select the layer (Line Art, Colour Art, Underlay or Overlay) you want thecolour art to be created from.

Destination layer

Lets you select the layer (Line Art, Colour Art, Underlay or Overlay) you want thecolour art to be created on.

Clear Destination Art Layer

Deletes the content before the colour art is added. This is useful when you

34Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference GuideFirst

already have artwork on the destination layer.

Perform Line Art to Colour
Art Operation Immediately

Performs the Create Colour Art from Line Art command when you click OK.

35

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Sync Layer feature allows for drawings to be separated on different layers, but to have the same timing.

How to access the Convert to Synced Drawing Layer dialog box
1. right-click on a drawing layer you would like to sync with another layer.
2. From the right-click menu, select Sync Layers With.
In the Choose the Parent Drawing Layer drop-down list, with the exception of the selected layer,
every layer in your scene is listed.
3. To sync a layer with your currently selected layer, from the drop-down list, select a parent drawing
layer and click OK. The child layer immediately updates to the parent layer's timing.

36

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Create Cycle Dialog Box
The Create Cycle dialog box lets you create cycles from a series of drawings and exposures.
When you create a drawing cycle, all the repeated drawings are linked to the same original files. When modify,
repaint, or correct a drawing named “1” for example, all drawings named “1” are updated simultaneously. In
order to modify a drawing independently from its other exposures, you must duplicate the drawing.

How to access the Create Cycle dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select the cell range to loop.

2. In the Timeline toolbar, click the Create Cycle

button (you may have to customize the toolbar todisplay it).
The Create Cycle dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Number of Cycles

Lets you specify the number of cycles, including the current selection.

37

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box
The Create Drawing from Drawing Selection dialog box lets you cut a part of a drawing and send it to a new orexisting layer.

How to access the Create Drawing from Drawing Selection dialog box
1. From the top menu, select Edit > Create Drawing From Drawing Selection or press F9(Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + F9 (macOS).
The Create Drawing From Drawing Selection dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Layer Name

Lets you enter a name for the layer using the naming convention you established.

Cut Artwork From Source

Lets you cut the selected artwork from the model.

38

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Create Function Step On Dialog Box
The Create Function Step On dialog box lets you hold the same value over a selected number of frames for
multiple parameters (pos x, scale y, etc.). This works well when you are animating drawings on 2s or 3s, forexample, and you want to hold the same value for a function over those two or three frames.

How to access the Create Function Step On dialog box
1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your interface:l

Go to the top menu and select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of the interface and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of a view and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the Manage Scripts

button to open the Scripts Manager

window.
3. In the Scripts Manager, in the Files section, select the file TB_CreateStepsOn.js.
The functions associated with that file appear in the Functions section.
4. In the Functions section, select TB_CreateStepsOn.
The Add script to toolbar

button becomes active.

39

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

5. Click on the Add script to toolbar
The TB_CreateStepsOn script

button.
button is added to the Scripting toolbar.

6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Timeline view, select the layer whose parameter values you would like to hold.
9. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the TB_CreateStepsOn script
The Create Function Step On dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Settings

40

button.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Every Number of Frames

Enter in the number of frames you would like to hold your functions.

Selection

First Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds tostart. The playhead location determines the lowest value you can enter for
the first frame. You need to move the playhead to frame one if you would
like to set frame one as the lowest possible starting value.

Last Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds to
stop.

41

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Create Palette Dialog Box
The Create Palette dialog box allows you to create a colour palette for your scene. Palettes created with this
dialog box are added to your scene's palette list, and stored in your scene's palette-library subdirectory.
The Create Palette dialog box is used by default to create palettes. If you have the Advanced Palette Lists
preference enabled, the Palette Browser dialog will open instead, which allows you to decide the level ofpalette list and storage desired for your palette—see Palette Browser Dialog Box.

How to access the Create Palette dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Colour View, click the New Palettebutton over the palette list.

lFrom the Colour view menu, select Palettes > New

Parameter

Description

New Palette Name

Lets you enter a name for the new palette.
Lets you choose one of the following palette types:lPalette TypelColour: A colour palette can contain colours, gradients and bitmap textures.
Pencil Texture: A pencil texture palette can contain textures to apply astransparency filters to pencil lines, in combination to their line colour, to create
various styles of pencil lines.

42Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Database Selector Dialog Box
The Database Selector dialog box lets you connect to your studio's central database when working on
Harmony Server.
NOTE
When you connect to the database, you cannot create new scenes directly from Harmony. The
available scenes must have been already created using the Control Center module.

How to access the Database Selector dialog box
1. Start Harmony
2. In the log-in dialog, select Connect to Database.
3. In the User Name field, type in your Harmony Server username.
4. Click on OK.
The Database Selector dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Environments

Lets you select the scene's environment (project, movie).

43

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Jobs

Lets you select the scene's job (episode, sequence).

ScenesLets you select the scene.

Get rights to modify thescene

Allows you to modify the selected version of the scene as well as to manage andoverwrite other versions. Other users will not be able to open a different versionof the scene until you close the scene.
Allows you to modify the currently selected scene version only. Unless the Get

Get rights to modify thescene version

rights to modify the scene option is also checked, you will not be able to change
other versions of the scene. This allows other users to modify different versionsof the scene while you are working on the selected version.

Get rights to modify all scene
assetsAutomatically gets the rights to modify all of the scene's assets, locking otherusers from making changes to them until you close the scene. This means thatyou will have the rights to modify all the scene's versions, drawings, palettes, its
palette list, but not its library folder. If this option is unchecked, drawings andpalettes will be locked unless you unlock them manually. This can allow anotheruser to work on the scene's drawings and palettes in Harmony Paint while you
are working on the scene's timing or staging in Harmony.

VersionIf you saved different versions of a scene, this lets you select one to open.

44Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box
The Edit Default Paste Preset dialog box lets you modify settings for the keyframe and exposure paste presets,
as well as setting the defaults.

How to access the Edit Default Paste Preset dialog box
1. From the Timeline menu, select Edit > Modify Paste Presets > All or Key Frame or Exposure.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.

Enforce Key Exposure

If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved when
pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default behavior when pasting.

45

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Fill Gap with
Previous Drawing

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

Fill to Next Key
Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.
Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.

Add/Remove
Keyframes

Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.
Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.

46

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box
The Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box lets you reuse key exposures as you animate.

How to access the Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box
1. From the Timeline view menu, select Edit > Modify Paste Presets > Exposure.
The Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Only create drawing files when do they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.

Enforce Key Exposure

Creates a key exposure on the same drawing.

Fill Gap with Previous

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

47

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Drawing
Fill to Next Key Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.
Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.
Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Add/Remove Keyframes
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.
Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.
Reset to Default

Return all values to their defaults.

48

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Element Manager Dialog Box
The Element Manager window lets you Opens the Element Manager window where you can add, delete or
modify elements (drawing folders) in your scene. If you have drawing folders that are not linked to a column inyour scene, use the Element Manager to delete them if needed. See xref Reference > Windows > Element
Manager.

How to access the Element Manager window
1. From the top menu, select Scene > Element Manager.

Parameter

Description

Elements
Delete Elements

Deletes the selected elements.

Delete Elements andDirectories

Deletes the selected layer and its directories (drawing folder).

Add/Modify Element

Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename theselected element.

Vector

Select this option if the new element is a vector drawing or if you want toenable the parameters on the selected element in the Elements list.

49

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the file format of the bitmap layer.

Scan TypeIf you're planning to scan elements with the Toon Boom Harmony Scan
module, select the scan type from the list.

Field Chart

If you're importing traditional animation, select the size of the paper onwhich the animation was drawn.

Add

Creates a new element with the current parameters entered in the
Add/Modify Element section.

ModifyApplies the parameter changes made to the selected element.

50

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box
The Export to Easel JS dialog allows you to export your game character as a sprite sheet, in which eachanimation frame in your scene is rendered as an individual sprite.
Since the Export to Easel JS dialog renders each frame in your scene, there will not be any visible difference
between the way your character is rendered by Harmony and how it is rendered in your game engine.
However, the Export to Easel JS dialog has the following important limitations:lContrary to the Export to Sprite Sheet dialog, the Export to Easel JS only outputs a sprite sheet and an
XML document delimiting each sprite in the sheet. Hence, they cannot be imported into Unity using theHarmony Game SDK package. You must program the logic to import those sprite sheets into your gameengine yourself.

l

The Export to Easel JS dialog does not export anchors and props.

l

To export to Easel JS, you must separate your animation clips using scene versions. The Export
to Easel JS dialog will not export separate animation clips if you have separated them using scene
markers.

l

Fully rendered sprite sheets are much heavier in size than rigged sprite sheets, which is what the Export
to Sprite Sheet dialog exports.

51

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

How to access the Export to Easel JS window
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Game.

2. Click the

Parameter

Export to Easel JS button.

Description

52

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Select Directory
Save Path

The target directory in which to export your sprite sheets.

Save Name

The name of the folder in which the spritesheet and its metadata will besaved. This folder will be located inside the Save Path folder. If it does not exist, it
will be created. This will also be the name of your asset in Unity.

Existing Clips in Folder

Existing Clips List

If you already exported clips for this character, this will display the list of clips that
already exist in the target directory.

Scene Options
The Display from which to render your character. If the Unconnected_Display
option is selected, all of the visual information in your scene will be rendered.
Display

NOTE
You can only create Displays in Harmony Premium.

Sprite Sheet Preferences
Max Width

The maximum width, in pixels, of the exported sprite sheets.

Max Height

The maximum height, in pixels, of the exported sprite sheets.

Expand Sprite Sheet

Creates sprite sheets in the smallest possible size to contain all the sprites, up
until it reaches the maximum width and height.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.
Allows you to choose between one of these two resolution types:lResolution Typel

POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For
example: 1024 x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but
consumes more memory.
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non
powers of two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.

53

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Reuse Frames

ThresholdThis option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.
Calculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existingdrawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big,
only 2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order tocreate a new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you willhave.

Sprite Resolutions
Add Resolution

Allows you to add a resolution in which to export your sprite sheets.

Remove Resolution

Removes the selected resolution from the resolutions list.

Resolutions List

The list of resolutions in which the sprite sheet will be exported. The whole sprite
sheet will be rendered once for each resolution in the list.

54

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box
The Export to Flash Movie dialog box lets you export your animation as a Flash (.swf) movie.

How to access the Export to Flash Movie dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > SWF.
The Export to Flash Movie (.swf) dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

OutputLets you specify the location in which the file will be exported.

Export Range
All

Exports all the frames of your movie.

FramesExport a frame range which you specify

Options

Frame Rate

Lets you enter a Frame rate (fps). By default, it will be set to match the fps of yourHarmony project. If you choose a lower frame rate, your export playback will be

55

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

faster than your actual project. The reverse is also true for a higher frame rate.
Lets you select a JPEG quality:

Jpeg Quality‣

100 = Full quality‣

50 = Average quality at about 1/5th of the size.

‣

25 = Medium quality where loss of high image resolution starts tooccur.

‣

10 = Low quality where “macro-blocking” or large pixelation become
obvious.

‣

1 = Lowest quality where there is extreme loss of colour and detail andthe image becomes nearly unrecognizable.

Protect from Import

Prevents the movie from being imported into another application.

Convert Pencil Lines
to Brush Lines

Retains the thickness of pencil lines.

Compress Movie

Compresses the movie for a lighter format. The movie may lose some quality, but
the file will be lighter.
Lets you select the effects you do NOT want to be rendered in the SWF movie.

Do Not Export

NOTE
Certain Harmony effects are not listed in this section as they are notcompatible and therefore not available for SWF export. These effects will
not appear in the SWF render.

56

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Export to Video Dialog Box
The Export to Video dialog box lets you export your animation as a movie file.

How to access the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.

Parameter

Description

OutputChoose among the following output formats:llVideo Format

Quick Time Movie (*.mov): Available on Windows, macOS and
GNU/Linux.
Windows Media Video (*.wmv): Available on Windows only.

NOTE
On Windows and macOS, Apple QuickTime must be installed in order
to export QuickTime movies. On GNU/Linux, Harmony uses a more
limited, open source QuickTime-compatible library which does not
require additional software.

57

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Output file

The full path and file name of the movie file to export.

BrowseOpens a dialog allowing you to browse to the desired export directory andenter the desired filename.

Export Range
All

Exports all the frames in your scene.

FramesLets you specify the frame range to export using the two input fields to theright. The first input field is for specifying the first frame to export, and thesecond one is for specifying the last frame to export. All the frames inbetween, including the ones specified, will be exported.

Resolution
Lets you specify a resolution to export in relative to your scene's actual
resolution:llResolution listlll

Width / Height

Same as Scene Resolution: Exports a movie in the same resolution as
your scene's resolution.
3/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 75% of the scene's widthand height.
1/2 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 50% of the scene's widthand height.
1/4 of Scene Resolution: Exports a movie at 25% of the scene's widthand height.
Custom: Lets you specify the preferred resolution of your exported
video file in the Width and Height fields below.

Lets you specify the width and height of video file you wish to export, inpixels. To preserve your scene's aspect ratio, changing the value of the Width
or Height field will automatically update the other field with a proportional
value.

Options

Movie Options

Opens the movie settings dialog box for your selected video format, in which
you can set the video and audio compression settings for your video file—see
QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box and Windows Media Video Settings
Dialog Box.

58

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
This button is available on Windows and macOS only.

Opens the video settings dialog box, which allows you to set the video
compression settings for your video file—see OpenQuickTime Video Options
Dialog Box.
Video Options

NOTE
This button is available on GNU/Linux only.

Opens the audio settings dialog box, which allows you to set the audio
compression settings for your video file—see OpenQuickTime Sound Options
Dialog Box.
Sound Options

NOTE
This button is available on GNU/Linux only.

59Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box
The Export to Sprite Sheets dialog allows you to export your rig into a sprite sheet and its animation into
animation metadata, in a package that can be directly imported into Unity using the Harmony package forUnity.
If you created the different animation clips in the same scene and separated with scene markers, all you need to
do is open the Export to Sprite Sheet dialog and export your sprite sheet and animations once.
However, if you separated your animation clips by saving them in different scene versions, you will need to startby exporting the sprite sheet from your base scene, then open each scene version and export their animation
clip one by one.

How to access the Export to Sprite Sheets window
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Game.

60

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

2. Click the

Export to Sprite Sheets button.

Parameter

Description

Select Directory
Asset Path

The target directory in which to export your sprite sheets.

Asset Name

The name of the folder in which the spritesheet and its metadata will besaved. This folder will be located inside the Save Path folder. If it does not exist, it
will be created. This will also be the name of your asset in Unity.

Existing Clips

Existing Clips List

Use Scene Markers to
Export Clips

If you already exported clips for this character, this will display the list of clips that
already exist in the target directory.
Uses scene markers to define the export range, instead of exporting the entire
scene.

Project Settings

Unit Scale

Lets you change the scale when exporting to Unity to accommodate the size ofthe export without it affecting the Harmony scene. This helps you resize assets
properly for Unity without having to resize them in Harmony. The basic scale is
one Animation Field for one Unity unit.

PresetLets you select the unit conversion from Harmony to Unity, by selecting one of 4
presets. Note: a field is a unit of measure in traditional animation grid.

Sprite Sheet Preferences
Max Width

The maximum width, in pixels, of the exported sprite sheets.

Max Height

The maximum height, in pixels, of the exported sprite sheets.

61

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Expand Sprite Sheet

Creates sprite sheets in the smallest possible size to contain all the sprites, up
until it reaches the maximum width and height.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.
Allows you to choose between one of these two resolution types:lResolution Typel

POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For
example: 1024 x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but
consumes more memory.
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non
powers of two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.

Reuse FramesThis option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.

ThresholdCalculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existingdrawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big,
only 2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order tocreate a new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you willhave.

Sprite Resolutions
Add Resolution

Allows you to add a resolution in which to export your sprite sheets.

Remove Resolution

Removes the selected resolution from the resolutions list.

Resolutions List

The list of resolutions in which the sprite sheet will be exported. The whole sprite
sheet will be rendered once for each resolution in the list.

Delete Existing Clips

Select this option to delete clips that you already exported in the export directory.

Bake Animation Curves

Instead of saving your character's animation as interpolations, this bakes theminto frame-by-frame geometric transformations. This can help increase62

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

performance in your game, as your game engine will not have to interpolate yourcharacter's animations on its own. It will however create a heavier package.

Clear Texture Folder

When creating the sprite sheet, Harmony creates temporary files in a folder
named texture inside the scene directory. Check this option to automaticallydelete this folder after exporting your sprite sheets.

63

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Extend Exposure Dialog Box
The Extend Exposure dialog box lets you extend the exposure of a selected cell in the Timeline or Xsheet.

How to access the Extend Exposure dialog box
1. Select a cell and do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Extend Exposure.

lPress F5.

The Extend Exposure dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Extend to Frame

Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure. You can
expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that were originally
there or move the subsequent frames forward in time.

Overwrite

Lets you expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that wereorginally there.

InsertLets you expose the drawing in the frames and move the subsequent frames
forward in the Timeline view.

64Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box
The Fill Cells Randomly dialog box lets you Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give amaximum and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony to choose the random values from. The
selection can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

How to access the Fill Cells Randomly dialog box
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Animation > Cell > Fill Cells Randomly.

lIn the Xsheet view, click the Fill Cells Randomly

button (you may have to customize

the toolbar to display it).
The Fill Cells Randomly dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Minimum Value

The lowest value to be used in the randomized exposure or keyframe value.

Maximum Value

The highest value to be used in the randomized exposure or keyframe value.

Hold

The exposure holding value.

Whole Numbers

If you are applying this to a drawing column, this option lets you avoid having
decimal points.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the selection.

65

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Fill Selection Dialog Box
The Fill Selection dialog box lets you Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection can beover one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over many columns, an entire column, or many columns.
You can use numbers, words, letters, or any alphanumeric value.

How to access the Fill Selection dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a cell range.

1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Fill Selection.

l

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Fill Selection

button. Note that you may have to add thisbutton to your toolbar by right-clicking on it and selecting Customize.
lPress Ctrl + T (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + T (macOS)).

The Fill Selection dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Value

This is the value to be used in the filled selection.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the selection.

66

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Import Images Dialog Box
T-HFND-007-011
The Import Images dialog box lets you import bitmap images and vectorize them, making the images editable.
Then you can use a variety of drawing tools to edit the image. Or you can always keep the original bitmap
image as is.
Also, you can choose to import bitmap images on bitmap or vector layers depending on your project..

How to open the Import Images dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > Import > Images.

l

In the File toolbar, click the Import Imagesl

In the Xsheet view, right-click anywhere in the frame area and select Import >Images.

The Import Images dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files

67

button.

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

BrowseLets you find and select images on your computer.

Create Layers(s)Create layers for imported images.

Create Single Layer
Named

Creates a new layer with the specified name and imports the images into it.

Create Layer(s) Basedon Filenames

Creates a layer based on each unique filename prefix. For example, if you import
three files named a-1.tga, a-2.tga and b-1.tga, this will create two layers, one
named "a" and one named "b". Layer "a" will contain the two first images and "b"will contain the third one.

Add to Existing Layer

Imports the images into the specified layer. Note that you can only import intolayers that are compatible with your import options. For example, if you're
importing images as vector drawings, you can only import them into vector
drawing layers.

Layer

Import Options

Depending on how you choose to import images, the Alignment section offers
different options.

Keep as Original
BitmapRetains an imported image as a bitmap. In the Alignment section, decide on thesize and placement of your image within the camera frame. Depending on the
Scene Settings (the height and width in pixels that you chose for your project), an
image that you import may get scaled to the point where all its individual pixels
become visible.

Import as Toon Boom
Bitmap Drawing

Imports a drawing into a vector layer where you can edit the image using thedrawing tools.

Convert toToon Boom Vector
Drawing

Imports a drawing and converts it to a Toon Boom vector drawing.

Alignment (Keep As Original Bitmap)
Fit:
Rules

Adjusts the image's size to fit completely within the scene's field, both verticallyand horizontally, making sure the entire image is visible.
If the image's orientation is portrait, then it will adjust the image's height to fit the68Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

field's height, without affecting the image's aspect ratio:

If the image orientation is landscape, then it will adjust the image's width to fit thefield's width, without affecting the image's aspect ratio:

Pan:
This has the opposite effect to the fit parameter. The image's smallest dimension
will be made to fit the scene frame's matching dimension, and the image's largest
dimension will be adjusted proportionally, making the image fill the entire scene
field, and bleed past its boundaries it if its aspect ratio does not match the field's
aspect ratio. This option can be used to import a panning background image, also
referred to as a pan.
If the image's orientation is portrait, it will adjust the image's width to fit thefield's width, without affecting its aspect ratio:

69Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

If the image's orientation is landscape, it will adjust the image's height to fit thefield's height, without affecting its aspect ratio:

This has the opposite effect to the fit parameter. The image's smallest dimension
will be made to fit the scene frame's matching dimension, and the image's largest
dimension will be adjusted proportionally, making the image fill the entire scene
field, and bleed past its boundaries it if its aspect ratio does not match the field's
aspect ratio. This option can be used to import a panning background image, also
referred to as a pan.
If the image's orientation is portrait, it will adjust the image's width to fit thefield's width, without affecting its aspect ratio:

70Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Project
This
hasResolution:
the opposite
Scaleseffectto thetheimage
fit parameter.
to fit the scene's
The
image's smallest
resolution,
makingdimension
each pixel
willtheinbeimagemade taketo fitone
the pixel
sceneinframe'sthescene's
matchingfield. For
dimension,and the image's
example,if the image's
largestdimension will
dimensions
in pixels
be adjusted
are half
proportionally,of
the scene's resolution
making theinimage fillpixels,thenthetheentireimage'sscene
field, and bleed
dimensions
willpast
appearits to beboundaries
halfof the scene
it if itsfield's
aspectdimensions.
ratio
does not match thefield's aspect ratio. This
option can be used to import
Alignment (Import as Toon Boom Bitmap Drawing)a panning background image,also referred to as a pan.
If the image's orientation is
portrait, it will adjust theimage's width to fit the field's
width, without affecting its
aspect ratio:

Horizontal Fit:
Adjusts the image's size so that its width matches the scene's width, without
affecting its aspect ratio.

Rules

If the image's orientation islandscape, it will adjust theimage's height to fit thefield's height, without
affecting its aspect ratio:

Vertical Fit:
Adjusts the image's size so that its height matches the scene's height, without
affecting its aspect ratio.

This has the opposite effectto the fit parameter. The
image's smallest dimension
will be made to fit the scene
frame's matching dimension,and the image's largest
dimension will be adjusted
proportionally, making theimage fill the entire scene
field, and bleed past its
boundaries it if its aspectratio does not match the71Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Actual Size: Imports the image in its actual size, without adjusting its size relative
to the scene's resolution. For example, if the image's dimensions in pixels are halfof the scene's resolution in pixels, then the image's dimensions will appear to behalf of the scene field's dimensions.
Transparency
Premultiplied with White: Individual pixels at the edge of an image are blended
with white.
Premultiplied with Black:Pixels at the edge of an image are blended with black.

Alpha

Straight: Pixels at the edge of an image are blended with black, white and greys.
Clamp Colour to Alpha:Premultiplies the colour value with the alpha value. Whenthe colour is clamped to the alpha, the colour value cannot be higher than thealpha value. It calculates the real colour value faster. When the RGB values are
multiplied with the alpha value, that is to say, if you have a pixel of value R=247,
G=188, B=29 and the alpha is 50% or the image has a 50% transparency, thenthe actual RGB values that are output would be half of the amounts listed above.

Vectorization

Black and White

Vectorizes drawings with a solid black line. This creates a 100% vector-based
drawing and paints it with the Vectorized Line colour swatch from your scene's
palette.

Grey

Vectorizes the image as a mix of vector contour and greyscale bitmap filling. Lines
keep the texture from the scan, and the white of the paper becomes transparent.

72Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

New Preset

Lets you create a new preset.

Delete Preset

Lets you delete any preset in the list.

Edit Preset

Lets you edit the vectorization parameters for the selected preset.

73Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box
The Tool Presets window lets you create new tool presets and manage them.

How to access the Manage Tool Presets window
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

l

Right-click an empty area below the top menu and select Tool Presets.

2. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the Manage Presets button.

Parameter

Description

Icon

Lets you select a preset to manage.

ImportLets you import an existing preset.

ExportLets you export a preset for use in other projects.

74Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

DeleteRemoves the preset from the list of tool presets.

Name

Lets you change the name of the preset.

Icon list

Lets you select an icon for the preset.

Folder icon

Lets you select an image for the preset.

ShortcutLets you assign a keyboard shortcut to the new preset.

ColourSaves the current colour into the tool preset.

Tool

If you disable this option, only the colour will be associated. You could, forexample, set three different colours with shortcuts not associated with any
tool. The colour preset would then work on any selected tool. Selecting thebrush tool was only a vehicle to get into the New Tool Preset dialog box.

UpdateAfter adjusting the settings for a preset, the current properties are applied tothe presets, as well as any other changes you made in the Manage Tool
Presets window.

75

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Marker Colour Dialog Box
The Marker Colour dialog box lets you set the colour of scene markers that are displayed at the top of theTimeline view (in the frame counter area). Using colours for scene markers helps to differentiate them visually,making them easy to identify in the Timeline view.
You can select a colour by choosing from a basic set of colours, using the colour wheel or by specifying the HSV
or RGB values. Once you have selected a colour, you can adjust its intensity and save it as a custom colour thatyou can reuse.

How to access the Marker Colour dialog box
1. In the frame counter area of the Timeline view, select a frame range to mark.

2. Right-click and select Create Scene Marker.
The Timeline Scene Marker dialog box opens. The Colour box displays a black colour swatch, or thecolour of the last scene marker you created.

3. Click the colour swatch.
The Marker Colour dialog box opens.

76Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Basic colours

A basic set of colours to choose from.

Custom colours

Displays the custom colours you previously stored using the Add to Custom
Colours button.

Add to custom colours

Lets you add the selected colour to the Custom colours list above.

Colour wheel

Lets you select a colour by dragging the T-shaped pointer.

Value slider

Once you select a colour, you can drag the slider to change the intensity and see
it previewed in the Colour Preview window below..

Colour Preview

Displays the colour you are currently selecting. To apply the colour, click OK.

Hue, Saturation, Value

Lets you set the hue (colour), saturation (amount of colour) and brightness(value) of the colour.

Red, Green, Blue

Lets you set the red, green and blue values.

77Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box
The Movie Settings dialog box lets you set the compression settings for the movie you will export.

NOTE
This dialog can only be accessed on Windows and macOS. On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be
installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the Movie Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to QuickTime Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Settings button.

Parameter

Description

Video

Settings

Opens the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box. This is where you
can set the video compression settings for the movie you will export—see
QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box on page 131.

FilterOpens the Choose Video Filter dialog box, where you can select from a range of78

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

filters to apply to your video export.

Size

Opens the Export Size Settings dialog box. This dialog is available because of theway the Apple QuickTime interface is designed, but its settings are not taken inaccount by Harmony. The size of the exported video is determined by Harmony.

Sound
Opens the Sound Settings dialog box. This is where you can you set the soundSettings

compression settings for the movie you will export—see QuickTime Sound
Settings Dialog Box on page 129.
If this option is enabled, the video will be optimized to start playing while it isdownloading, as videos do in web browsers and web-based streaming
applications.
lPrepare for Internet
Streamingll

Fast Start: The video plays as soon as enough data required to start
playback has been downloaded.
Fast Start - Compressed Header: Same as Fast Start, except the header iscompressed for an even faster start. Requires QuickTime 3.0 or later.
Hinted Streaming: Allows you to optimize the movie file for streaming
through QuickTime Server Software. Click on the Settings button toconfigure how hints are created in your movie file.

79Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

New Scene Dialog Box
The New Scene window lets you create a new scene.

How to access the New Scene window
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > New.

l

In the File toolbar, click the NewlPress Ctrl + N (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + N (macOS).

button.

The New Scene dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you type in a name for the new scene.

Location

Lists the locations you used most frequently for storing scenes.

BrowseOpens a browser in which you can specify a location for the new scene that80

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

is not listed in the Location list.
Camera Size

Opens a list of resolutions.

+ (Create Custom
Resolution)

Opens the New Resolution window in which you can create a custom
resolution that is added to the Camera Size list.

- (Delete Custom Resolution)

Lets you remove a custom resolution from the Camera Size list.

Width

Indicates the width of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size list.

Frame Rate

Indicates the frame rate of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size
list.

81

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

New Tool Preset Dialog Box
The New Tool Preset dialog box lets you create new tool presets and manage them.
Tool presets let you save a variety of settings and are very efficient for accessing the tools you use most often.
That way, the tool is already set with the desired properties, such as colour, line thickness, whether to enable
Draw Behind or Auto Flatten mode, and so on. You can create presets for these tools and many more: Brush,
Pencil, Eraser, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Line.
The difference between a tool preset and a brush preset is that when you save a tool preset, you have theoption of saving the colour and assigning a shortcut, which you cannot do with brush presets.

How to access the New Tool Preset dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

l

Right-click an empty area below the top menu and select Tool Presets.

2. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the New Tool Preset button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the preset a meaningful name.

Icon list

Lets you select an icon for the preset.

82Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Folder icon

Lets you select an image for the preset.

ShortcutLets you assign a keyboard shortcut to the preset.

ColourSaves the current colour into the tool preset.

Tool

If you disable this option, only the colour will be associated. You could, forexample, set three different colours with shortcuts not associated with any
tool. The colour preset would then work on any selected tool. Selecting thebrush tool was only a vehicle to get into the New Tool Preset dialog box.

83

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box
T-ANIMPA-006-009
This dialog box lets you adjust the Onion Skin and Light table transparency parameters.

How to access the Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency dialog boxl

In the Drawing view toolbar, click on the Top Lightbutton to open the Onion Skin and Light

Table Transparency dialog box.

Command

Description

Onion Skin Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for the onion skin opacity display. Moving theslider all the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to theright = 100% opacity.

Lighttable Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for the light table display. Moving the slider all
the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right =100% opacity.

LightTable Wash

Sets the washed-out value for the light table display. Moving the slider all theway to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right = 100%
opacity.

Bitmap Background
Wash

Sets the maximum opacity value for the background wash. Moving the slider all
the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right =100% opacity. Only works for bitmap layers.

Pencil Lines Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for central vector lines (lines made by the
Pencil or Shape tools). Moving the slider all the way to the left = 0% opacity.
Moving the slider all the way to the right = 100% opacity.

84Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Palette Browser Dialog Box
The Palette Browser dialog allows you to decide the level of palette list and palette storage to use when you
want to create, clone, link to or import a palette.
This dialog only appears if you have the Advanced Palette Lists preference enabled, which is disabled bydefault. When Advanced Palette Lists mode is disabled, Harmony automatically stores palettes in a scene's
palette list, inside the scene's palette-library subdirectory.

How to access the Palette Browser dialog box
1. Start and log in.
2. Close the Database Selector dialog box.
3. From the top menu, select Tools > Palette Operations.
1. In the Palette Operations dialog box that opens, select the palette you want to clone at the location andlevel in which it was stored.
2. Click Clone.
Parameter

Palette Location

Description
This allows you to browse for the physical location of the palette file in yourdatabase.
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, you can still select the scene's own job or85

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

environment as a location. Stand alone scenes have a provisional job andenvironment storage space inside the scene's directory. The files in these storage
spaces can be imported into a database scene's actual job and environment whenimporting the scene to a Harmony database. If you never intend to use Harmony
Server, you should keep your palettes inside your scene or element's palette
libraries.
Stores the palette file in the selected environment's palette library. Environments
are typically used to contain a whole production, series or feature film.
Environmentll

In Harmony Server, this stores the palette in /USA_DB/environments/[environment name]/palette-library.
In Harmony Stand Alone, this stores the palette inside the scene's
directory, under environments/Digital/palette-library.

Stores the palette file in the selected job's palette library. Jobs are typically used tocontain episodes in a series, or any set of scenes that is intended to be put in thesame sequence.
Job
l

l

In Harmony Server /USA_DB/jobs/[job name]/palette-library.
In Harmony Stand Alone, this stores the palette inside the scene's
directory, under jobs/Digital/palette-library.

Scene

Stores the palette file in the selected scene's palette library, which is thepalette-library subdirectory of the scene's directory.

Element

Stores the palette file inside the selected element's palette library. This library is
located inside the scene's directory, under elements/[elementname]/palette-library.

PaletteThis lists the existing palettes in the selected location.

New Palette Name

If you are creating or cloning a palette, use this field to enter the palette file's
name. The palette will be listed under this name in your palette list. On your filesystem, it will be named after its palette name, followed by the extension .plt.
When creating a palette, you can choose between the following palette types:lPalette TypelColour: A colour palette can contain colours, gradients and bitmap
textures.
Pencil Texture: A pencil texture palette can contain textures to apply astransparency filters to pencil lines, in combination to their line colour, tocreate various styles of pencil lines.

86Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Palette List

Scene Palette List

This allows you to decide if you want the palette to be added to your scene's
palette list, or to the currently selected element's palette list.
Adds the palette to the scene's palette list. Palettes in the scene's palette list areavailable to all the elements in your scene. This is especially useful if you aredoing digital animation, where character models can be made of many layers thatneed to use the same palette.
Adds the palette to the currently selected element's palette list. Palettes in an

Element Palette List

element's palette list can only be used by the drawings in this element, and will
only be listed in the Colour view when this element is selected. This can be useful
if you are doing traditional animation, where each character is usually drawn on asingle layer, and you want each layer to have its own palette.

87Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Palette Operations Dialog Box
When you start Toon Boom Harmony connected to the database, you can access the Palette Operations dialog
box which lets you clone, rename, or delete palettes in your database, without having to open a scene orbrowse the database's file system in your operating system's shell.
In Harmony, palettes are individual *.plt files that can be copied, transferred and stored. When a palette is
created from Harmony, it needs to be stored somewhere. By default, the palette file is stored in the scene
directory in a palette-library folder unless you specify a different location.
There are four locations where you can find palette-library folders: Element, Scene, Job and Environment.

How to access the Palette Operations dialog box
1. Start and log in.
2. Close the Database Selector dialog box.
3. From the top menu, select Tools > Palette Operations.

Parameter

Description

Environment

The production, project, feature film or series.

Job

The episode and sequence from each environment.

Scene

The scenes from each job.

Element

The layers and columns in each scene.

PaletteThe scene palettes.

88Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Description

Notes, if any, of the project.

Clone

Opens the Palette Browser dialog box from which you can select the level inwhich to store the palette file.

RenameLets you rename a palette.
Lets you delete a palette.

DeleteNOTE
It is not recommended to disable the warning message that appears when
you are attempting to delete a palette as this operation cannot be undone.

Close

Closes the Palette Operations dialog box.

89

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Paste Preset Dialog Box
When pasting key frames and exposures, you can modify the existing presets to your liking. There are threepresets you can modify: the default presets for both key frames and exposures, key frames only and exposures
only.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.

Enforce Key Exposure

If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved when
pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default behavior when pasting.

Fill Gap with
Previous Drawing

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

Fill to Next Key

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

90

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Exposure
Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.
Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.

Add/Remove
Keyframes

Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.
Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.

91

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Paste Special Dialog Box
The Paste Special dialog box lets you determine how templates and symbols are imported in the Timeline view.
When you import a template in the Timeline view, all layers are created as well as drawings and keyframes. You
can choose to import only the keyframes without the drawings or import only the drawings that are notalready in your layers. You can adjust the behaviour using the Paste Special dialog box.When you import asymbol in your scene, its full length is exposed by default. If you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s left side,
all the frames will be exposed. However, if you import it into an existing layer, you can use the Paste Special
dialog box to adjust the import behaviour to fit your requirements.Once you set the parameters, Harmony willreuse them each time you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s right side until you set new parameters.

How to access the Paste Special dialog box
1. In the Library view, select the symbol or template to import.
2. Do one of the following:lWhile holding down the Alt key, click and drag on the template, then drop it on the Timelineview, over the layer and at the frame where you want to paste it.

lPress Ctrl + C (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + C (macOS). Then, in the Timeline view, click on theframe where you want to paste the template and press Ctrl + B (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + B(macOS)

The Paste Special dialog box opens.

92Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Do Nothing

Does not create or overwrite drawings.

Update Drawing
Pivot

Revises the drawing pivot in the destination to use the same drawing pivot as thefirst drawing in the template. If you have a range of drawings selected in thedestination, the pivot points of all selected drawings will be updated.
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing
files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures to a
drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with the same
name do not already exist in the destination.
Replace existing drawings. Create drawing files when they do not exist: Replacedrawings with the same names to update a scene with new modified drawings
and preserve the animation.
Tip: If you don't want to lose the existing animation when pastinga template, such as when placing new drawings after the
animation, then delete the template's animation. It will still haveupdated the drawings but not override the existing animation.

Add/Remove
Exposure

Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.
Enforce Key Exposure: If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings,
they are preserved when pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default
behavior when pasting.
Fill Gap with Previous Drawing: Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view
with the previous drawing.
Fill to Next Key Exposure: Fills selected area till the next key exposure.
Paste all frames of the symbol (full movie): When enabled, the Paste Special command exposes all the symbol's frames instead of only the first one.

93

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Symbols
Copy symbols if they
do not exist

This is the default setting for this operation and will prevent Symbols in an Action
template from being copied.

Duplicate symbols

Creates a duplicate of the symbol instead of linking the Symbol instance to the original one. The new Symbol is created in the Library.

Paste all Frames ofthe symbol (fullmovie)

When enabled, the Paste Special command exposes all the symbol's frames
instead of only the first one.

Add Remove/Keyframes
MotionCopies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.

Velocity

Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.

Rotation

Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the new frame.

Scale

Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.

Skew

Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.

Force Keyframes at
Function's Beginningand EndAdds a keyframe to the beginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing
the source function.

Offset Keyframes

When pasting functions, offsets keyframes from the function's last frame value
by the values in the pasted function. This will continue the progression of afunction instead of repeating the values.

Options
Do nothing: Does not create, overwrite, merge or link palettes.
Palettes

Reuse palettes. Copy palettes if they do not exist: Palettes in the destination
drawings are left as they are.
Copy and overwrite existing palettes: Overwrites destination palettes with thepalettes from the source drawings.

94

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Copy and create new palette files: Creates new palette files, placing them at thesame relative environment and scene level as the source. If the palettes in thetemplates were stored at the environment level of the source scene, the paste
operation will place the palettes in the environment level of the destination scene.
Copy and create new palette files in element folder: Creates new palette files inthe element folders of the destination scene, rather than in the same relative job or
environment.
Copy palette and merge colours. Add new colours only: Adds new colours to thedestination palettes and ignores colours that are the same in the two palettes.
Copy palettes and update existing colours: Adds new colours to the destination
palette and updates duplicate colours in the destination with colour values fromthe source.
Link to original palettes (colour model): Links the colour palettes in thedestination scene to the palettes in the source. Use this to link drawings to thepalettes in a colour model.
Copy scene palettes and merge colours. Add new colours only: Adds newcolours to the destination scene palettes and ignores colours that are the same in
the two palettes.
Copy scene palettes and update existing colours: Adds new colours to thedestination scene palette and updates duplicate colours in the destination withthe colour values from the source.
Normal (forward):Pastes your selection as is, starting with the first cell and ending with the last.

Cycles

Reverse: Pastes your selection in reverse, starting with the last cell and ending
with the first.
Forward > Reverse:Pastes your selection as a yo-yo, starting with the first cell,going to the last one and ending with the first cell.
Reverse > Forward: Pastes your selection as a reverse yo-yo, starting with thelast cell, going to the first one and ending with the last cell.

Nodes

Create New Columns: A new column is created when you copy and paste nodes
from the layer in the Timeline view. If the layers are linked to function curves, thefunction curves, drawings and timing will be duplicated.

Elements

Reuse existing elements: Lets you paste existing elements without creating new
ones. This should be used only when pasting within versions of the same scene.

Validation

Match by Node/Layer Name: When pasting a template with a hierarchy onto
another hierarchy, this option looks to match the pasting elements with the samelayer or node name, rather than the same hierarchical structure. This means that95

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

even if the two hierarchies are different, a new pose of a character's body part will
still be pasted on the correct body part layer, as long as both layers are named the
same.

96

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Pose Copier Dialog Box
T-RIG3-007-007
The pose copier contains many buttons and other information to facilitate the insertion of poses in the
animation.

Parameter

Description

Preview Window

Based on master template's generated thumbnails, previews currently selected
frames.

Load Selected Template

Updates the template with the newly selected template.

Template Name

Name of the currently selected template.

Vertical Slider (SLV)

Linked to the slv- node of the node system.

Horizontal Slider 1 (SLH)

Linked to the slh- node of the node system. Default slider for the pose copier if
no guide layers are created.

97

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Horizontal Slider 2 (SLX)

Linked to the slx- node of the node system.

Fill to Next Key Exposure

Having this option checked will automatically extend the exposure of thepasted frame up to the next key.

Use Default Destination
ModuleWhen enabled, the pasted keys will automatically refer to the destination
defined in the option Set Default Destination Module.

Paste by Layer Name

When this option is checked the pasted layers will look for the individual layer
name instead of matching the hierarchy of the template.

Set Default Destination Module

Instead of selecting the destination every time, the layer set as default
destination will automatically paste the keys onto those layers.

Find

This will center on the default destination in the timeline.

Paste

Paste the current position of the pose copier onto the destination.

VerticalCurrently selected frame on the vertical slider. (based on frame name in slvnode)

Horizontal 1

Currently selected frame on the horizontal slider 1. (based on frame name inslh-node)

Horizontal 2

Currently selected frame on the horizontal slider 2. (based on frame name inslx-node)

Frame

Frame number of the selected frame within the master template.

98Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Preferences Dialog Box
The Preferences dialog box lets you adjust preferences to suit your work style, allowing you to work more
efficiently.
NOTE
To learn more about the individual preferences, refer to the Preferences guide.

NOTE
Some preferences require you to exit and restart the application, or close a view and reopen it.

How to access the Preferences dialog box
Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences (macOS).

l

Press Ctrl + U (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + U (macOS).

99

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Recolour Drawings Dialog Box
The Recolour Drawing dialog box allows you to replace all instances of a colour or texture in drawings with adifferent colour or texture swatch in one of the scene's palettes. This replaces the colours or textures in thedrawings without requiring you to modify the palettes. You can use this dialog to perform colour replacement in
the current drawing, in all the drawings in one or several layers or in all drawings in your scene.
This dialog will replace the colour or texture that is currently selected in the Colour view with the colour or
texture that you select inside the dialog.

How to access the Recolour Drawings dialog
1. In the Colour view, select the colour or texture swatch you want to replace by doing one of thefollowing:lSelect the palette in which the colour or texture swatch is located, then select the swatch you
wish to replace.

l

If the drawing in the Camera or Drawing view contains the colour or texture you want toreplace, select the Dropper

tool in the Tools toolbar, then click on that colour or texture in

the drawing. The Colour view will automatically select that colour or texture's palette as wellas that colour or texture's swatch.

100Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

2. Do one of the following:l

Right-click on the swatches list, then select Recolour Drawings.

lOpen the Colour view menu

Parameter, then select Colours > Recolour Drawings.

Description
Allows you to select which drawings will be affected by the colour replacement:ll

Replace Colour In

Current drawing: Replaces the selected colour in the currently selecteddrawing only.
All drawings in the currently selected layers: Replaces the selected colour
in all the drawings in the layer that is currently selected in the Timelime or
Xsheet view.

NOTE
This option can work with several drawing layers selected.

lReplacement Colour

All drawings in the scene: Replaces the selected colour in every drawing
in the current scene.

Allows you to select the palette and colour or texture swatch to replace theselected colour or texture with.

101

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Remove Dirt Dialog Box
The Remove Dirt dialog box lets you select small dots and hairs on a drawing for removal.

When paper drawings are passed through a scanner, there can be some hair and dirt scattered across them.
These lines and dots need to be cleaned. Harmony provides different tools to help get rid of them quickly.

How to access the Remove Dirt dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Dirt.

l

From the Camera or Drawing View menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Dirt.

l

Press Shift + D.

Parameter

Description
Lets you adjust the amount of detail removed from the layer.

SliderRaising the Remove Dirt level will select bigger dots. When selecting larger dots,
be careful not to lose small details like pupils and nostrils. Once you have chosen
the level, you can apply it to the current drawing or the entire animation sequence.
This is a quick way to get rid of most dirt and dust.
During this process, the dirt that will be removed is highlighted in red.

Apply to all drawings

Applies the operation to all drawings in the layer.

102Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Remove Hair Dialog Box
The Remove Hair dialog box lets you remove any small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thicklines or filled zones. Increasing the Remove Hair level value will select larger strokes for removal from thedrawing.

When paper drawings are passed through a scanner, there can be some hair and dirt scattered across them.
These lines and dots need to be cleaned. Harmony provides different tools to help get rid of them quickly.

How to access the Remove Hair dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select the drawing containing the drawing to clean.
2. From the top menu, select View > Show > Show Strokes to display the invisible lines or press K.
3. In the top menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Hair.

Parameter

Description

SliderLets you adjust the number of length of hairs selected.

Apply to all drawings

Applies the operation to all drawings in the layer.

103

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box appears when you save a scene for the first time in Harmony Server.

How to access the Save dialog Box
1. Make sure you have the necessary rights to save the current scene version. If you do not, you canacquire the rights by selecting File > Rights to Modify Scene Version or Rights to Modify Scene in
the top menu.
2. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select File > Save.

l

In the File toolbar, click on thelPress Ctrl + S (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + S (macOS).

Save button.

When saving the scene for the first time, the Save dialog box opens, prompting you to name theversion.

Parameter

Description

104Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

This Version

Allows you to enter the name of the current version.

Description

Enter a short description of the current version.

105

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Scene Settings Dialog Box
The Scene Settings dialog box lets you select settings for the resolution of your scene, its alignment and theresolution of bitmap drawings and textured brush strokes.
You are already required to select resolution and alignment settings when creating a scene, but those settings
can also be modified later using the Scene Settings dialog box.

How to access the Scene Settings dialog box
1. In the top menu, select Scene > Scene Settings.
The Scene Settings dialog box opens.

Resolution Tab

The resolution tab allows you to set the width and height of your scene in pixels as well as whether the angle ofthe field of view.
Icon

Parameter

Description
You can select your project’s resolution (camera frame size) from thispreset list.

Resolution Presetsl

HDTV_1080p24: The standard definition for high definition
television at 24 frames per second, mostly used in the Americas
and some Asian countries that used the NTSC standard for106Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

analogue television.
lll

HDTV_1080p25: The standard definition for high definition
television at 25 frames per second, usually for broadcasting inEuropean, African, Asian and Australian countries that used the
PAL or SECAM standard for analogue television.
HDTV_720p24: The former standard high definition resolution
at 24 frames per second.
4K_UHD: A standard ultra HD (4K) format for television
productons. 4K implies that the width of the image is of, give or
take, 4000 pixels.

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

film-2K: A standard HD format for film projectors with a low
aspect ratio.
film-4K: A standard ultra HD (4K) format for film projectors
with a low aspect ratio.
film-1.33_H: The standard resolution for the academy film
format that conforms to the standard 4:3 aspect ratio.
film-1.66_H: The standard resolution for widescreen film format
that conforms to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
film-1.66_V: The standard resolution for widescreen film
format, but with a vertical field of view.
Cineon: The standard format for 35 mm Kodak/Cineon film.
NTSC: The standard resolution and framerate for analogue
standard definition televisions in most of the Americas (except
Brazil, Paraguay, Uruguay and Argentina), Japan, Taiwan, South
Korea, the Philippines and Myanmar.
PAL: The standard resolution and framerate for analogue
standard definition televisions in Europe, Africa, Australia, mostof Asia, Brazil, Uruguay and Argentina.
2160p-240p: A series of standard widescreen presets named
after their resolution heights.
low: A resolution based on NTSC with half of its standard
dimensions.
Web_Video: A legacy format for web streaming.
Game_512: A preset for the gaming pipeline, with a squarecanvas.
WebCC_Preview: The preset used by WebCC to renderpreviews of scenes in a Harmony Server database.
HDTV: The standard definition for high definition television at
24 frames per second, with a horizontal fit field of view.

107Chapter 1: Dialog Boxesl

Selected Resolution Preset

HDTV_Vertical: The standard definition for high definition
television at 24 frames per second, with a vertical fit field ofview.

Displays the name of the selected resolution preset just below thepresets list. If you have made any changes to the resolution sinceselecting a preset, this will display "(custom)".
Allows you to save the current resolution settings as a new preset. If
you have a resolution preset selected, this button is only available if
you have made changes to the resolution since selecting the preset.
You will be prompted to type in the name of the new resolution preset.
If using Harmony Server, you will also be asked to select in which partof the database you want the preset to be saved.

Save Resolution Setting

Resolution

The resolution of the scene defines the width and height of the canvasin pixels. By default, the scene will be rendered in this resolution. If
using bitmap layers or textured brush strokes, the definition of the
pixels in your artwork will also be based on the scene's resolution.

Scene Width

The width of the resolution for the scene, in pixels.

Scene Height

The width of the resolution for the scene, in pixels.

Aspect Ratio

Displays the ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of
the scene. For example, if the scene width and height are the samevalue, this ratio equals 1. The standard aspect ratio for widescreen
televisions is 1.777. For legacy displays, it is 1.333.

Frame per second

The amount of frames in your scene that should play out every second.
The standard framerate for film production is 24 fps. However,televisions in some countries play at 25 fps.

108Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The angle of the field of view, which determines the size of the camera
cone as well as the way the field grid used to position elements isadjusted to fit the scene.
lField of ViewlHorizontal Fit: The field of view is automatically adjusted sothat the field grid and camera cone fit the horizontal length of
the scene.
Vertical Fit: The field of view is automatically adjusted so thatthe field grid and camera cone fits the vertical length of thescene.

Alignment Tab
The alignment tab is used to determine the aspect ratio, the position and the size of the field grid used toposition elements in the scene.
In Harmony are positioned in fields, a unit used in traditional animation which traditionally ranges from 0 to 12
followed by a cardinal direction, and in which 0,0 is the center of the scene.
The default Alignment setting in Harmony is based on such a traditional 4:3 drawing grid. In a scene with an
aspect ratio of 4:3, this means that positioning an element 12 fields in any direction will make it reach one of
the edges of the camera field. For example, 12 North is the vertical position of the upper edge of the camera
field, and 12 East is the horizontal position of the right edge of the camera field.
However, since the most commonly used scene resolutions have an aspect ratio of 16:9, and the default grid isin a 4:3 proportion, the grid used to position element will not be in the same proportions as the camera field.
The way this is handled is determined by the Field of View setting in the Resolution tab. If your field of view is
set to Horizontal fit, the field grid will be made to fit the scene horizontally, and stretch beyond the verticaledges of the scene. This means that 12 East will still be the right edge of the screen, but the position of theupper edge of the scene will be about 9.36 North. Likewise, if the field of view is set to Vertical Fit, the upperedge of the field will be at 12 North, but the right edge will be at about 16 East.
Some artists or studios may prefer to use a square fields grid, where fields have the same size horizontally andvertically.

109

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description
The list of alignment presets. By default, Harmony has these two alignment
presets:l

Alignmentl

4:3 12 Fields: Defines the units of your project to have a 4:3 ratio and sets
up 12 of these units to run both vertically and horizontally in four cardinalquarters (NW, NE, SW, SE). This is the default setting, and it corresponds
to an animation grid used in traditional animation. Hence, coordinates
based on a traditional animation grid can be entered in Harmony as is toposition elements where they are expected to be.
Square 12 Fields: Defines the units of your project to have a 1:1 or squareratio and sets up 12 units to run both vertically and horizontally in four
cardinal quarters (NW, NE, SW, SE).

NOTE
When the Grid is displayed in the Camera and Drawing view, it is always
based on the 4:3 12 Fields alignment preset, regardless of your scene'salignment setting. To display the grid, from the top menu, select View

> Grid > Show Grid.

Units Aspect Ratio

The aspect ratio of each field. This describes the proportional difference between
the width and the height of the field. By default, it is set to 4:3, which means thewidth of each field will take 4 unites of length for each 3 units the height of the
field takes. In other words, the width of a field is 1.333 times its height. If set to,for example, 1:1, the fields will be perfectly square.

110Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The number of fields the grid should have in each direction. In the Number ofUnits fields, enter the number of horizontal, vertical and depth units for yourscene’s grid.
The grid is a specific size based on the scene's resolution and field of view angle.
Changing the amount of units for each direction will not change the size of thegrid, but rather, the size of the units. Hence, if an element is offset at 3 North, 4
East, and you change the number of horizontal and vertical units from 24 to 12,
the element will become offset twice as far from the centre as it originally was.
Number of Units

The third setting in this field determines the amount of units across the Z axis.
This determines how far each unit will take an element further or closer to thecamera when moved on the Z-axis. By default, the grid has 12 fields across the Zaxis, which is half the amount of fields on the X and Y axes by default. Hence,each field on the Z-axis is worth exactly twice the length of a field on thehorizontal axis.
Animators who are familiar with traditional animation method will understand thedefault setting of 24 units horizontal by 24 units vertical as it corresponds to a
traditional animation grid.

Coordinates at Centre

The offset for the centre of the fields grid. The centre of the fields grid is where
elements are positioned by default, when they themselves are at coordinates 0,0.
To change the centre, you must enter its offset from the actual centre of the gridin fields. For example, if your fields grid is 24 x 24, and you want the centre to beat the top-left corner, you should enter -12,-12.

Save

Saves your current Alignment settings and be able to select them later from the
list.

111

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

TIP
If you prefer working in pixel-based positions, you must set the aspect ratio of your units to be thesame as the aspect ratio of your scene resolution, set the horizontal number of units to the width ofyour scene in pixels, the vertical number of units to the height of your scene in pixels, and the depth
number of units to the width of your scene in pixels. This way, each unit will translate to exactly 1
pixel, in all directions.

NOTE
Each layer also has an alignment rule, which determines how it is positioned relative to the fields
grid. By default, it is set to "Centre First Page". However, this alignment rule is made to becompatible to 4:3 fields grids. Hence, if you change your scene's alignment rules, your layers will be
offset. To avoid this issue, change the alignment rules of your layers to "Centre" via the Advanced
tab of the Layer Properties view.

Drawing Resolution Tab
The drawing resolution tab is used to set the pixel density of bitmap drawings as well as of bitmap textures intextured brush strokes in vector drawings. Also, it is used to set the size of the canvas for bitmap drawings
relative to the size of the scene.
NOTE
These settings are applied to newly created drawings in the scene, but not to existing drawings inyour scene. To change the pixel density of existing vector drawings, you must select Drawing> Change Vector Drawing Brush Resolution from the top menu. To change the pixel density andcanvas size of existing bitmap drawings, you must select Drawing > Change Bitmap Drawing
Resolution from the top menu.

NOTE
You can change the default drawing resolution settings for new scenes in the Drawing tab of thePreferences dialog.

112Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Scene Resolution

This indicates the currently selected scene resolution preset and its dimensions in
pixels.

Default Texture Density for
Vector Drawings

Pixel Density:Determines the amount of pixels to store for each of a textured
brush stroke's pixels that display when the scene is not zoomed in or the drawing
is not scaled. For example, at 100%, zooming in or scaling up textured brushstrokes will make them lose texture quality. If set to 200%, textured brush strokes
can be zoomed in or scaled up until they're twice their original size without losing
picture quality.
Width: The default width of the canvas when creating drawings in a bitmap
drawing layer. The percentage is relative to the width of the scene. Its default
value, 200%, makes the width of the canvas twice the width of the stage.

Default Canvas Size andPixel Density for Bitmap
Drawings

Height: The default height of the canvas when creating drawings in a bitmap
drawing layer. The percentage is relative to the height of the stage. Its default
value, 200%, makes the height of the canvas twice the height of the stage.
Pixel Density: Determines the amount of pixels to store for each of a bitmap
drawing's pixels that display when the scene is not zoomed in and the drawing is
not scaled. For example, at 100%, zooming in or scaling up a bitmap drawing will
make it lose picture quality. If set to 200%, bitmap drawings can be zoomed in orscaled up until they're twice their original size without losing picture quality.

113Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Scripts Manager Dialog Box
The Scripts Manager dialog allows you to create buttons in the Scripting toolbar. Each button you create canrun a specific function in one of your scripts. You can also choose an icon and a tool tip for the button, if you
want.

NOTE
For tasks related to this dialog box, see the User Guide.

How to access the Scripts Manager Dialog Box
1. In the Scripting toolbar, click on theManage Scripts button.

The Scripts Manager dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files

A list of the available JavaScript files.

Functions

A list of the available functions for the selected script.

In Toolbar

The list of script functions already added to the Scripting toolbar.

114

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Runs the selected function.
ExecuteTIP
Press Esc to interrupt the execution of the script.

Customize Icon

Allows you to select an icon for the toolbar button. Clicking on this button will
open an Open dialog prompting you to browse for and select a .png, .jpg, .xpm
or .svg file.

Customize Tooltip

Allows you to type in a custom tooltip for the toolbar button.

115

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Select Colour Dialog Box
The Select Colour dialog box lets you set the colour of layers and columns. Using colours for layers and columns
helps to differentiate them visually, making them easy to identify. The colours you choose will be reflected in the
Node view.
You can select a colour by choosing from a basic set of colours, using the colour wheel or by specifying the HSV
or RGB values. Once you have selected a colour, you can adjust its intensity and save it as a custom colour thatyou can reuse.

How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Timeline view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Change Track Colour

button of the layer you want to modify.

The Select Colour dialog box opens.

How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Xsheet view
1. In the Xsheet view, select one or more columns to modify.
2. Right-click on the column’s header and select Colour > Change Columns Colour.
The Select Colour dialog box opens.

116Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Basic colours

A basic set of colours to choose from.

Custom colours

Displays the custom colours you previously stored using the Add to Custom
Colours button.

Add to custom colours

Lets you add the selected colour to the Custom colours list above.

Colour wheel

Lets you select a colour by dragging the T-shaped pointer.

Value slider

Once you select a colour, you can drag the slider to change the intensity and see
it previewed in the Colour Preview window below..

Colour Preview

Displays the colour you are currently selecting. To apply the colour, click OK.

Hue, Saturation, Value

Lets you set the hue (colour), saturation (amount of colour) and brightness(value) of the colour.

Red, Green, Blue

Lets you set the red, green and blue values.

117Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Selection Presets Dialog Box
As you're animating, you might find that you are constantly selecting the same pegs, drawing layers, bezier
points on a deformation envelope, part of a character rig, etc. You can create a preset that automatically selects
any defined element or group of elements.

How to access the Selection Presets dialog box
1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your interface:l

Go to the top menu and select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of the interface and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

lright-click on the empty space near the top of a view and from the quick-access menu
selecting Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the Manage Scripts

button to open the Scripts Manager

window.
3. In the Scripts Manager, in the Files section, select the file TB_SelectionPreset.js.
The functions associated with that file appear in the Functions section.
4. In the Functions section, select TB_SelectionPreset.
The Add script to toolbar

button becomes active.

118Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

5. Click on the Add script to toolbar
The TB_SelectionPreset script

button.
button is added to the Scripting toolbar.

6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the TB_SelectionPreset

button.

The Selection Presets window opens.

Parameter

Description

RefreshRemoves any highlighted zones from the Group column.

Add Selection Preset

Opens the Save Selection As Preset dialog box. After entering a name for the newpreset and clicking OK, a new Selection Preset is added to the Selection Presets
list. Note: before clicking on the Add button, make a selection in your scene of theelements for which you wish to create a Selection Preset.

Delete Selection Preset

Deletes the selected Selection Preset from the list.

Group

Double-click in this area, next to the Selection Preset you wish to use, to selectthe elements defined by the preset.

Name

Displays the name of the preset.

119Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Apply to Selection

Selects the elements defined by the selected preset from the Name list.

Close

Closes the Selection Presets window.

120

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Sequence Fill Dialog Box
The Sequence Fill dialog box lets you Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequence canbe forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as a cycle, and so on. The selection can be over one
cell or a cell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

How to access the Sequence Fill dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a cell range.

2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Sequence Fill.

l

In the Timeline view, right-click and select Exposure > Sequence Fill.

l

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Sequence Fillbutton (you may have to customize thetoolbar to display it).
lPress Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + M (macOS)).

The Sequence Fill dialog box opens.

121Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Starting Value

The first number in the sequence.

Increment

Lets you type the number by which the drawing number will increase from frame
to frame. For example, an increment of 1 gives you: 1-2-3-4; an increment of 2
gives you: 1-3-5-7; and -2 gives you this: 8-6-4-2.

Hold

The exposure holding value.

Cycle

Enable this option to cycle the values and enter the number of cycles in the Cycle
field.

End Frame

Enable this option to stop the fill at a specific frame within the selection. Indicate
the frame number in the End Frame field.

Padding

Enable this option to add a 0 padding before the drawing name. In the Padding
field, enter as many hash symbols (#) as digit you want in your drawing name,including the value itself.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the new fill selection.

122

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box
The Edit Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box lets you apply ease to multiple functions and keyframes.
You can display the function curve and modify the Bezier or Ease curve.

How to access the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select a keyframe on one or more layers.

2. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, right-click and select Set Ease For Multiple Parameters.

l

In the Timeline toolbar, click the Set Ease For Multiple Parameters

button.

The Set Ease For Multiple Parameters dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Filters
MotionMotion: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Position X, Position Y,
Position Z and 3D Path functions.

123

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Rotation: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Angle functions.
Scale: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Scale functions.
Skew: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Skew functions.
Morphing: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Morphing Velocity
functions. Note that it applies to the Morphing velocity function found in theLayer Properties window, not the basic morphing ease in the Tool Properties
view.
Other: Applies the easing parameters to all the other the selected functions, suchas all functions created to animate effect parameters.

Left and Right Time Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value corresponding to the length of time you want
the easing to last. Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%, yourmotion will overshoot.

Left and Right Value Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value of how strong you want the easing out to be.
Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%, your motion will overshoot.

Apply/Previous

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects theprevious keyframe in the timeline.

Apply

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes.

Apply/Next

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects the next
keyframe in the timeline.

Close

Close the dialog box. If you did not apply the modifications, they will becancelled.

124

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference GuideShow Hidden Columns Dialog Box
The Show Hidden Columns dialog box lets you display all the columns contained in the exposure sheet. It canbe used to hide individual columns.

How to access the Show Hidden Columns dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, do one of the following:lClick the thick grey line that represents a hidden column.

lRight-click on the column header and select Show Hidden Columns.

lPress Alt + Shift + H.

The Show Hidden Columns dialog box opens.

125Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Show

Lets you select the hiddens columns to display in the Xsheet view.

Name

Name of the drawing.

Type

Indicates the column type such as column, timing, and expression.

Check

Selects all columns.

Uncheck

Deselects all selected columns.

126Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

OpenQuickTime Sound Options Dialog Box
The OpenQuickTime Video Options dialog box is used to configure the audio compression settings whenexporting a QuickTime movie file on Linux.

On Windows and macOS, Harmony uses Apple QuickTime to export QuickTime movies, and hence uses
QuickTime's interface to configure video and audio compression settings for exporting movies. Since QuickTime
is not supported on GNU/Linux, Harmony uses the OpenQuickTime library to create QuickTime-compatible
movie files, which have a more limited set of compression settings.

How to access the OpenQuickTime Sound Options dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to QuickTime Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Sound Options button.

Parameter

Description
Lets you select a codec. By default, the following codecs will be available:
l

l

Codec
l

l

l

A-Law 2:1: This codec uses logarithms to compress audio data. The
resulting audio stream requires half the disk space of uncompressed audio
data, but is of noticeably lower quality.
IMA 4:1: This codec compresses audio data to require a quarter of the disk
space required for uncompressed audio data. It is not supported by a lotof software.
Twos Complement - Little Endian PCM: A standard uncompressed audio
codec.
Twos Complement - Big Endian PCM: A legacy standard uncompressedaudio codec. This codec may be compatible with older editing interfaces.
(mu)-Law 2:1: Similarly to A-Law, this codec uses logarithms to compress
audio data. The resulting audio stream requires half the disk space of
uncompressed audio data, but is of noticeably lower quality.

127Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Sample rate

The sample rate at which to export your scene's audio. The only available option
is 22050Hz.

128

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box
The Sound Settings dialog box lets you set the audio compression settings when you want to export a
QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTE
This dialog can only be accessed on Windows and macOS. On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be
installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the Sound Settings Dialog Box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to QuickTime Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Settings button.
4. In the Movie Setting dialog box that opens, click Settings in the Sound section.

Parameter

Description

Compressor

Lets you select a compression type. The default setting is None. This exports youraudio as is without performing any lossy compression or conversion, preserving
its fidelity. Other compressors can be used if you need your movie's audio track to
be exported in a specific format, or if disk space or download speed is critical, butthey may impact the quality of your movie's soundtrack negatively.

Rate

Lets you select the audio rate at which to export. It is best to export your audio at
a rate that matches the rate of your original sound files. For example, if your file
has an audio sample rate of 48 kHz and you choose a conversion rate of 22.05
kHz, the sound will play at the same speed, but higher frequencies will be
missing, making it sound muffled. For reference, the standard sound quality is 48
kHz for broadcasting and DVD. Lower rates are liable to impact the quality of yourmovie's soundtrack negatively, but they can be useful if disk space or download
speed is critical.

129

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Size

Lets you select the encoding size. Also known as Bit Depth, this determines theamount of precision used to record each wavelength in the soundtrack. The
standard size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space your soundtrack requires is halved, but the audio will sound muffled.
Lets you decide whether to use the Mono or Stereo channel mode. Stereo soundhas a separate sound track for the left and the right speakers, allowing to makeUse

the origin of each sound realistically match the origin of their corresponding
action. If you choose Mono, your sound track may use less disk space, but boththe left and right channels will be merged into a single track.

130Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box lets you configure the video compression settings whenexporting a QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTE
This dialog can only be accessed on Windows and macOS. On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be
installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to QuickTime Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Movie Settings button.
4. In the Movie Setting dialog box that opens, click Settings in the Video section.

Parameter

Description

Compression Type

Allows you to select the codec to use for the video stream of your movie file. The
availability of codecs may vary between machines. If you are unsure of which
codec is best fit for you, it is recommended to use H.264 for maximum portability,131Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

and to use Animation if quality is more important.

NOTE
The Animation codec, among a few others, allows you to set the colour
depth to Millions of Colors+, which supports transparency.

MotionFrame Rate

The amount of frames per second for the video stream. Leave this setting toCurrent to use your project's frame rate.
Some codecs compress the video by recording a limited amount of keyframes,
which are frames in which the entire picture is encoded, pixel by pixel and, inbetween, recording deltas, which are frames that are only defined by theirdifference with the previous frame. This significantly reduces the size of themovie file. However, the less keyframes a movie has, the more it is likely to
encounter decoding errors, and the harder it is for players to scrub or jump to a
specific time in the video. This option allows you to decide when keyframes areinserted in the video stream.
Automatic: Lets the encoder decide when keyframes should be inserted.

Key Frames

Every ... frames: Allows you to set the exact interval, in frames, at which
keyframes should be inserted.
All: Encodes every frame as a keyframe. This option will significantly impact filesize, but will make it easier to scrub through the video without causing any
rendering error.

NOTE
If you are using the H.264 codec, you must set the Key Frames option toAll, or you will get an error message when you confirm the compression
settings.

Frame Reordering

Encodes frames in a different order than the one at which they are meant to be
displayed. This allows for more efficient compression, but may not be compatible
with some players.

Compressor

132

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Allows you to set the colour depth for your video. A lower colour depth will
reduce the size of the video stream but will have significant impacts on picture
quality.
Depth

TIP
Set this to Millions of Colors+ if you want to export a video withtransparency.

Quality

Lets you choose a quality setting for the video compression. A higher quality
setting will increase the size of the movie file, but will look better. A lower quality
setting will reduce the size of the movie file, but will cause blurriness andcompression artifacts to appear in the picture.
Allows you to choose between the following scan modes:llScan Mode /Interlaced

Interlaced: Frames are encoded starting with their odd-numberedscanlines, then their even-numbered scanlines.
Progressive: Frames are encoded whole, from the highest scanline to thelowest scanline.

NOTE
Some codecs will display a drop-down allowing you to select Interlaced or
Progressive, while others will simply have an Interlaced checkbox.

Allows you to select one of the following aspect ratios:
Aspect Ratio

Filterl

4:3: For output on standard definition displays.

l

16:9: For output to widescreen displays.

When exporting with the PNG compression type, this determines the algorithmwith which each pixel is encoded relative to other pixels. Leaving this option to
Best will export in the most space-efficient filter, without compromising picture
quality. Picking a filter may increase rendering speed a bit, at the expense of somedisk space.

Data Rate
Automatic

Lets the encoder use the optimal bit rate for your compression settings.

133

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Allows you to specify the encoding bit rate.

NOTE

Restrict To

This setting will override other compression settings, so that the specified
bit rate is respected.

Optimize the encoding to be responsive depending on the intended viewing
method:l

Optimized Forll

CD/DVD-ROM: Optimizes the bit rate for a video that will be played using
an optical disc player.
Download: Optimizes the bit rate for a file that is going to be downloaded,then viewed from the user's hard drive.
Streaming: Optimized the bit rate for a video that will be streamed fromthe web and played as the video is being downloaded.

134

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box
The Timeline Scene Marker dialog box lets you create and manage scene markers in the Timeline view. Scene
markers are visual indicators displayed at the top of the Timeline view in the frame counter area. You can use it
to denote anything relevant to your work. You can indicate the frames you want to clean up, a change in action,
an impact, or where you intend to apply an effect. You can also add a note to a scene marker, which is displayedwhen you hover over the scene marker.

How to access the Timeline Scene Marker dialog box
1. In the frame counter area of the Timeline view, do one of the following:‣

Drag to select the frame range to mark.

‣

Right-click and select Scene Markers > Mark Current Frame.

Parameter

Description

Colour swatch

Opens the Mark Colour dialog box where you can select a colour for thescene marker.

Note (Tooltip)

Lets you type in a name for your scene marker. Making the name meaningful
will help you to quickly identify scene markers especially when there aremany of them in the frame counter area of the Timeline view.

135Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box
You can offset, blend, or mix the colours in a colour palette using the sliders and increasing the Amount value.

How to access the Tint Offset/Blend dialog box
1. From the Colour View menu, select Palettes > Tint Panel or right-click and select Tint Panel.
The Blend/Offset Tint panel opens.

Parameter

Description

OffsetOffsets the selected colours by the adjustments made using the HSB and RGB
sliders. Use the Amount slider to adjust the degree of offset. Use the Alpha slider
to adjust the opacity of the selected colour.

Blend

Blends the selected colours with the colour swatch in the top-right corner. Use
the Amount slider to adjust the degree of blend. A blend of 100% turns theselected colours into the same colour as the swatch. Adjusting the HSB and RGB
sliders affect the swatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on theleft. Use the Alpha slider to adjust the opacity of the swatch.

Mixer

Select a Base and Tint colour to form a third colour swatch. Use the slider justbeneath to mix the Base and Tint colours by different amounts. This will affect themixed swatch whether it is selected or not. Select either the Tint or Base swatch
and use the HSB and RGB sliders to adjust its colour. This will affect the mixed

136

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guideswatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on the left.

137Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box
The Toolbar Manager dialog box lets you customize the toolbar in any of the views. You can add your favourite
tools to a toolbar for an efficient workflow.

How to access the Toolbar Manager dialog box
1. Right-click on a toolbar in any view and select Customize. Note that the menu will not appear if you
right-click on a disabled icon.

Parameter

Description

Available Tools

Displays the complete list of tools available for customizing a toolbar.

Toolbar

Displays a list of the tools currently available on the toolbar.

Default

Restores the toolbar with its default items.

138Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box
The Vectorization Parameters dialog box lets you vectorize pencil drawings, along with any red, blue or green
pencil marks you may have used to indicate highlights and shadows. The drawing will be vectorized into pure
red, blue, green and black (RGB values), while creating colour art zones wherever lines connect. After painting
in your tones and highlights, change your pure RGB colours to transparent (0 Alpha) in the Colour Picker
window and watch the indicator colour zone lines disappear.

How to open the Vectorization Parameters dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Import > From Scanner.
You can also open it from any other import option that allows you to customize the vectorization
parameters (i.e. from the scanner).
2. In the Scan Drawings window, do the following:l

In the Layer section, decide on the layer options.

l

In the Import Options section, select the Convert to Toon Boom Vector Drawing
optionl

Click Preview.

139Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

3. In the Vectorization section, click the Vectorization Parameters

button.

Options Tab
The Options tab contains the main vectorization settings. More settings are available in the Help tab.

Parameter

Description

Input

The input filters are applied to the bitmap image before it is vectorized.

One Pass

One threshold value is applied to both the Line and Colour Art. For drawings with
distinct vector-style lines of mattes, you only need one pass.

Two Passes

Applies a different threshold value to each layer. For greyscale drawings, you may
want to perform the vectorization process twice to apply different thresholdvalues to the Line and Colour Art layers.

Threshold

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Lineand Colour Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0%
is white and 100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

Expand Bitmap

Lets you enter a value to scale the bitmap to detect small variations in the line.
Use this option if you scanned a greyscale image and want to preserve small
variations in the texture to apply to the line art.

Jag Filter

Lets you enter a value to scale back the bitmap to remove some of the line’sroughness. This is useless when you have a drawing that appears quite rough;140

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

the Jag filter will eliminate excess strokes in the final drawing.

Line Art Threshold(%)

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Line Art
layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is white and100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

Colour Art Threshold(%)

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Colour
Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is whiteand 100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

OutputThe output filters are applied during the vectorization process.
No Colour Art

Does not generate filling zones in the Colour Art layer.

No Texture

Does not generate texture in the Line Art layer in the final images. Select thisoption to create solid lines in the final line art.

Generate Matte in
Underlay Layer

Creates an opaque zone behind your drawing’s lines to avoid seeing through thelayers.

Colour as Texture

Converts colour values into a texture layer.

Optical Registration

The optical registration options are used to automatically align drawings basedon the position of the peg holes on the animation paper. The peg holes must
appear in the scanned drawings for the optical registration to work.

DPI

Lets you enter the dots-per-inch value of your image. You must enter the samevalue as the DPI used to scan the image.

Peg Side

Lets you select the position of the peg holes on your drawings. Identify whether
they are on the top, bottom, left or right.
Determines how exact the location of the peg holes must be for the software torecognize them. There are two values to choose from:

Strictness

Strict: The peg holes must be in a tightly defined area to be recognized.
Loose: The peg holes can be recognized somewhere in a larger area. This is therecommended setting.

Field Chart

Lets you indicate the size of the animation paper, 12 or 16.

141

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Post Processing

The Post Processing filters are applied to the final vector images.

Remove Holes

Removes holes of a specified value that might make painting difficult.

Remove Dirt

Removes stray marks and dirt of a specified value. Try a value around 500.

Remove Hair Size

Removes small strokes that have no line art.

Remove Hair: Number
of Passes

The number of times the drawing will be analyzed to identify hair marks.

Miscellaneous
Close Gaps

Closes gaps in the Colour Art so you can paint it.

Smooth Passes forLine Art Before
Breaking Triangles

The number of times the smoothing operation runs before creating the triangles
that break lines in the drawing. If unnecessary triangles are appearing in thedrawing, increase this value.

Smooth Passes for

The number of times the smoothing operation is performed after the triangles

Line Art

have been created. This further smooths the line art.

Preview
Show Strokes

Shows the strokes in the Vectorized Image panel.

Stroke Thickness

Shows the size of the strokes.

Help Tab
The Help tab contains the most advanced vectorization settings which you type in the Advanced Option fields
at the bottom of the Vectorization Parameters dialog box.

142Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

File IO Options-file <filename (including extension)> [ options ]-infile <filename (including extension)>; same as -file-outfile <filename>; alternate output file-informat <format>; the input format. Used if reading from stdin-debug; turn on debug mode
-noforce; don't force output if image is inconsistent-version; print version information and quit
-output_version <version>; output files of this version. Valid versions can be: 0 or 604-force_unamed_palette_for_texture; will generate a texture in TVG's internal palette

Registration Options-register <dpi side strictness>; perform optical registration.
• Side can be one of left, right, top, bottom or l, r, t, b.
• Strictness can be either loose, strict or l, s.
-register_center_peg_holes; will use only round holes in 16 fields page-rcph; short form of register_center_peg_holes-registration_looseness_factor <factor>; registration looseness factor (default 2.000000)-rlf; short form of registration_looseness_factor-rdebug; output registration debug messages-pegpitch <inch (default 8.000000)>; distance between peg bars
-threshr < (default 0.500000)>; threshold for optical registration; range 0.0 to 1.0
143Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes-rmargin <inch (default 1)>; region size where to look for peg bars
-peg_distance_from_center <inch (default 5.25)>; peg distance from centre of the image-pdfc; short form of -peg_distance_from_center-out_peg_position <side (default same)>; wanted position of the peg on the drawing.
• Can be one of right, left, top, bottom (or r, l, t, b) or same.
• A rotation will be performed if it is different from the side passed to -register.
-output_peg_matrix; output the peg transformation matrix on standard output.
-scanner_calibrate; < (default 1.0000 1.0000) > x and y scale factors to be applied to scanner image.

Filtering Options-pixel <pixel_shape (default '4x3')>; Valid values: 4x3-gap <worldUnits (default 10)>; close gaps up to this big-pencil; generate line art only
-keep_dirt; don't filter out dirt
-thresh <threshold (default 0.2)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-rmv_hairs <worldUnits (default 1)> <passes (default 1)>• remove hairs of size smaller than "size" in "passes" passes-rmv_holes <area (default 7)>; remove holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirt <area (default 1)>; remove dirt smaller than "area"• try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holes and rmv_dirt. The area is in world units squared-rmv_triangles <worldUnits (default 30.000000)>; remove triangles at "pixels"• distance from each other. Use -no_break to remove all triangles-no_texture; don't generate textured strokes-color_as_texture; will vectorize the alpha channel and put the RGB colour in a textured colour-noclosegap; disable all gap closing algorithms-no_break; disable the breaking of line art-jag_filter <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-expand_bitmap <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-fit_errorc <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the colour art-fit_errorl <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the line art-smoothl <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for line art
144

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide-smoothc <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for colour art-first_smooth <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothl <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothc <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art in colour art pass (needs -2pass)-2pass; specify two sets of parameters; one for line art "l", one for colour art "c"(-thresh, -rmv_holes and -rmv_dirt will be overridden by -threshl, threshc, -rmv_holesl,-rmv_holesc, -rmv_dirtl and -rmv_dirtc)-threshl <threshold for line art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-threshc <threshold for color art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-jag_filterl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art-jag_filterc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-expand_bitmapl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art-expand_bitmapc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-rmv_holesl <area (default 7)>; remove line art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_holesc <area (default 7)>; remove colour art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtl <area (default 1)>; remove line art dirt smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtc <area (default 1)>; remove colour art dirt smaller than "area"
try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holesl, rmv_holesc, rmv_dirtl and rmv_dirtc. The values are inworld units squared-margins <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin around bitmap-top_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-remove_peg_bars; remove the peg bar holes-field_size <fields (default 12 or use value in scan file)>; set the drawing to this field size
-fs; short hand for -field_size-peg_bar_size <inch (default 1)>; the size of the peg bar region-noframe; do not put a frame around the colour art-frame_fields <default -1.000000>; put a frame of the specified dimension around the colour art-downscale_input <default 1>; downscale the raw input by this integer factor
145

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes-downscale_texture <default 1>; downscale the output texture by this integer factor-buildmatte; generate a matte on underlay for line test
-buildmatte_colourart; generate a matte on colour art for line test
NOTE
-buildmatte and -buildmatte_colourart are mutually exclusive-copystrokes; copy original strokes when building matte.

Options for bitmap that has no registration information-pixel_margins <inch (default 0)>; remove margin around bitmap-top_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-dpi <(default -1)>; dpi information of input bitmap

RGB Keying Options-rgb; generate separate zones for red, green and blue lines-rgb_alpha <value (default 255)>; generate red, green and blue colour with alpha of this value-no_red; ignore red colour in vectorization-no_green; ignore green colour in vectorization-no_blue; ignore blue colour in vectorization-flatten; flatten the drawing after generating colours-rmv_rgb_dirt <threshold area default 0.0>; remove red, green and blue regions smaller than area
-expand_bitmap_rgb <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for rgb-threshrgb <value> <threshold for rgb vectorization default 0.200000>;-threshsv <saturation threshold default 0.500000> <value threshold default 0.500000>; thresholds onsaturation and value to consider a pixel to be grey

Colour Vectorization Options-color_vectorize; perform a colour vectorization-file2 <colour art filename>; specify the colour art bitmap

146Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide-penstyle <center alpha (0.0-20.0)> <edge alpha (0.0-20.0)> <gamma (0-10)><centre pressure effect (0.01.0)> <edge pressure effect (0.0-1.0)><texture bitmap downscaling (0.2-20)> <texture bitmap file (valid
filename or "" if no file)>; generate brush texture for the line art-pressure_variation <strategy (0, 1 or 2)> <min pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max variation(0.0-1.0)>; specify a pressure strategy for the centre line.
-blur_radius <pixels (default 0)>; blur the penstyle texture generated-color_contour_smooth_passes <times (default 3)>; perform number of smooth passes on contour before
computing texture-ccsp <times (default 3)>; short for -color_contour_smooth_passes-color_rmv_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; remove holes of this size when computing texture-color_fill_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; fill holes of this size for colour line art

Bubble Usage (implemented only for colour vectorization's line art)-create_bubbles; add bubbles into the LineArt. Implemented for colour vectorization only
-bubble_gap <value (default 3)>; max number of colour art points between 2 bubbles-bubble_length <value (default 10)>; max number of circles in a bubble-min_radius <value (default 1.5000)>; min radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be >=1.0)-max_radius <value (default 3.5000)>; max radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be>= 1.0)-uniform_gap; the space between bubbles is constant

4 Colour Vectorization-4colours [key:value] ... [key:value] ; The key value list can be empty. The list of keys is:
rgbdiff:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dark:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
grey:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
white:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dirt:value ; dirt area. 200 is a good value
rt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
gt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
bt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]

147

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

NOTE
There must be no space between the colon and the key/value. For example: -4colours rgbdiff:20
dark:20 grey:120 white:250 dirt:200 rt:240 gt:240 bt:240

148

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Versions Dialog Box
The Versions window lets you delete any unnecessary versions of scenes when working with Harmony Server.
When working with multiple versions of a scene, you may to clean up the database by deleting the ones you nolonger need.

How to access the Versions window
1. Make sure you have the necessary rights. If you do not, select File > Rights to Modify Scene.
2. Select File > Manage Versions.

Parameter

Description

Existing Versions

Displays the different versions of a scene that you can delete.

Description

Displays information about the selected version.
Removes the selected version of a scene.

DeleteIMPORTANTThis operation cannot be undone.

149Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

OpenQuickTime Video Options Dialog Box
The OpenQuickTime Video Options dialog box is used to configure the video compression settings whenexporting a QuickTime movie file on Linux.

On Windows and macOS, Harmony uses Apple QuickTime to export QuickTime movies, and hence uses
QuickTime's interface to configure video and audio compression settings for exporting movies. Since QuickTime
is not supported on GNU/Linux, Harmony uses the OpenQuickTime library to create QuickTime-compatible
movie files, which have a more limited set of compression settings.

How to access the OpenQuickTime Video Options dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to QuickTime Movie (*.mov).
3. Click on the Video Options button.

Parameter

Description
Lets you select a codec. By default, the following codecs will be available:
l

l

Codec

l

l

l

Motion-JPEG A: A very portable codec that performs lossy
JPEG compression and interlaces the frames. Motion-JPEG A
compression is less efficient than Photo JPEG in terms of quality and filesize, but may be a more portable alternative for software that does notsupport Photo JPEG.
Photo JPEG: Encodes the movie as a sequence of JPEG images. JPEG
images have lossy compression. This is the most efficient codec for filesize.
Portable Network Graphics (PNG): Encodes the movie as a sequence of
PNG images. PNG images have lossless compression.
Tag Image File Format (TIFF): Encodes the movie as a sequence of
uncompressed TIFF images. This codec is lossless.
Uncompressed (RGB): Encodes the movie as uncompressed bitmap data.

150

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

This codec is lossless.

Quality

fieldDominance

For JPEG-type codecs, lets you set the JPEG compression quality. By default, thiswill be set to 85. Possible values range from 0 to 100. The higher the quality, themore disk space the resulting video file will take.
For codecs with interlacing. This is set to 1 by default. If set to 1, the first field will
be encoded on odd frames, and the second field will be encoded on even frames.
If set to 2, the first field will be encoded on even frames, and the second field will
be encoded on odd frames.

compression

The amount of lossless compression to perform when exporting in PNG format.
PNG compression is lossless, but higher compression settings will take longer toencode and decode.

packbits

For TIFF movies, this option adds extra lossless compression to the encoding.

lendianEncodes data in little endian byte order, instead of big endian.

151

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Windows Media Video Settings Dialog Box
The WMV Settings dialog box lets you set the video and audio settings when exporting a Windows MediaVideo (.wmv)movie.

NOTE
The option to export to Windows Media Video is only available on Windows.

How to access the WMV Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set Movie Format to Windows Media Video (*.wmv).
3. Click on the Movie Settings button.

Parameter

Description

Video
Variable Bit Rate
Quality

Lets you choose a quality setting ranging from 5 to 100 for the video stream. The
higher the quality of the export, the larger the resulting file.

Sound
Lets you choose among preset combinations of audio sample rates, sample sizes
and channel modes for the audio stream:lProfileSample rate: Available sample rates are 8000 Hz, 16000 Hz, 22050 Hz
and 44100 Hz. The default setting is 22050 Hz. It is best to export youraudio at a rate that matches the rate of your original sound files. For
example, if your file has an audio sample rate of 48000 Hz and you choosea sample rate of 22050 Hz, the sound will play at the same speed, but

152Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

higher frequencies will be missing, making it sound muffled. For
reference, the standard sound quality is 44000 kHz for films, and 48000
kHz for DVD. Lower rates are liable to impact the quality of your movie's
soundtrack negatively, but they can be useful if disk space or download
speed is critical.
llSample size: Also known as Bit Depth, this determines the amount ofprecision used to record each wavelength in the soundtrack. The standard
size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space your soundtrack requires is halved, but the audio will sound muffled.
Channel mode: Stereo sound has a separate sound track for the left andthe right speakers, allowing to make the origin of each sound realisticallymatch the origin of their corresponding action. If you choose Mono, yoursound track may use less disk space, but both the left and right channels
will be merged into a single track.

NOTE
Exporting in 8-bit audio requires Apple QuickTime to beinstalled.

153

Chapter 1: Dialog Boxes

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box
The Xsheet Column Width dialog box lets modify the width of a column in the Xsheet view and use it as thedefault column width.

How to access the Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box
1. In the Xsheet view, select a column.
2. From the Xsheet menu, select View > Set Columns Width.
The Xsheet Column Width dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Columns Width (pixels)

Lets you set the width of the selected columns (in pixels).

Apply

Applies the value you entered to the selected column without closing the dialog
box.

Set As Default

Uses the value you entered as the default for all columns in the Xsheet.

154

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

155

Chapter 2: Menus

Chapter 2: Menus
The Menus section covers all the menu entries available in Harmony. There are several types of menus in
Harmony: main menus, quick-access menus and view menus. Menus contains most of the functions available.
They may also have a toolbar button or keyboard shortcut equivalent.
Main Menus

157

Animation Menu

158

Drawing Menu

165

Edit Menu

173

File Menu

177

Help Menu

181

Insert Menu

183

Play Menu

185

Scene Menu

187

View Menu

189

Windows Menu

194

View Menus

196

Camera View Menu

197

Colour View Menu

214

Drawing View Menu

217

Function View Menu

229

Library View Menu

231

Model View Menu

233

Perspective View Menu

235

Script Editor View Menu

240

Side View Menu

244

Timeline View Menu

249

Top View Menu

254

Xsheet View Menu

259

156

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Main Menus
The main menu contain most of the commands. Depending on the view you're working in and the element,
some commands are available and others not. The main menu is always located at the very top of the interface.

On macOS, there is also a Harmony Advanced category that contains the following commands: Preferences,
About, and Quit.
Animation Menu

158

Drawing Menu

165

Edit Menu

173

File Menu

177

Help Menu

181

Insert Menu

183

Play Menu

185

Scene Menu

187

View Menu

189

Windows Menu

194

157

Chapter 2: Menus

Animation Menu
The Animation menu lets you access tools, adjust animation timing, set morphing and parameters, lock or
unlock layers, and select elements in the Xsheet and Timeline views.

How to access the Animation menulAt the top of the interface, select Animation.

Command

Description

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale,skew, etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off theAnimate mode to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the
Animate mode is disabled, keyframes are not created when an object's
parameters change.

Stop-Motion Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated
motion between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The
drawing remains still until the playback reaches the next keyframe,then the drawing pops to its new location.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframes.

Tools

Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale andskew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an
object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift toscale the element while maintaining its proportions.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you
move them towards or away from the camera.

158

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Spline Offset

Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or
modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0
fields. If your elements were drawn in a different location than thecentre of the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not alignedwith your drawing. Also, if you have several elements attached to one
trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at a different location
to represent the group's motion better.

Increase Exposure

Adds one more exposure to a selected cell; repeating this action adds
an extra cell each time. This is an efficient way to extend a drawing's
exposure and is always set in Insert mode. Increasing an exposure
pushes the existing exposure forward.

Decrease Exposure

Decreases exposure of a selected cell by one; repeating this action
decreases one exposure adds an extra cell each time. This is anefficient way to shorten a drawing's exposure. Decreasing an exposure
pulls in the existing exposure.

Set Exposure toLets you set the exposure to 1, 2, 3 or a custom exposure.

Extend Exposure

Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure.
You can expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings
that were originally there or move the subsequent frames forward intime.

Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Remove Key Exposure

Removes only the key exposure (key frames) not all the exposures. The
existing key exposure is replaced by the preceding exposure.

Cell

Remove Duplicate Key Exposure

When working with drawings to adjust the timing of a mouth in alipsync, for example, and forcing the use of specific key exposures,
unnecessary key exposures will be created. You can delete these
duplicates without affecting the rest of the drawing. The first drawingof the selection will be used for the range.

NOTE
Duplicate key exposures may occur when pasting with the
Enforce Key Exposure option selected.

159

Chapter 2: Menus

Fill Empty Cells

Lets you fill empty cells to extend the exposure of single frame
drawings to fill the range of empty cells after each one.When creatingdrawings on cells that are not side-by-side, the exposure of the firstdrawing no longer fills automatically. You must select the frame range
where you want your drawings to hold their exposure up to the next
drawing and use the Fill Empty Cells command.

Insert Blank Cell

Adds an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure

Removes the exposure from the selected cell.

Clear Exposure and Pull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that
follow it.

Fill Selection

Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection canbe over one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over manycolumns, an entire column, or many columns. You can use numbers,
words, letters, or any alphanumeric value.

Sequence Fill

Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequencecan be forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as acycle, and so on. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in
one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

Fill Cells Randomly

Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give amaximum and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony tochoose the random values from. The selection can be over one cell or acell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire
columns.

Hold Exposure

Lets you expose a drawing for three, four, or five cells and so on.

Morphing

Create Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in thecurrent layer.

Insert Morphing Key Drawing

Creates a morphing keyframe from a selected morphing frame.

Delete Morphing

Once a cell is selected in a morphing sequence, deletes the entire
sequence between the two keyframes.

160

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Convert Morphing to Drawing

Contour Hint

Lets you convert your morphing inbetweens to real drawings you can
edit. This is useful when manually editing a morphing sequence or if
you prefer to have animation timing in double frame (on twos) insteadof single frame (on ones).
The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines;
in other words, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line
thickness and contour position. Also, if a contour is not animatedcorrectly, you can use hints to correct the animation. For example, if aflag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enoughaway from the contour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity
rule. The Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone.
Sometimes a colour zone is not associated with the corresponding
one by default. For example, in a splash animation there are many
water droplets that are the same colour. Harmony automaticallymorphs the droplet to the nearest one. This is not always the one you
may have predicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone to morph
with another one.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known ascentral vector. It can be used on drawings that were done using thePencil, Polyline, Ellipse, Line and Rectangle tools. Like the Contour
Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to the central vector. Make sure to place it
far enough away from the line so you will see it snap when you moveit.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an
appearing shape. A shape will appear in the destination drawing when
there is no corresponding shape in the source drawing. If you do notplace an Appearing Point Hint to control the point of appearance, theshape will appear from its centre and expand outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Vanishing Point Hint

A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing
shape. A shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is nocorresponding shape in the destination drawing. If you do not place a161

Chapter 2: Menus

Vanishing Point Hint to control the point of disappearance, the shapewill vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

Switch Between Morphing Key
Drawings

Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence.
This option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default
keyboard shortcut F4 to toggle between your drawings.

Go to First Frame

Goes to the first frame of your morphing sequence.

Go to Previous Frame

Goes to the previous frame of the selected frame in the morphing
sequence.

Go to Next Frame

Goes to the next frame of the selected frame in the morphing
sequence.

Go to Last Frame

Goes to the last frame of your morphing sequence.

Suggest Hints

Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help tool. If you're
not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set the main
hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you
would like to see.

Lip-Sync

Change Mouth Shape toLets you change the mouth shape to one of the following: A, B, C, D,
E, F, G, X.

Auto Lip-Sync Detection

Generates a sound detection for lip-sync.

Map Lip-Sync

Automatically maps drawings in an element to the mouth chart you
have generated for a sound. This can save time when you are lipsynching a voice track.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Flip

162

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Flip Scale X

Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal and verticalaxes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original
X-axis of the layer and flips the element following it.

Flip Scale Y

Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Linear Motion

Switches between a linear and curved corner.

Lock in Time

Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it
freely as other points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control
point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using theTransform or Translate tool.

Substitute Drawing Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by theprevious drawing.

Substitute Drawing Next

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next
drawing.

Go to Previous Keyframe

Goes to the previous keyframe.

Go to Next Keyframe

Goes to the next keyframe.

Select Previous Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe /Point

Select the next keyframe/point.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg elementin the Timeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

163Chapter 2: Menus

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in theTimeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in theTimeline view.

Lock
Lock

Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.

UnlockUnlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock All

Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Unlock All

Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Lock All Others

Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation
angle will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all thetransformation values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting
value. All transformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.
This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often
have a particular Z ordering for the different views of a character. Youmight want to reset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z
position.

164

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Drawing Menu
The Drawing menu lets you access many tools related to drawing, painting, dirt removal, optimizing strokes,
and more.

How to access the Drawing menulAt the top of the interface, select Drawing.

Command

Description

Drawing Tools

Allows you to select one of the drawing tools available in Harmony.

SelectAllows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brushstrokes, pencil lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines
and shapes in your artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and movevector points, move the Bezier handles of the vector points as well as
deform vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating thepoints at the centre of its line rather than its contour.

Pencil Editor

Allows you to adjust the thickness of a pencil line at its different
points and corners, tweak the shape of its extremities and scale its
texture.

CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotateand skew it.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra
points, making them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points andtweaking lines in a grid.

Reposition All Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in thecurrent layer.

165

Chapter 2: Menus

Drawing Pivot

Allows you to position the pivot on a drawing layer by clicking where
you want its location to be.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick andthin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made ofcentral vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brushstrokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in thecurrent layer.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines
by clicking to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Ink

Allows you to recolour pencil lines with precision by changing thecolour of one segment at a time.

Repaint Brush

Like the Brush tool, but only paints over existing brush strokes.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the
Paint tool. By drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool
will create a small invisible stroke connecting the two closest points
around the gap.

166

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones thatcan be filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients andtextures in a colour zone.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a realanimation disc.

Clean Up

Remove Dirt

Remove Hair

Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the number
and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.
Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the number
and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This removes
any small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thick lines
or filled zones. Increase the value to select larger strokes for removalfrom the drawing.

Close Gaps

Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do notneed to trace directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters
away. The two closest points automatically close the gap.

Remove Art Inside Selection

Removes any art inside a selection. It is recommended that you clean
your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke accumulation in the
Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you work inhigh definition resolutions.

Remove Art Inside Selection on
All Drawings

Removes any art inside all drawings selected with the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool.

Remove Art Outside Selection

Removes any art existing outside a selection. It is recommended thatyou clean the Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files,
especially if you work in high-definition resolutions.

167

Chapter 2: Menus

Remove Art Outside Selection
on All Drawings

Removes any art outside all drawings selected with the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool.

NOTE
The Paint commands require you to use the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool so you can maintain aselection over multiple drawings.

Paint

Unpaint Selection

Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.

Unpaint Selection on All
Drawings

Unpaints all art contained inside a selection on all the drawings within
the same layer.

Unpaint Outside Selection

Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If no selection have beendrawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be unpainted.

Unpaint Outside Selection on All
Drawings

Unpaints all art outside a selection on all the drawings within the samelayer.

Repaint Selection

Repaints any art inside a selection.

Repaint Selection on All
Drawings

Repaints any art inside a selection on all the drawings contained
within the same layer.

Repaint Outside Selection

Repaints any art outside a selection. If no selection has been drawn
using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be repainted.

Repaint Outside Selection on All
Drawings

Repaints any art outside a selection on all the drawings contained
within the same layer.

ConvertPencil Lines to Brush Strokes

Converts the selected centreline pencil strokes into contour strokes
brush lines.

Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines

Converts selected contour strokes into centreline pencil strokes. The
brush stroke thickness will be lost.

168

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Strokes to Pencil Lines

Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.

Break Apart Text Layers

Text is treated as a single drawing object. This separates the text soeach character becomes an individual drawing object you can selectand modify independently.

Optimize
Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you
Flattendraw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it canbe useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are
drawn one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines ormodify their shape, it will be easier if they are flattened.

SmoothSmooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.

Create Contour Strokes

Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape that was drawn
directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint
tool but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaintlater.

Remove Contour Strokes

Remove any permanently invisible lines that were created while
scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles createdduring vectorization.

Remove Extra Strokes

Removes strokes inside painted area. This option only works after thepainted drawing is flattened.

Optimize

Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brush strokes, inthe selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened
and optimized if the selected objects do not change the appearance ofthe final image when they are merged.

Crop Brush Textures

Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap that lies unseen beneaththe vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs when you cut
and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If you cut a
portion from a textured line and paste it into a different drawing,
Harmony pastes the entire unseen texture bitmap from the source
drawing into the new one, even if you only took a small portion of thesource drawing. Using the Crop Brush Texture command will cropaway extraneous texture that does not touch the vector area. If there
are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly reduce the file169

Chapter 2: Menus

size.

Reduce Drawing Texture
Resolution

When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution
image, the size of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce the size
and resolution of the textures in a drawing.

Transform
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Rotate 180

Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Arrange
Bring to Front

Moves the selected art to the front (on top).

Bring Forward

Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).

Send Backward

Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).

Send to Back

Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).

Create Empty Drawing

Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meetsanother drawing, key exposure or a blank cell.

Duplicate Drawings

Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you
modify an existing drawing but retain the original. When duplicating adrawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing. The
exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell isremoved. The original drawing is not deleted from the project folder orother cells in which it is exposed.

Delete Selected Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project,170Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

these drawings cannot be recovered.
Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Rename Drawing with Prefix

Lets you rename a drawing sequence with a prefix, which can be quite
useful for cut-out puppet breakdown and deformation animation. Thisapplies to any deformation work done in pre-Harmony 12 versions.

Rename by Frame

Select Strokes with Current Colour

Distribute to Layers

Lets you rename a series of drawings relative to their frame position.
This is useful in hand-drawn animation.
Lets you select drawing elements and painted areas with the same
colour as the currently selected colour in your colour palette.
Every selected stroke in the Camera view is placed on separate layers;
one layer per stroke. If artwork is composed of several strokes, youmust group them to put them on the same layer.
This operation cannot be done in the Drawing view.
Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded
layers (line art, colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible

Create Colour Art from Line Art

strokes to paint your drawings on separate layers. This provides more
inking and painting flexibility.
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on
any of the four embedded layers.

Create Breaking Triangles

Useful for brush strokes, creates triangular breaks at natural line
intersections. These intersections are the probable locations wherecolour line breaks may occur, such as where a sleeve meets a hand.
This makes it easier to soft trace lines in different colours when there
are flattened or unflattened clean brush strokes.

Generate Auto-Matte

Adjust Line Texture Opacity

Change Vector Drawing

Fills colour based on currently selected colour swatch on different
drawing layers (overlay, underlay) so overlapping lines are more visible
during a line test.

Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.

Allows you to change the pixel density of textured brush strokes in

171

Chapter 2: Menus

vector drawings in your scene.

Brush Resolution

NOTE
When you create a new vector drawing, its pixel density for
textured brush strokes is based on the settings in the Drawing
Resolution tab of the Scene Settings dialog.

Allows you to change the pixel density and canvas size of existing
bitmap drawings in your scene.

Change Bitmap Drawing Resolution

NOTE
When you create a new bitmap drawing, its canvas size andpixel density are based on the settings in the Drawing
Resolution tab of the Scene Settings dialog.

Previous Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays theprevious drawing.

Next Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays thenext drawing.

Previous Layer

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays theprevious layer.

Next Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you can navigate
between the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous
drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.
When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays thenext layer.

Colour Protection

Toggle Current Colour
Protection

Temporarily enables/disables the Colour Protection feature so you canquickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas under protected colour
without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.

Respect Colour Protection

In the Colour view, you can protect a colour swatch to avoid repainting
or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you using the Paint
tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaint theprotected colours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

172

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Edit Menu
The Edit menu lets you repeat and undo actions, cut/copy/paste selected objects, select and manipulate objects,
work with symbols, and access the Preferences dialog box.

How to access the Edit menulFrom the top menu, select Edit.

Command

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project. Harmony supports
multiple undo, so you can undo changes you made in the order you
made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This command is active only
after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its
properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a
view.

Paste Special

Opens the Paste Special dialog box which lets you determine howtemplates and symbols are imported in the Timeline view.
There are advanced paste options for drawings, timings, keyframes,
layers, as well as palettes and symbols.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease thenumber of cycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse,
Forward-Reverse and Reverse-Forward.

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection
after copying.

173

Chapter 2: Menus

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the
Drawing, Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple
objects as one when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.
Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that

Invert Selection

were not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing,
this command will deselect them and select any other lines in thedrawing that were not selected.

Auto-Apply

Automatically applies changes you make to a property window or
dialog box. Harmony applies the modification automatically anddisplays the result in the Camera view. When working on a heavy
scene, it is useful to turn off this option.If you want to always work in
Auto-Apply mode, you can deselect the Auto-Apply option in the
Preferences dialog box (General tab). Then, each time you start
Harmony, the Auto-Apply mode will be off. You must click the Apply
button to see any modifications.

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements in the Drawing or
Camera view or a layer or cells in the Timeline view.
Extracts a symbol's contents and places it on the root timeline. Its
contents will be copied and inserted into the root timeline. The symbol
will not be removed from the Timeline view once it is expanded.

Expand Symbol

The symbol's layers will be parented to it in case you created motions
and transformations on the drawing layer that contain the symbol.
Breaking the hierarchy could result in the loss of any scaling andanimation you may have created.

Duplicate Selected Symbol

Creates a duplicate of a selected symbol. If other symbols are nested
inside the new symbol, they are not duplicated. If you modify them, theoriginal and other instances will also be modified.

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection

Breaks a character into its main body parts. There is no need to create
any layers prior to this process. Make sure your model is well centeredand sized in the Camera view.

Clone: Drawings Only

Creates a copy of the drawings in the selected layer in the Timeline

174Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

view or column in the Xsheet view. The timing it not copied.

Clone: Drawings and Timing

Creates a copy of the drawings and their timings in the selected layer
in the Timeline view or column in the Xsheet view.

Duplicate

Duplicates a layer to have a copy of the drawings that are independent
from the original ones, as well as an independent timing (exposure).
When you need the drawings to be modified independently, you will
want to duplicate the layer instead of cloning it.
There are two methods of merging drawings.
l

Merge
l

You can merge selected drawings in adjacent elements. The
columns and layers will be left intact, and each new merged
drawing will reside in the frames of the left-most column or
lower layer.
You can merge elements. All drawings will be merged. Unused
columns and layers will be deleted, but the original drawing
files are still accessible.

Group
Group

Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Ungroup

Ungroups a selected group of drawing objects in the Camera or
Drawing view.

Edit Drawing Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Drawings option is selected in
the Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automaticallygets the rights to modify drawings when you select a drawing.
Otherwise, you must manually get the rights to modify drawings.

Edit Palette List Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Palette option is selected in the
Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automatically getsthe rights to modify palettes and palette lists when you select a colour
from a palette. Otherwise, you must manually get the rights to modify
a palette or palette list.

Get Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases the rights to modify a selected drawing.

Release Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases rights to modify a selected drawing.

175

Chapter 2: Menus

Force Release Rights to Modify Drawing

This option is always available even if the Get Rights to Modify All
Scene Assets option is not selected in the Database Selector dialog
box.

Preferences

Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can set your preferencesfor Harmony.

176

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

File Menu
The File menu lets you open, close, save, scan, print, and import and export files.

How to access the File menulFrom the top menu, select File.

Command

Description

New

Creates a new scene while closing any scene already open. The New
Scene dialog box opens, asking for directory, name, and resolution
information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you can browse for a scene
file. You can open a new scene from the current one and the previous
scene will close.

Open Recent

Displays a list of the most recently opened scenes.

Clear

Clears the list of recently opened scenes.

Close

Closes the currently opened scene, but does not close the Harmony
application.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene, drawings, palettes, andpalette lists.
Lets you do the following:llAdvanced Savell

Rights to Modify Scene Version

Save the scene as the current version.
Save different versions representing different stages of the
production of your scene.
Save different versions representing different scene setups.
Choose specific assets that you want to save, such as
drawings or palettes.

Allows you to modify the selected version of the scene as well as tomanage and overwrite other versions. Other users will not be able toopen a different version of the scene until you close the scene.

177Chapter 2: Menus

Rights to Modify Scene

Allows you to modify the currently selected scene version only. Unlessthe Get rights to modify the scene option is also checked, you will not
be able to change other versions of the scene. This allows other users
to modify different versions of the scene while you are working on theselected version.
Determines which drawing files have been modified on disk since you
loaded them. All updated drawings will be reloaded.

Read Changed Drawings

NOTE
Reloading a locked drawing will discard unsaved changes.

Manage Versions

Allows you to manage all the versions of the current scene.
Saves the current file with a different name and at a different location.

Save As

Saves the current state of a scene as another scene. The Save As
window prompts you for a new name and a different location for thisscene before saving it. This will create a complete scene directory forthe new scene.

NOTE
The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.

Save as New Version

Saves the current scene as another version. The Save Version dialog
box prompts you to give a name for this new version. This will create a
new .xstage file in your current project directory.

Back Up Scene

Backs up the current scene to a location you choose.

Update Database Scene

Updates your database with only the changes you made to the scene.
To do this, you must enter your host name and host port in the
Preferences dialog box, General tab.

Download Database Changes

If any changes were made to the scene you downloaded, you canperform an update by downloading these changes, which will be
integrated into your scene.

Remove Unused Files

Removes the unused palettes from the scene list.

178

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

ImportFrom Scanner

Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.

ImagesImports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

Movie

Lets you convert a QuickTime movie to an image sequence and audio
file.

Sound

Lets you import sound files into your project.

Colour Model

Lets you import TVG drawing file into your project. Once imported, it isdisplay in the Model view for use as a colour model which you canload into any Harmony scene.

SWF, Illustrator Files to LibraryLets you import SWF files into your project.

ExportImagesMovie

Exports a scene as a bitmap image sequence. If there is sound in yourscene, it will not be exported with the images.
Exports animation as a QuickTime movie.
Exports a Flash movie file.

SWF

Harmony supports exporting Flash movie files with a limited subset ofvector and bitmap effects, the latter which can be previewed in Render
View

mode.

OpenGL Frames

Exports OpenGL frames (fast display mode) for a quick screen rendersof a scene that contain no transparency channel. Heavier scenes
containing 3D, multiple effects and camera moves can be fairly long toexport.

XsheetPrints the exposure sheet so you can take it to your animation table,
provide a copy to the animator, or create your Xsheet skeleton directly
in Harmony.

Print

179

Chapter 2: Menus

Quit

Closes the application.

180

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Help Menu
The Help menu lets you display the Harmony documentation, Welcome screen and end user license agreement,
as well as access the Toon Boom website, and identify the product name and version number.

How to access the Help menulAt the top of the interface, select Help.

Command

Description

Online Help

Opens the Harmony Help system, complete with instructions on how
to use the system. This requires an internet connection.

Getting Started

Opens the Harmony Getting Started Guide (in PDF format) in abrowser window. Requires Acrobat Reader.

Toon Boom on the Web

Opens the Toon Boom website, which features a Support andCommunity > Forum section.
The Customer Experience Improvement Program allows Toon Boom toCustomer Experience Improvement
Programcollect usage information. The data does not contain any personallyidentifiable information and cannot be used to identify you. The data
will consist of a basic hardware description, a project summary andusage information. The information is used only for software
improvement purposes, as well as for sharing with third parties for thesame reason.
This program is enabled by default but is voluntary. If you prefer not toparticipate, you can opt out when you first launch the software, byusing a global preference, or by a command line argument.

About

Identifies the product name and version number.

Show Welcome Screen

Displays the Harmony Welcome screen.

Show End User License Agreement

Displays the End User License Agreement.

Debug Mode

When enabled, information is logged in the Message Log view about
the preview generated in the Camera view, each time the preview isrefreshed. In OpenGL preview mode, summary information is logged
about the amount of layers to process and the time it takes to generate

181Chapter 2: Menus

the preview. In Render Preview mode, detailed information about eachcomposite and effect that is processed is logged.

182

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Insert Menu
The Insert menu lets you create empty symbols in the Library view, different types of layers in the Timelineview, keyframes and control points.

How to access the Insert menulAt the top of the interface, select Insert.

Command

Description

Create Empty Symbol in Library

Creates an empty symbol in the Library view to which you can edit
(add content).

Bone

Adds a new Bone layer to the Timeline view.

CameraAdds a new Camera layer to the Timeline view.

Colour-Card

Adds a new Colour-Card layer to the Timeline view.

Drawing

Adds a new Drawing layer to the Timeline view and a column in the
Xsheet view.

Game Bone

Adds a new Game Bone layer to the Timeline view.

Kinematic Output

Adds dd a new Kinematic Output layer to the Timeline view.

Peg

Adds a new Peg layer to the Timeline view.

Quadmap

Adds a new Quadmap layer to the Timeline view.

Effects

Adds a new layer in the Timeline view with the effect you select:
Blending, Blur, Blur-Gaussian, Brightness-Contrast, Colour-Override,
Colour-Scale, Cutter, Glow, Highlight, Shadow, Tone, or Transparency.

Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Keyframe and Duplicate Drawing

Adds a keyframe to the selected drawing layer cell in the Timeline viewand creates a duplicate of the drawing, which sits on top of theoriginal drawing.

183

Chapter 2: Menus

Position Keyframe

Adds a position keyframe whereby keyframes will only be added on
the X, Y and Z parameters of the selected layer. Keyframes are notadded on the Angle, Scale and Skew parameters.

Control Point

Adds a control point to the trajectory of the selected element or peg in
the Camera view when the element or peg is in a 3D path. Note thatyou must have a 3D path in the peg portion in order to add a control
point.

184

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Play Menu
The Play menu lets you play back animation and sound. Use it to scrub the sound to create your lip-sync, loop
the playback, navigate through frames, and change the playback range and speed.

How to access the Play menulAt the top of the interface, select Play.

Command

Description

Play

Plays the scene in the Camera or Drawing view.

Render and Play

Renders your scene's frames, then opens the rendered frames
in Harmony Play for playback.
This allows you to preview your scene's animation in real time, withthe effects rendered and with no risk of slowdown.
Exports your scene as it appears in the Camera view into a movie file,then opens it in your workstation's default video player.

Record and PlayThis allows you to preview your animation without any risk of
slowdown, but it does not preview the effects in your scene. However,
it is much faster than Render and Play.
This button automates the usage of the Export OpenGL Frames dialog
see

Test SWF Movie

Quickly exports your scene as a Flash Movie (.swf), then opens it inyour workstation's default web browser.

Stop

Stops playback.

Playback Speed

Opens the Set New Frame Rate dialog box where you can set theframe rate at which the playback plays.

Loop

If pressed, your scene will repeat indefinitely when playing. Otherwise,
it will stop when the end is reached.

Enable Sound

Turns on sound during playback.

185

Chapter 2: Menus

Enable Sound Scrubbing

Turns on sound scrubbing during playback.

Start Frame

Opens the Set Playback Start Frame dialog box , in which you canenter the frame number from which to start playback.

Stop Frame

Opens the Set Playback Stop Frame dialog box, in which you can set
the frame number at which to stop playback.

First Frame

Moves the red playhead to the first frame.

Previous Frame

Moves the red playhead to the previous frame.

Next Frame

Moves the red playhead to the next frame.

Last Frame

Moves the red playhead to the last frame.

Go to Frame

Opens the Go to Frame dialog box where you can enter the frame
number on which the red playhead to be positioned in the Timeline
view.

Enable Playback
Top View

Plays back your animation in the Top view.

Side View

Plays back your animation in the Side view.

Perspective View

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

186Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Scene Menu
The Scene menu lets you set the scene length, add frames to the scene, view different displays of the scene, setrender options, access the Scene Settings dialog box and Elements Manager window, and verify the drawing
and palette files in your project.

How to access the Scene menulAt the top of the interface, select Scene.

Command

Description

Scene Length

Lets you set the length of the scene in frames.

Frame
Add Frames at Start

Adds the number of frames you specify to the beginning of the scene.

Add Frames at End

Adds the number of frames you specify to the end of the scene.

Add Frames Before Selection
Adds the number of frames you specify before or after your selection.
Add Frames After Selection
Remove Selected Frames

Deletes the selected frames from your scene.

CameraDefault Camera

Lets you select a camera. If you only add one camera to your scene,
you will only see Default Camera in your list.

Default Display
Display All
Display

Scene Settings

Shows the contents of a specific Display node, updating the contentsof the Camera, Top, Side, Perspective, and Timeline views.

Opens the Scene Settings dialog box where you can set the resolution,alignment, bitmap resolution and many other parameters.

187

Chapter 2: Menus

RenderAuto Render

Automatically recalculates the preview image whenever you modify aparameter. If your scene is heavy and you do not want the preview
rendered automatically, deselect the Auto-Render option and do thepreview update manually.Note that this will slow down Harmony as it
takes resources to update every frame.
Renders a frame each time the current frame is changed.

Auto Render Write

You must have a Write node in your node structure to use thiscommand.

Cancel Preview Render

Cancels a render that was started.

Element Manager

Opens the Element Manager window where you can add, delete or
modify elements (drawing folders) in your scene. If you have drawing
folders that are not linked to a column in your scene, use the Element
Manager to delete them if needed. See xref Reference > Windows >Element Manager.

Check Files

Verifies the integrity of the drawing and palette files in your project.

188Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

View Menu
The View menu lets you manipulate the view by zooming, panning, or rotating. You can also display the gridand change its size, use the onion skin feature to help with drawing, and set the preview resolution.

How to access the View menulAt the top of the interface, select View.

Command

Description
Cycles through the following display modes:lToggle Full ScreenllNormal Full-Screen: The main application window becomesfull screen.
View Full-Screen: The selected view becomes full screen andall other views are collapsed.
Normal: The main application window is restored to its original
size and collapsed views are expanded.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animationtable.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like ananimation table.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Next Colour

Goes to the next colour in the Colour view.

189Chapter 2: Menus

Previous Colour

Goes to the previous colour in the Colour view.

Grid
Show Grid

Displays the grid.

Grid Outline Only

Displays the outline of the grid only.

Underlay

Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Overlay

Displays the grid over the drawing elements.

Square Grid

Displays a standard square grid.

12 Field Grid

Displays a 12-field size grid.

16 Field Grid

Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin

Show Onion Skin

Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By default, theprevious drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are
displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the
Preferences dialog box.

Add to Onion Skin

Adds a series of selected elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove from Onion Skin

Removes a series of selected elements from the onion skin preview.

Remove Unselected from Onion
Skin

Removes all elements except the ones selected from the onion skinpreview.

Add All to Onion Skin

Adds all of the scene's elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove All from Onion Skin

Removes all of the scene's elements from the onion skin preview.

Onion Skinning by Drawing

In Camera view, the onion skin by default is per frame, this option lets
you set it by drawing so you don't see any exposure's onion skin fromthe same drawing.

190

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

No Previous Drawing

Removes the previous drawing's onion skin and displays only the next
drawing.

Previous Drawing

Displays the previous drawing.

Previous Two Drawings

Displays the previous two drawings.

Previous Three Drawings

Displays the previous three drawings.

No Next Drawing

Do not show the onion skin for all of the next drawings.

Next Drawing

Show the onion skin for the next drawing.

Next Two Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next two drawings.

Next Three Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next three drawings.

Reduce One Previous Drawing

Reduces the number of previous visible drawings by one.

Add One Previous Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible drawings.

Reduce One Next Drawing

Reduces the number of next visible drawings by one.

Add One Next Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of next visible drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see the previous and subsequent
active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful for seeing the otherlayers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.

Backlight

Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured areas
into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of
the ink and paint process. Any unpainted zones can be seen as thelight shows through the unpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.

Show

Symbol Pivot

Displays a symbol's pivot. The Symbol pivot is similar to the Drawing
pivot. Each symbol cell can have its own pivot and act the same as theDrawing pivot. The Symbol pivot can also be referred to as embedded

191

Chapter 2: Menus

pivot. Inside a symbol, each drawing can have its own pivot.

Safe Area

Camera Mask

Displays the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera frame. The
safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as the safety zone andframe’s centre.
Displays a black mask around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing theunnecessary artwork. This option is handy when you're animating andsetting up the scene. It allows you to see your scene’s composition
better.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Current Drawing on Top

Displays the selected drawing on top of everything while you draw. By
enabling this option, each time you select a drawing tool, the selecteddrawing is displayed in front of everything in the Camera view. The
Timeline view ordering remain unchanged.You only need to enable thisoption once, it is not necessary to do it each time you select a drawing
tool.

Outline Locked Drawings

Displays drawing that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot be
selected in the Camera view) as wireframes.

Show Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines standout.

Show Strokes with Colour Wash

Displays strokes with washed-out colours.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Preview Manager

Opens the Preview Manager where you can set options for the qualityof previews, and clearing and updating the cache.

Preview Resolution

192

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Same as Scene Resolution
3/4 of Scene Resolution
1/2 of Scene Resolution

Lets you choose a resolution for previewing a scene.

1/3 of Scene Resolution
1/4 of Scene Resolution

CustomLets you select a resolution from a list of presets or enter X and Y
values for a custom preview resolution.
Let's you increase or decrease the preview quality of raw bitmap
images. By default, bitmap files imported in Harmony will display in a
low resolution in the Camera view to avoid hindering performance.

TIP

Bitmap File Quality

You can change the default resolution in which bitmap files
are displayed in the Camera view by changing the
Small Bitmap Resolution preference located in the Camera tabof the Preferences dialog.

NOTE
This only affects the way bitmap images display in the
OpenGL preview of the scene in the Camera view. The
preview quality of bitmap images does not affect the final
render.

193

Chapter 2: Menus

Windows Menu
The Windows menu lets you customize your workspace to suit your working style, save it as a new workspace,and load it from the Workspace toolbar. You can also show or hide the different toolbars and views in Harmony.

How to access the Windows menulFrom the top menu, select Windows.

Command

Description

Restore Default Workspace

Returns modified workspaces to their original default layout if you do
not like the current modifications or inadvertently closed some
windows.

Workspace

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you can modify, create, delete,rename and reorder your workspaces.

Save Workspace

Saves the current workspace along with any modifications you made.

Save Workspace As...

Saves the workspace as a new version to avoid overwriting the current
one.

Workspace

Lets you open workspaces designed specifically for animating,compositing, hand drawing, scripting and the default workspace.

Toolbars

Lets you show or hide these toolbars: Tool Presets, Art Layer,
Playback, File, Edit, Advanced Animation, Scripting, Tools, Flip, Onion
Skin, Mark Drawing, Easy Flipping, Workspace, Deformation, Camera
View, Xsheet View and Timeline View.

CameraShows or hides the Camera view.

ColourShows or hides the Colour view.

Drawing

Shows or hides the Drawing view.

FunctionShows or hides the Function view.

194Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Library

Shows or hides the Library view.

Message Log

Shows or hides the Message Log view.

Model

Shows or hides the Model view.

Perspective

Shows or hides the Perspective view.

Side

Shows or hides the Side view.

Timeline

Shows or hides the Timeline view.

Tool Properties

Shows or hides the Tool Properties view.

Top

Shows or hides the Top view.

XsheetShows or hides the Xsheet view.

Integrated Help

Shows or hides the Integrated Help view.

Metadata Editor

Shows or Hides the Metadata Editor view.

Script Editor

Shows or hides the Script Editor view.

195Chapter 2: Menus

View Menus
A view menu contains commands specifically related to that view.

How to access a view menu
1. In the top-left corner of a view, click the Menu

button.

Camera View Menu

197

Colour View Menu

214

Drawing View Menu

217

Function View Menu

229

Library View Menu

231

Model View Menu

233

Perspective View Menu

235

Script Editor View Menu

240

Side View Menu

244

Timeline View Menu

249

Top View Menu

254

Xsheet View Menu

259

196

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Camera View Menu
The Camera View menu lets you do many things in the Camera view, including selecting and editing objects indifferent views, changing the display, setting morphing parameters, accessing tools and many more.

How to access the Camera menul

In the upper-left corner of the Camera view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Select Stroke With
Current Colour

Select the strokes that contain the currently selected colour.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

197Chapter 2: Menus

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the Timelineview.

Select Parent
Skipping Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view skipping
effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous
Sibling
Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timeline view.

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.
Group: Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Group

Ungroup: Ungroups a selected group of drawing objects in the Camera or
Drawing view.

View
Zoom In: Zooms in the view.
Zoom Out: Zooms out the view.
Rotate View CW: Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like ananimation table.

Navigation

Rotate View CCW: Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, likean animation table.
Reset Zoom: Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.
Reset Rotation: Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.
Reset Pan: Resets the view’s pan to its default position.
Reset View: Resets the view to its default position.

Switch to Colour Art

Displays the Colour Art layer. When switching art layers, you can edit the selected198

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

layer without affecting the other one.
Preview Line
Art andColour Art

Open GL View

Displays all Art layers.

Switches the Camera view to fast display, letting you see your animation play inreal time. The OpenGL display requires less memory. The final look of your effects
is not shown in the OpenGL View Mode. You must switch to the Render View
Mode to see your effects.

Render View

Matte View

Switches the Camera view to a fully rendered display showing the final image ofthe current frame. If a modification is done to your current frame or if you move toa different frame, click the Update Preview button to update the display if yourpreview does not update automatically.The Render View Mode display lets you
see the final look of your frames including effects and antialiasing. You cannot
play back your scene in Render View Mode. To see your scene fully rendered andto play it back, you must press the Render and Play button in the Playback toolbar.
Switches the Camera view to a matte display showing the alpha channel of theelements in your scene. The transparency level ranges from 0 to 100 percent. Zeropercent is completely transparent and represented by black and 100 percent iscompletely opaque and represented by white. Everything in between these
extremes has a transparency level somewhere between 1 and 99 percent and isrepresented in various shades of grey.
Show Grid: Displays the grid.
Grid Outline Only: Displays the outline of the grid only.
Underlay: Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Grid

Overlay: Displays the grid over the drawing elements.
Square Grid: Displays a standard square grid.
12 Field Grid: Displays a 12-field size grid.
16 Field Grid: Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin

Show Onion Skin: Lets Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By

199

Chapter 2: Menus

default, the previous drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are
displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the Preferences
dialog box.
Add to Onion Skin: Adds Adds a series of selected elements to the onion skinpreview.
Remove from Onion Skin: Removes Removes a series of selected elements fromthe onion skin preview.
Remove Unselected from Onion Skin: Removes Removes all elements except theones selected from the onion skin preview.
Add All to Onion Skin: Adds Adds all of the scene's elements to the onion skinpreview.
Remove All from Onion Skin: Removes Removes all of the scene's elements fromthe onion skin preview.
Onion Skinning by Drawing:
No Previous Drawing:
Previous Drawing: Displays the previous drawing.
Previous Two Drawings: Displays the previous two drawings.
Previous Three Drawings: Displays the previous three drawings.
No Next Drawing: Displays no next drawing.
Next Drawing: Displays the next drawing.
Next Two Drawings: Displays the next two drawings.
Next Three Drawings: Displays the next three drawings.
Reduce One Previous Drawing: Reduces the number of previous visible drawings
by one.

200

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Add One Previous Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible
drawings.
Reduce One Next Drawing: Reduces the number of next visible drawings by one.
Add One Next Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of next visible
drawings.
Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can see theLight Table

Backlight

previous and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful forseeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.
Produces Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured areas
into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of the ink andpaint process. Any unpainted zones can be seen as the light shows through theunpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.
Symbol Pivot: Displays a symbol's pivot. The Symbol pivot is similar to the
Drawing pivot. Each symbol cell can have its own pivot and act the same as theDrawing pivot. The Symbol pivot can also be referred to as embedded pivot. Inside
a symbol, each drawing can have its own pivot.
Safe Area: Displays Displays the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera
frame. The safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as the safety zone andframe’s centre.
Camera Mask: Displays Displays a black mask around the scene’s frame to avoid
seeing the unnecessary artwork. This option is handy when you're animating andsetting up the scene. It allows you to see your scene’s composition better.

Show
Control: Displays the controls of the selected element.
BBox Selection Style: Lets you change the display style of selected elements to abounding box style. This removes the default overlay highlight and leaves only thebounding box around the selected element.
Outline Locked Drawings: Drawings that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot
be selected in the Camera view) are displayed as wireframes.
Show Current Drawing on Top: Displays Displays the selected drawing on top of
everything while you draw. By enabling this option, each time you select adrawing tool, the selected drawing is displayed in front of everything in the201

Chapter 2: Menus

Camera view. The Timeline view ordering remain unchanged.You only need toenable this option once, it is not necessary to do it each time you select a drawing
tool.
Show Strokes: Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines
stand out.
Show Strokes with Colour Wash: Displays strokes with washed-out colours.
Highlight Selected Colour:
Show Scan Information: Displays a status bar showing the scanning information
at the bottom of the Drawing and Camera view.
Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Render Current
Frame

Renders only the current frame.

Auto Render

Automatically recalculates the preview image whenever you modify a parameter. If
your scene is heavy and you do not want the preview rendered automatically,
deselect the Auto-Render option and do the preview update manually.Note that
this will slow down Harmony as it takes resources to update every frame.

Layer Properties

Displays the Layer Properties window of the selected layer in the Timeline view.

Preview Manager

Opens the Preview Manager where you can set options for the quality of previews,
and clearing and updating the cache.
Let's you increase or decrease the preview quality of raw bitmap images. By
default, bitmap files imported in Harmony will display in a low resolution in the
Camera view to avoid hindering performance.

Bitmap File Quality

TIP
You can change the default resolution in which bitmap files are displayedin the Camera view by changing the Small Bitmap Resolution preference
located in the Camera tab of the Preferences dialog.

202

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
This only affects the way bitmap images display in the OpenGL preview ofthe scene in the Camera view. The preview quality of bitmap images does
not affect the final render.

Drawing
Remove Dirt: Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the
number and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.
Remove Hair: Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the
number and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This removes any
small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thick lines or filled zones.
Increase the value to select larger strokes for removal from the drawing.
Close Gaps: Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do not need to trace
directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters away. The two closest
points automatically close the gap.

Clean Up

Remove Art Inside Selection: Removes any art inside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high definition resolutions.
Remove Art Inside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art inside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Remove Art Outside Selection: Removes any art existing outside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean the Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high-definition resolutions.
Remove Art Outside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art outside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Unpaint Selection: Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.

Paint

Unpaint Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art contained inside a selection
on all the drawings within the same layer.

203

Chapter 2: Menus

Unpaint Outside Selection: Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If noselection have been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
unpainted.
Unpaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art outside a selection on
all the drawings within the same layer.
Repaint Selection: Repaints any art inside a selection.
Repaint Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art inside a selection on all thedrawings contained within the same layer.
Repaint Outside Selection: Repaints any art outside a selection. If no selection has
been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be repainted.
Repaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art outside a selection
on all the drawings contained within the same layer.
Pencil Lines to Brush Strokes: Converts the selected centreline pencil strokes into
contour strokes brush lines.
Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines: Converts selected contour strokes into centreline
pencil strokes. The brush stroke thickness will be lost.
ConvertStrokes to Pencil Lines: Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.
Brush Apart Text Layers: Text is treated as a single drawing object. This separates
the text so each character becomes an individual drawing object you can selectand modify independently.
Flatten: Merges Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If
you draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be
useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on
top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, it will beeasier if they are flattened.
Optimize
Smooth: Smooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.
Create Contour Strokes: Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape that was
drawn directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint tool
but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaint later.

204

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Remove Contour Strokes: Remove any permanently invisible lines that werecreated while scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles created duringvectorization.
Remove Extra Strokes: Removes strokes inside painted area. This option only
works after the painted drawing is flattened.
Optimize: Reduces Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brushstrokes, in the selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened
and optimized if the selected objects do not change the appearance of the final
image when they are merged.
Crop Brush Textures: Crops Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap that lies
unseen beneath the vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs when you
cut and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If you cut a portion
from a textured line and paste it into a different drawing, Harmony pastes theentire unseen texture bitmap from the source drawing into the new one, even if
you only took a small portion of the source drawing. Using the Crop Brush
Texture command will crop away extraneous texture that does not touch thevector area. If there are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly reduce
the file size.
Reduce Drawing Texture Resolution:
When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution image, thesize of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce the size and resolution of the
textures in a drawing.
Bring to Front: Moves the selected art to the front (on top).
Bring Forward: Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).
Arrange
Send Backward: Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).
Send to Back: Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Transform

Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.
Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

205

Chapter 2: Menus

Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotate 180: Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Create Empty
Drawing

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets anotherdrawing, key exposure or a blank cell.
Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify an

Duplicate Drawings

existing drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected
cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawing thatwas on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the
project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.
The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed. The
original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is
exposed.

Delete Selected
Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project, thesedrawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Create Colour Art
From Line Art

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded layers (line art,
colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings on
separate layers. This provides more inking and painting flexibility.
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on any of the four
embedded layers.
Automatically creates a matte from a selected drawing or all drawings on a layer.

Generate Auto-Matte

Opens the auto-Matte dialog box where you can set the radius of the lines
depending on how precise or rough your line is.
You can also select the source and destinatin layers from which the matte will becreated.

Adjust Line Texture
Opacity

Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.

Change Bitmap
Drawing Resolution

Lets you Lets you change the resolution of bitmap art for individual drawings. You
can reduce the resolution of your bitmap file as well as increase it. Be careful

206

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

because enlarging the bitmap resolution on an existing drawing will result in aloss of quality.Harmony will perform a pixel smoothing pass (resampling) andcreate additional pixels to avoid losing too much quality, but only to a certain
extent. This feature is very useful when you need to have a full resolution of abitmap image (such as imported bitmaps as .psd or .tga for the background) for
tracing to create a matte directly in Harmony.By default, Harmony creates small
thumbnail images when imported as bitmap in order to increase performance byusing a small thumbnail image instead of using the original large size bitmap foranimation work in Harmony. This will make difficult to view details or trace due tothe low resolution (blurry). This option temporary increases the resolution ofbitmaps up to their original bitmap resolution to make tracing easier.
Previous Drawing
Next Drawing
Previous Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you can navigate between
the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous drawing, next drawing,
previous layer or next layer.
Displays the previous drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.

Next Layer
Toggle Current Colour Protection: Temporarily enables/disables the Colour
Protection feature so you can quickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas underprotected colour without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.
Colour Protection

Respect Colour Protection: In the Colour view, you can protect a colour swatch to
avoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you using the
Paint tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaint the protectedcolours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

Drawing Tools

SelectAllows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brush strokes, pencil
lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines and shapes inyour artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and move vector points, move theBezier handles of the vector points as well as deform vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating the points at thecentre of its line rather than its contour.

Pencil Editor

Lets you modify the thick and thin contour of a pencil line (basically a central

207

Chapter 2: Menus

vector shape). Shape control points along the central spine allow you to adjust thestroke curve and position.
CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotate and skew it.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra points, making
them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points and tweaking lines in a
grid.

Reposition All
Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in the current layer.

Drawing Pivot

Allows you to position the pivot on a drawing layer by clicking where you want its
location to be.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick and thin line
effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made of central
vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brush strokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

208

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines by clicking
to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Ink

Allows you to recolour pencil lines with precision by changing the colour of one
segment at a time.

Repaint Brush

Lets you repaint existing brush strokes. The new brush strokes will be cropped to
fit in existing artwork.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the Paint tool. By
drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool will create a small invisible
stroke connecting the two closest points around the gap.

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones that can be
filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients and textures in acolour zone.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a real animation disc.

Animation

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe on the selected cell in the Timeline view. If the Animate mode isenabled in the Camera view, a keyframe is automatically created on the current
frame.

Insert Control Point

Adds a control point to a 3D path function.

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains still
until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its new

209Chapter 2: Menus

location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. With motion keyframes, Harmony generates theinterpolation between the keyframes. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the value of theprevious keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.

Flip

Flips the position of an element on its axis.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Lets you set the ease in and ease out on multiple functions and keyframes. This
opens the Set Ease For Multiple Parameters where you can modify the Bezier orEase curve. You can apply easing parameters to a certain type of function only,
such as rotation or scale.

Linear Motion

Transforms a curved path to a linear path removing tension, bias, and continuity.

Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using the Transform orTranslate tool.

Substitute Drawing
Previous
Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.
Substitute Drawing
Next
Select Previous
Keyframe/Point
Select the previous keyframe/point.
Select Next
Keyframe/Point
Lock

Locks a layer so it cannot be selected in the Camera view.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of the active
tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle will be reset
to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation values will be reset.

210Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer. Your
keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position. Thisis useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have a particular Zordering for the different views of a character. You might want to reset thetransformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an object up
to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element while
maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you move them
towards or away from the camera.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Reposition Drawing

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate or skew all drawing strokes on every drawing
included in a layer.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying
your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements
were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area, it will look
like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you have several
elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at adifferent location to represent the group's motion better.

Inverse Kinematic
Tool

Allows you to pose a character model by pulling on its extremities, such as hands
and feet, and have the other connected limbs follow. Can be used on any piece
connected in a hierarchy.

211

Chapter 2: Menus

IK Constraints
Set IK Nail

Blocks the X, Y and Z positions.

Set IK Hold
Orientation

Blocks the angle.

Set IK Hold X

Blocks only the X position.

Set IK Hold Y

Blocks only the Y position.

Set IK Min Angle
Set IK Max Angle
Remove All
Constraints

Sets limitations on the angle parameter to prevent the puppet from bending too
far.

Removes all nails except the minimum and maximum angles.

Morphing

Morphing

Contour Hint

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.
The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines; in otherwords, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line thickness and contour
position. Also, if a contour is not animated correctly, you can use hints to correct
the animation. For example, if a flag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enough away fromthe contour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity rule. The
Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone. Sometimes a colour zone is
not associated with the corresponding one by default. For example, in a splash
animation there are many water droplets that are the same colour. Harmony
automatically morphs the droplet to the nearest one. This is not always the one
you may have predicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone to morph withanother one.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

212

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known as central vector. It
can be used on drawings that were done using the Pencil, Polyline, Ellipse, Lineand Rectangle tools. Like the Contour Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to the central
vector. Make sure to place it far enough away from the line so you will see it snap
when you move it.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.
A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing shape. A
shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is no corresponding shape

Vanishing Point Hintin the destination drawing. If you do not place a Vanishing Point Hint to control
the point of disappearance, the shape will vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an appearing shape. A
shape will appear in the destination drawing when there is no corresponding
shape in the source drawing. If you do not place an Appearing Point Hint tocontrol the point of appearance, the shape will appear from its centre and expand
outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Switch Between
Morphing Key

Toggles Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence. This
option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default keyboard shortcut F4

Drawings

to toggle between your drawings.

Suggest HInts

Automatically sets Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help tool.
If you're not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set the main
hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you would like to
see.

213

Chapter 2: Menus

Colour View Menu
The Colour View menu lets you access commands related to the Colour view such as creating new palettes,
adding new colour swatches, and displaying the Tint panel.

How to access the Colour menul

In the upper-left corner of the Colour view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Palettes
Creates a new colour palette.

New

By default, Toon Boom Harmony is set to the Basic mode. For simple
productions, it is recommended to use the Basic mode. This setting stores thepalettes automatically for you and saves them at the Scene level. When you use
the Advanced Palette Lists mode, you can decide at which level you want to store
your palettes: Environment, Job, Scene, or Element.

Link

Lets you access other palettes created in the project and link them to your scene.

ImportImports a colour palette located on your hard drive.

RemoveRemoves the selected palette from the palette list.

Remove and Delete
on Disk

Removes the selected palette from the palette list and deletes the palette file fromthe disk.

RenameLets you five the selected colour palette a new name.

Duplicate

Creates a copy of the original palette, using the same names and colour values,
but has a different ID and is independent from the original palette. This ensuresthat both the duplicate and original palettes are completely independent.

Clone

Creates a copy of the master palette. The colours in each palette have the same
properties. The colours have the same identification number pointing to the same
colour zones, but they can have different names and RGBA values.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette containing the pencil line textures.

214Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Move Up

Moves the selected colour palette up one level.

Move Down

Moves the selected colour palette down one level.

Colour Editor

Opens the Colour Editor where you can pick and edit colour swatches.

Tint Panel

Opens the Tint panel where you can modify a series of colours to blend a tint inthem or offset their RGBA values.

Current PaletteOverrides

When clone palettes are present in the palette list, by default, priority is given to
the palette that is the highest in the palette list to decide which colours to apply
to drawings. With this option enabled, priority is given to the currently selected
palette. Selecting any of the clone palettes will make drawings use colours fromthe selected palette instead.

Display Colour
Values

Display the colour values beside their colour swatches in the palette list.

Colours
Cut

Cuts the selected colour swatch from the palette.

Copy

Copies the selected colour swatch which you can paste in a different palette.

Copy Colour ID

Copies a colour swatch's colour ID so you can keep a reference file of colour IDs
or use them with custom plug-ins. Example of a colour ID: 075cf5b552401130.

Paste Colour Values

Pastes the colour value of the copied swatch over an existing colour swatch.

Paste As New
Colours

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour value of the copied swatch.

Paste As Clones

Pastes a copied colour to a new palette as a clone of the original one. Both colour
use the same colour ID. They have to be in different palettes.

New

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour swatch that was last selected.

Edit

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can edit the selected colour
swatch.

215

Chapter 2: Menus

DeleteDeletes the selected colour swatch from the palette.

New Texture

Lets you add a bitmap colour swatch to your palette. You can load photos andtextures and paint your drawings with it. The bitmap image must be a .tga or .psd
file format.

Edit Texture

Opens the browser to replace the texture used in a textured colour swatch. Allzones using the swatch will be updated with the new texture.

Scale Down Texture

Lets you set a new maximum texture size or scaling factor.

New Default Colour

Creates a new colour using the default colour set in the preferences.

Protect Colour

Locks a selected colour, so if you ever paint over it accidentally, the work alreadydone will not be affected. You can also block the filling colours if you painted allof the animation in Line Art and plan to repaint the lines.

Swatch Mode

Displays the colour swatches with its corresponding name inside the swatch.
When this option is not selected, the names of the colour swatches are displayed
beside the swatch.

Independent Bitmap
ColourBitmap colour selection is independent from the vector colour selection.

Bitmap Colour Sliders
RGB

Displays the colour picking sliders as RGB (red, green, blue).

HSV

Displays the colour picking sliders as HSV (hue, saturation, value).

216

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Drawing View Menu
The Drawing View menu lets you access tools, set morphing parameters, lock or unlock layers, and selectelements in the Drawing view.

How to access the Drawing menul

In the upper-left corner of the Drawing view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Select Stroke With
Current Colour

Select the strokes that contain the currently selected colour.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

View

217

Chapter 2: Menus

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animation table.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like an animation table.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Switch to Colour Art

Displays the Colour Art layer. When switching art layers, you can edit the selected
layer without affecting the other one.

Preview Line
Art andColour Art

Displays all Art layers.

Show Grid: Displays the grid.
Grid Outline Only: Displays the outline of the grid only.
Underlay: Displays the grid under the drawing elements.
Grid

Overlay: Displays the grid over the drawing elements.
Square Grid: Displays a standard square grid.
12 Field Grid: Displays a 12-field size grid.
16 Field Grid: Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin

Show Onion Skin: Lets Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By
default, the previous drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are
displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the Preferences
dialog box.
Show Centre Line:218

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

No Previous Drawing: Displays no previous drawing.
Previous Drawing: Displays the previous drawing.
Previous Two Drawings: Displays the previous two drawings.
Previous Three Drawings: Displays the previous three drawings.
No Next Drawing: Displays no next drawing.
Next Drawing: Displays the next drawing.
Next Two Drawings: Displays the next two drawings.
Next Three Drawings: Displays the next three drawings.
Reduce One Previous Drawing: Reduces the number of previous visible drawings
by one.
Add One Previous Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible
drawings.
Reduce One Next Drawing: Reduces the number of next visible drawings by one.
Add One Next Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of next visible
drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can see theprevious and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful forseeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.

Backlight

Produces Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured areas
into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of the ink andpaint process. Any unpainted zones can be seen as the light shows through theunpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.

Show Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines stand out.

Show

219

Chapter 2: Menus

Show Strokes with
Colour Wash

Displays strokes with washed-out colours.

Highlight Selected
ColourIdentify a selected colour swatch used in a drawing.

Show Morphing Key
Drawing Thumbnail

When using the Morphing tools, this displays the source or destination drawing
as a reference in the bottom corner of the Drawing view.

Show Scan
Information

Displays a status bar showing the scanning information at the bottom of the
Drawing and Camera view.

Desk
No Thumbnail
Small Thumbnail
Changes the size of the drawing desk thumbnails.
Medium Thumbnail
Large Thumbnail
Remove Selected
Drawing

Clears selected drawing from drawing desk.

Remove All
Drawings

Clears all drawing from drawing desk.

Drawing
Remove Dirt: Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the
number and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.

Clean Up

Remove Hair: Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the
number and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This removes any
small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thick lines or filled zones.
Increase the value to select larger strokes for removal from the drawing.
Close Gaps: Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do not need to trace

220Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters away. The two closest
points automatically close the gap.
Remove Art Inside Selection: Removes any art inside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high definition resolutions.
Remove Art Inside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art inside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Remove Art Outside Selection: Removes any art existing outside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean the Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high-definition resolutions.
Remove Art Outside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art outside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Unpaint Selection: Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.
Unpaint Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art contained inside a selection
on all the drawings within the same layer.
Unpaint Outside Selection: Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If noselection have been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
unpainted.

Paint

Unpaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art outside a selection on
all the drawings within the same layer.
Repaint Selection: Repaints any art inside a selection.
Repaint Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art inside a selection on all thedrawings contained within the same layer.
Repaint Outside Selection: Repaints any art outside a selection. If no selection has
been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be repainted.
Repaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art outside a selection
on all the drawings contained within the same layer.

221

Chapter 2: Menus

Pencil Lines to Brush Strokes: Converts the selected centreline pencil strokes into
contour strokes brush lines.
Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines: Converts selected contour strokes into centreline
pencil strokes. The brush stroke thickness will be lost.
ConvertStrokes to Pencil Lines: Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.
Brush Apart Text Layers: Text is treated as a single drawing object. This separates
the text so each character becomes an individual drawing object you can selectand modify independently.
Flatten: Merges Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If
you draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be
useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on
top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, it will beeasier if they are flattened.
Smooth: Smooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.
Create Contour Strokes: Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape that was
drawn directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint tool
but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaint later.

Optimize

Remove Contour Strokes: Remove any permanently invisible lines that werecreated while scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles created duringvectorization.
Remove Extra Strokes: Removes strokes inside painted area. This option only
works after the painted drawing is flattened.
Optimize: Reduces Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brushstrokes, in the selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened
and optimized if the selected objects do not change the appearance of the final
image when they are merged.
Crop Brush Textures: Crops Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap that lies
unseen beneath the vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs when you
cut and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If you cut a portion
from a textured line and paste it into a different drawing, Harmony pastes theentire unseen texture bitmap from the source drawing into the new one, even if

222

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

you only took a small portion of the source drawing. Using the Crop Brush
Texture command will crop away extraneous texture that does not touch thevector area. If there are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly reduce
the file size.
Reduce Drawing Texture Resolution:
When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution image, thesize of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce the size and resolution of the
textures in a drawing.
Bring to Front: Moves the selected art to the front (on top).
Bring Forward: Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).
Arrange
Send Backward: Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).
Send to Back: Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.
Transform

Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotate 180: Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Create Empty
Drawing

Duplicate Drawings

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets anotherdrawing, key exposure or a blank cell.
Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify anexisting drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected
cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawing thatwas on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the
project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.
The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed. The
original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is223

Chapter 2: Menus

exposed.
Delete Selected
Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project, thesedrawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Create Colour Art
From Line Art

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded layers (line art,
colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings on
separate layers. This provides more inking and painting flexibility.
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on any of the four
embedded layers.
Automatically creates a matte from a selected drawing or all drawings on a layer.

Generate Auto-Matte

Opens the auto-Matte dialog box where you can set the radius of the lines
depending on how precise or rough your line is.
You can also select the source and destinatin layers from which the matte will becreated.

Adjust Line Texture
Opacity

Change Bitmap
Drawing Resolution

Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.

Lets you Lets you change the resolution of bitmap art for individual drawings. You
can reduce the resolution of your bitmap file as well as increase it. Be careful
because enlarging the bitmap resolution on an existing drawing will result in aloss of quality.Harmony will perform a pixel smoothing pass (resampling) andcreate additional pixels to avoid losing too much quality, but only to a certain
extent. This feature is very useful when you need to have a full resolution of abitmap image (such as imported bitmaps as .psd or .tga for the background) for
tracing to create a matte directly in Harmony.By default, Harmony creates small
thumbnail images when imported as bitmap in order to increase performance byusing a small thumbnail image instead of using the original large size bitmap foranimation work in Harmony. This will make difficult to view details or trace due tothe low resolution (blurry). This option temporary increases the resolution ofbitmaps up to their original bitmap resolution to make tracing easier.

224

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Previous Drawing
Next Drawing
Previous Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you can navigate between
the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous drawing, next drawing,
previous layer or next layer.
Displays the previous drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.

Next Layer
Toggle Current Colour Protection: Temporarily enables/disables the Colour
Protection feature so you can quickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas underprotected colour without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.
Colour Protection

Respect Colour Protection: In the Colour view, you can protect a colour swatch to
avoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you using the
Paint tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaint the protectedcolours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

Drawing Tools

SelectAllows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brush strokes, pencil
lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines and shapes inyour artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and move vector points, move theBezier handles of the vector points as well as deform vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating the points at thecentre of its line rather than its contour.

Pencil Editor

Lets you modify the thick and thin contour of a pencil line (basically a central
vector shape). Shape control points along the central spine allow you to adjust thestroke curve and position.

CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotate and skew it.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra points, making
them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

225Chapter 2: Menus

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points and tweaking lines in a
grid.

Reposition All
Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in the current layer.

Drawing Pivot

Allows you to position the pivot on a drawing layer by clicking where you want its
location to be.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick and thin line
effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made of central
vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brush strokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines by clicking
to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Ink

Allows you to recolour pencil lines with precision by changing the colour of one
segment at a time.

226

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Repaint Brush

Lets you repaint existing brush strokes. The new brush strokes will be cropped to
fit in existing artwork.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the Paint tool. By
drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool will create a small invisible
stroke connecting the two closest points around the gap.

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones that can be
filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients and textures in acolour zone.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a real animation disc.

Morphing

Morphing

Contour Hint

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.
The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines; in otherwords, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line thickness and contour
position. Also, if a contour is not animated correctly, you can use hints to correct
the animation. For example, if a flag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enough away fromthe contour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity rule. The
Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone. Sometimes a colour zone is
not associated with the corresponding one by default. For example, in a splash
animation there are many water droplets that are the same colour. Harmony
automatically morphs the droplet to the nearest one. This is not always the one
you may have predicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone to morph withanother one.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

227

Chapter 2: Menus

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known as central vector. It
can be used on drawings that were done using the Pencil, Polyline, Ellipse, Lineand Rectangle tools. Like the Contour Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to the central
vector. Make sure to place it far enough away from the line so you will see it snap
when you move it.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.
A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing shape. A
shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is no corresponding shape

Vanishing Point Hintin the destination drawing. If you do not place a Vanishing Point Hint to control
the point of disappearance, the shape will vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an appearing shape. A
shape will appear in the destination drawing when there is no corresponding
shape in the source drawing. If you do not place an Appearing Point Hint tocontrol the point of appearance, the shape will appear from its centre and expand
outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Switch Between
Morphing Key

Toggles Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence. This
option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default keyboard shortcut F4

Drawings

to toggle between your drawings.

Go to First Frame

Goes to the first frame of your morphing sequence.

Go to Previous
Frame

Goes to the previous frame of the selected frame in the morphing sequence.

Go to Next Frame

Goes to the next frame of the selected frame in the morphing sequence.

Go to Last Frame

Goes to the last frame of your morphing sequence.

Suggest HInts

Automatically sets Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help tool.
If you're not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set the main
hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you would like to
see.

228

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Function View Menu
The Functions View menu lets you do many things in the Camera view, including selecting and editing objects
in different views, changing the display, setting morphing parameters, accessing tools and many more.

How to access the Function menul

In the upper-left corner of the Function view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select Next Keyframe

Selects the next keyframe.

Select Previous
Keyframe

Selects the previous keyframe.

Select Left Handle

Selects the left handle of the selected keyframe.

Select Right Handle

Selects the right handle of the selected keyframe.

Select All

Selects all objects in the Function view. This helps you manage multiple objects
as one.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Function view.

View

229

Chapter 2: Menus

Show Current Frame

Displays the current frame

Toggle Grid

Enables the display of the grid.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Function List
Auto Load Selection
Clear
Load Selection
Add Selection
Remove Selection
Show Motion:Show Rotation:
Show

Show Scale:Show Skew:
Show Other:230

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Library View Menu
The Library View menu lets you access commands specific to the Library view, such as opening a Library or
getting the rights to modify a library folder.

How to access the Library menul

In the upper-left corner of the Library view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

View
List

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a list.

Thumbnails

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a thumbnails.

Details

Displays the details of the selected file.

Generate Thumbnails

Creates a thumbnail to display in the preview window.

Edit
Creates a new symbol from a drawing or part of a drawing in the
Drawing or Camera view, or a layer in the Timeline view.
New Symbol

If your selection is in the Timeline , the new symbol appears in the Symbol folder.
The current selection is not replaced by the new symbol. The new symbol only
appears in the library. You must drag it into your scene to use it.
If your selection is in the Drawing or Camera view, the new symbol appears in the
Symbol folder and in the Timeline view as a new layer.

Cut

Cuts the selected file in the Library view.

Copy

Copies the selected file in the Library view.

Paste

Pastes the selected file in the Library view.

DeleteDeletes the selected file in the Library view.

231Chapter 2: Menus

Delete Thumbnails

Deletes any thumbnails that were generated for display in the preview window.
Places you inside the symbol where you can edit it.

Edit Symbol

To return to the project's timeline, click the Top

button in the Camera view's

top-left corner, press Ctrl + Shift + E (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + Shift + E (macOS).
Remove Unused Files

Removes any files not in use in the selected template.

Rename Template

Lets you rename a selected template.

Import Files

Imports vector files such as AI, PDF, and SWF. You requires the right to modify
the library in which you want to import the files.

Folders

New Folder

Creates a new folder in the Library view. Before you can create a new folder, youmust have the right to modify the folder in which you are creating the new folder.

RefreshUpdates the view and its contents.

Open LibraryLets you open a library on your computer.

Close Library

Unlinks a library folder from your library list.

232

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Model View Menu
The Model View menu lets you load models and view them in different ways, as well as access some drawing
tools.

How to access the Model menul

In the upper-left corner of the Model view, click the menu

button.

Command

Description

Previous Model

Shows the previous model loaded in the Model view.

Next Model

Shows the next model loaded in the Model view.

Import Model

Imports a TVG drawing as a model in the Model view.

Use Current Drawing as
Model

Loads the currently selected drawing in the scene as a model in the Model view.

Load Default Models

Loads TVG drawings placed in a custom models folder located in the scenefolder.

Clear Model

Removes the model from the Model view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animation table.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like an animation table.

233Chapter 2: Menus

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

SelectActivates the Select tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

Cutter Selection

Allows to cut a section of the model to paste it in your scene.

Dropper

Activates the Dropper tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

Zoom

Activates the Zoom tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

234

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Perspective View Menu
The Perspective View menu lets you select and edit elements, manipulate the view during scene setup, setparameters for animation and access animation tools.

How to access the Perspective menul

In the upper-left corner of the Perspective view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command
will deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were notselected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the235Chapter 2: Menus

Timeline view.
Select Parent Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view
skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timelineview.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Zoom In

Zooms into the view, towards the view's pivot point, up to 80,000%.

Zoom Out

Zooms out of the view, away from the view's pivot point, up to 1%.

Move Forward

Moves infinitely forward into the view, using the direction set by the current
position and angle of rotation.

Move Backward

Moves infinitely backwards out of the view, using the direction set by thecurrent position and angle of rotation.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can see
the previous and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It is usefulfor seeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up youranimation.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

View

236

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale, skew,
etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off the Animate mode
to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate mode is disabled,
keyframes are not created when an object's parameters change.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the currently selected frame in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point

Adds a control point to the motion path at the currently selected frame. This
control point does not appear in the Timeline, but can be used to reshape themotion path. In order for this command to work, layers must be set to 3D
Path.
Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Set Motion Keyframe

between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.
Sets a motion keyframe. With motion keyframes, Harmony generates theinterpolation between the keyframes. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the value ofthe previous keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original X-axis of
the layer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

237

Chapter 2: Menus

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you can change
the velocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion

Straightens out the motion path on either sides of the selected control point.

Lock in Time

Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or only
locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Locks the Z value when you're animating in 3D space. This means you can
only reposition your object along the x and y axes.

Substitute Drawing
Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next
drawing.

Substitute Drawing Next
Select Previous Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe/PointSelect the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe /Point

Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.
Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle
will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation
values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer. Your
keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. All

238

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

transformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.
This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have aparticular Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want toreset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an object
up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale theelement while maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you movethem towards or away from the camera.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or
modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If
your elements were drawn in a different location than the centre of thedrawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing.
Also, if you have several elements attached to one trajectory, you might wantyour trajectory to be at a different location to represent the group's motion
better.

239

Chapter 2: Menus

Script Editor View Menu
The Script Editor view menu gives you access to all of the commands needed for editing and testing scripts in
the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 546.

How to access the Script Editor view menu
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. In the top-left corner of the Script Editor view, click on the

ButtonMenu button.

Description

File
Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted to type in a
name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which location to save thescript in:l

User: Saves the script to your user preferences. You will be able to run and edit
the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as the same user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved to thepreferences for your account on your computer. if you are using Harmony
Server, the script will be saved to the preferences for your Harmony
database user.

New Script
l

l

l

l

Global: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to
the Harmony database's global script directory. Anyone who is logged in to the
database will be able to edit and run this script.
Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit and run thescript as long as they are working on a scne inside this environment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to thecurrent scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script as long as they
are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will be able toedit and run the script when working on this specific scene.

240Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

ButtonDescription

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View.

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Harmony. When you click on thisbutton, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on your file system. Then,
you are prompted to select which location to import the script in:l

User: Saves the script to your user preferences. You will be able to run and edit
the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as the same user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved to thepreferences for your account on your computer. if you are using Harmony
Server, the script will be saved to the preferences for your Harmony
database user.

lImport ScriptlllGlobal: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to
the Harmony database's global script directory. Anyone who is logged in to the
database will be able to edit and run this script.
Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit and run thescript as long as they are working on a scne inside this environment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to thecurrent scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script as long as they
are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will be able toedit and run the script when working on this specific scene.

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View.

Delete Script

Deletes the selected script.

241

Chapter 2: Menus

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources location,
as those are scripts that are installed with Harmony.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources but
which you copied to another location so you could make changes to it,
the original version of the script in the Application Resources folder
will be restored to the list.

Refresh Script
File List

Refresh the list of scripts in the Script Editor. If there are new scripts in your user
preferences or your scene's scripts sub-folder, click on this button to be able to open
them in the Script Editor.

EditorAllows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing software.

NOTES
Set External
Editorll

External Editor

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing softwareis enough if that application supports the AppleScript Open Document
protocol.
On Windows and GNU/Linux, unless your text editor is in yoursystem's PATH environment variable, you will have to type in the fullpath to the editor.

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Play/Debug

Set Target

Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with the Run and Debugcommands.

Run

Runs the target script and function.

242

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you can test anddebug the function.

NOTES
l

Debug
l

l

Stop

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

Help
Opens the reference documentation for the Harmony scripting interface in a web
browser.
ScriptingInterfaceDocumentation

NOTE
This documentation is installed with Harmony and does not require Internet
access.

243

Chapter 2: Menus

Side View Menu
The Side View menu lets you position elements in 3D space, set parameters for animation and access animation
tools—see Side View on page 548.

How to access the Side menul

In the upper-left corner of the Side view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the Timeline
view.

244

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Select Parent
Skipping Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view skipping
effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous
Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

View

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale, skew, etc.
of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off the Animate mode toreposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate mode is disabled,
keyframes are not created when an object's parameters change.

245

Chapter 2: Menus

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. With motion keyframes, Harmony generates theinterpolation between the keyframes. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the value ofthe previous keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on yourdrawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original X-axis of thelayer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you can change thevelocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion

Transforms a curved path to a linear path removing tension, bias, and continuity.

Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using the Transform orTranslate tool.

Substitute Drawing
Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.

246

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Substitute Drawing
Next
Select Previous
Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe /Point

Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.
Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.
Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of the active

Resettool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle will bereset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation values will bereset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer. Your
keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position. Thisis useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have a particular
Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want to reset thetransformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

247

Chapter 2: Menus

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an object up
to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element while
maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you move them
towards or away from the camera.
Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying
your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements

Spline Offset

were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area, it will look
like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you have several
elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at adifferent location to represent the group's motion better.

248

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Timeline View Menu
The Timeline View menu lets you modify layers, keyframe and timing.

How to access the Timeline menul

In the upper-left corner of the Timeline view, click the menu

Parameter

button.

Description

ImportFrom Scanner

Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.

ImagesImports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

SoundsLets you import sound files into your project.

Cut cells from Xsheet

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy cells fromXsheetCopies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Paste Special

Lets you copy and paste selected drawings into a different layer or paste theselection in the same layer to duplicate the drawings.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease the number ofcycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse, Forward-Reverse andReverse-Forward.

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection after copying.

Edit

249

Chapter 2: Menus

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Modify Paste Presets

Lets you modify existing presets when pasting keyframes and exposures. There
are three presets you can modify: the default presets for both key frames andexposures, key frames only and exposures only.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Select Synced Layers

Selects all the layers synced to the selected layer. The selected layer must be a
synced in order for this option to be enabled.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the Timelineview.

Select Parent
Skipping Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view skipping
effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous
Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Lock

Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.

250

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.
Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.
Timeline Tag: You can tag elements in the Timeline or Node views to view only
those elements. When you tag elements, an asterisk appears beside the item in
the Timeline view. Once your elements are tagged and you have switched over toView Tagged Layers mode, the Timeline view will display only tagged elements.
The red bar on the left of the layers indicates you are in this view mode.
Tag

Timeline Untag: Untags selected layer in the Timeline view.
Timeline Untag All: Untags all tagged elements.
Timeline Untag All Others: Untags all elements except the selected one.
Mark Current Frame: Places a scene marker on the current frame on which theplayhead is parked. The marker appears in the frame counter area of the Timeline
view. You can customize the colour of the scene marker and add text to display as
a tooltip when you hover over the marker—see .

Scene Markers

Create Scene Marker: Creates a scene marker from a selected frame range in theframe counter area of the Timeline view.
Edit Scene Marker: Lets you edit an existing scene marker.
NOTE: It's important to select the entire length of the scene marker, otherwise theTimeline Scene Marker dialog box will not open for editing.
Delete Scene Marker: Removes an existing scene marker.

Share Functions

Lets you share an existing function curve. By default, all function curves can only
be used and modified using their original parameter. If you want another layer orparameter to use the same function curve, you must share it.

View

251

Chapter 2: Menus

Cycle to Next View
Mode

Displays the new view mode.

Normal View Mode

Displays the Normal view mode, the default in the Timeline view. It shows
everything connected to the chosen display. In this mode, anything notconnected to the currently set default display will not be shown in the Timeline
view. This also means that you cannot add certain elements to the Timeline view,as by default, when added they are not connected to any display or composite
node. An example of such an element is a peg.

Selection Only Mode

Displays only elements currently selected in the Camera or Node view. This makes
it easier to concentrate on one or a few elements at a time.
Lets you see only elements which have been assigned a Tagged status. An itemthat has been tagged will appear in the Timeline view with a small asterisk besideits name.

View Tagged Layers

Once your elements are tagged and you have switched over to View Tagged
Layers mode, the Timeline view will display only tagged elements. The red bar on
the left of the layers indicates you are in this view mode. While in this mode, theasterisks are not displayed beside the tagged elements.

Show Functions

Centre on Selection

Centers the Timeline view on the selected layer. This useful when you have manylayers in the Timeline view, you may find it hard to locate which one is selected.

Change Track Colour

Opens the colour picker window to modify the colour of the selected layer.

Default Track Colour

Resets the layer colour.

Collapse/Expand

Toggles between expanding and collapsing all parent layers in the Timeline view.

Collapse All

Collapses all parented layers in the Timeline view.

Expand All

Expands all parented layers in the Timeline view.

Set Tempo Marker

Lets you set a marker that synchronizes your animation with a musical score. This
lets you reproduce the FPB (Frames Per Beat) and use the tempo signature as
tempo markers. The Xsheet view lets you pace your animation according to thetempo or beat of the soundtrack music or to any rhythmic sound, such as theticking of a clock or water leaking from a spout. See .

252

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

LayersAdd Synced Drawing Layer

Creates a new drawing layer whose timing is synced immediately with thecurrently selected drawing layer.

Sync Layer With

Opens the Convert to Synced Drawing Layer dialog box. In this dialog box, every
other drawing layer in the project can be selected, parented and have its timing
synced to the currently selected layer.

Unsync Layer

Unsyncs the parent layer of a synced pairing, when the child layer is selected.

253

Chapter 2: Menus

Top View Menu
The Top View menu lets you position elements in 3D space, set parameters for animation and access animation
tools—see Top View on page 562.

How to access the Top menul

In the upper-left corner of the Top view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit

Cut Drawing Object

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy Drawing Object

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Delete Drawing
ObjectRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the Timelineview.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

254Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Select Previous
Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

View

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale, skew, etc.
of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off the Animate mode toreposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate mode is disabled,
keyframes are not created when an object's parameters change.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point

255

Chapter 2: Menus

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. With motion keyframes, Harmony generates theinterpolation between the keyframes. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the value ofthe previous keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on yourdrawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original X-axis of thelayer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you can change thevelocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion

Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging
Substitute Drawing
Previous
Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.
Substitute Drawing
Next
Select Previous
Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

256Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Select Next Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe /Point

Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.
Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of the active
tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle will bereset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation values will bereset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer. Your
keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position. Thisis useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have a particular
Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want to reset thetransformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew them.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an object up
to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element while
maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you move them257

Chapter 2: Menus

towards or away from the camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying
your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements
were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area, it will look
like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you have several
elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at adifferent location to represent the group's motion better.

258

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Xsheet View Menu
The Xsheet View menu lets you modify columns, keyframe and timing.

How to access the Xsheet menul

In the upper-left corner of the Xsheet view, click the menu

Parameter

button.

Description

File
Images: Imports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.
ImportFrom Scanner: Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.
Sounds: Lets you import sound files into your project.

Print

Prints the exposure sheet so you can take it to your animation table, provide a
copy to the animator, or create your Xsheet skeleton directly in Harmony.

Cut cells from Xsheet

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy cells fromXsheetCopies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Paste Special

Lets you copy and paste selected drawings into a different layer or paste theselection in the same layer to duplicate the drawings.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease the number ofcycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse, Forward-Reverse andReverse-Forward.

Edit

259

Chapter 2: Menus

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection after copying.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one whenmoving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Insert Mode

Adds a new value or a new value sequence over existing ones, the new values areinserted between the old ones. The existing timing sequence is pushed down thecolumn. The Insert mode opposite of the Overwrite mode, which is the Xsheet
default mode.

Gestural Drag Mode

Lets you drag a cell to any other frame in the same column or into anothercolumn.
This feature does not apply to Annotation columns.

Send to Function
View

Sends selected objects to the Function view where you can edit and adjust its
function curve and parameters.

Zoom In Xsheet

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out Xsheet

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

View

Set Tempo Marker
Collapse Selection:
Expand/Collapse
Expand Selection:

260

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Collapse All:
Expand All:

Column Properties

Lets you rename a column, and enable or disable a column. To view additional
properties, select Edit > Preferences from the top menu. In the Preferences dialog
box, select the Advanced tab, then select the Advanced Element Mode option.

Show Column List

Column Types
Manager

Lets you add advanced column types to create particular animation paths. When
you create these columns, they are not linked automatically to any particulardrawing layer. You can create a motion path using these columns and then link or
unlink several drawing or peg layers to it.

Show Thumbnails

Displays column thumbnails making it easier to identify a particular column. This
option displays a small thumbnail picture of the current frame below the column
header.

Show Selection
Set Columns Width

Lets you change the column width (in pixels) and set it as the default.

All Columns to
Default Width

Returns all columns to their default width of 100 pixels.

Change Columns
ColourLets you customize the colour of the column by selecting one from the SelectColour dialog box. The colour you select is also reflected in the correspondng
layer in the Timeline view.

Default Column
ColourRemoves the colour you assigned to a column (if any).

Hide Selected
Columns

Hides selected columns.

Unhide All Columns

Displays all columns.

Show Hidden
Columns

Displays columns that were previously hidden.

261

Chapter 2: Menus

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Columns

Add Columns

Lets you add a column. You can specify the column name, type, and set drawing
layer options in the Add Column dialog box that opens.

Delete Columns

Removes the selected column. You have the option to delete the associateddrawing files and element folders.

Clone Selected
Columns: Drawings
Only
Clone Selected
Columns: Drawings
and Timing

Duplicate Selected
Columns

Creates a copy of the selected column that is linked to the original. If a drawing is
modified in the original or cloned column, both will be updated. However, cloned
columns can have different timings.
You can clone the drawings only or both the drawings and timing.

Creates an independent copy of the selected column. This useful when you needto modify the element independently, including the timing (exposure). Changes tothe original element do not propagate to the duplicate.
There are two methods of merging drawings.
lMerge Selected
Columnsl

You can merge selected drawings in adjacent elements. The columns andlayers will be left intact, and each new merged drawing will reside in theframes of the left-most column or lower layer.
You can merge elements. All drawings will be merged. Unused columns
and layers will be deleted, but the original drawing files are still accessible.

FramesAdd Frames At Start
Adds the number of frames you specify to the end of the scene.
Add Frames At End
Add Frames Before
Selection
Adds the number of frames you specify before or after your selection.
Add Frames After
Selection

262

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Remove Selected
FramesDeletes the selected frames from your scene.

Drawings

Create Empty
Drawing

Duplicate Drawings

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets anotherdrawing, key exposure or a blank cell.
Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify anexisting drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected
cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawing thatwas on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the
project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.
The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed. The
original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is
exposed.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.
Marks selected drawings as one of the following: Key, Breakdown, In-between,
RetakeKey, RetakeBD or RetakeIB.

Mark Drawing As

This helps to keep the Xsheet well organized while animating.
When working with several animators, directors or even other studios, thenecessity for retakes will often arise. Harmony gives you the possibility to marknew drawings as either Retake Key, Retake Breakdown, or Retake In-betweens.

Substitute Drawing
Previous
Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.
Substitute Drawing
Next
Exposure

Increase

Adds Adds one more exposure to a selected cell; repeating this action adds anextra cell each time. This is an efficient way to extend a drawing's exposure and isalways set in Insert mode. Increasing an exposure pushes the existing exposure
forward.

263

Chapter 2: Menus

Decrease

Decreases exposure of a selected cell by one; repeating this action decreases one
exposure adds an extra cell each time. This is an efficient way to shorten adrawing's exposure. Decreasing an exposure pulls in the existing exposure.

Set Exposure toLets you set the exposure to 1, 2, 3 or a custom exposure.

Extend Exposure

Lets you extend the length of a selected cell.

Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Remove Key
Exposure

Removes only the key exposure (key frames) not all the exposures. The existing
key exposure is replaced by the preceding exposure.

Remove Duplicate
Key Exposure

When working with drawings to adjust the timing of a mouth in a lipsync, forexample, and forcing the use of specific key exposures, unnecessary key
exposures will be created. You can delete these duplicates without affecting therest of the drawing. The first drawing of the selection will be used for the range.

NOTE
Duplicate key exposures may occur when pasting with the Enforce Key
Exposure option selected.

Fill Empty Cells

Lets you Lets you fill empty cells to extend the exposure of single frame drawings
to fill the range of empty cells after each one.When creating drawings on cells
that are not side-by-side, the exposure of the first drawing no longer fills
automatically. You must select the frame range where you want your drawings tohold their exposure up to the next drawing and use the Fill Empty Cells command.

Insert Blank Cell

Adds Adds an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure

Removes the exposure from the selected cell.

Clear Exposure andPull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that follow it.

Fill Selection

Lets you Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection can beover one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over many columns, anentire column, or many columns. You can use numbers, words, letters, or any
alphanumeric value.

264

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Sequence Fill

Lets you Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequence canbe forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as a cycle, and so on.
The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or more or an
entire column or many entire columns.

Fill Cells Randomly

Lets you Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give a maximum
and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony to choose the random
values from. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or
more or an entire column or many entire columns.

Hold Exposure

Lets you expose a drawing for three, four, or five cells and so on.

MotionInsert Keyframe
Insert Keyframe andDuplicate Drawing
Delete Keyframes

Deletes the selected keyframes.

Go to Previous
Keyframe
Go to Next Keyframe

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. With motion keyframes, Harmony generates theinterpolation between the keyframes. This means that a value for each frame
between the keyframes is calculated by Harmony to progress from the value ofthe previous keyframe to the value of the next keyframe.

Morphing

Create Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the current
layer.

265

Chapter 2: Menus

Delete Morphing

Once a cell is selected in a morphing sequence, deletes the entire sequence
between the two keyframes.

Insert Morphing Key
Drawing

Creates a morphing keyframe from a selected morphing frame.

Convert Morphing toDrawing

Lets Lets you convert your morphing inbetweens to real drawings you can edit.
This is useful when manually editing a morphing sequence or if you prefer to haveanimation timing in double frame (on twos) instead of single frame (on ones).

Lip-Sync
Change Mouth Shapeto

Lets you change the mouth shape to one of the following: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, X.

Auto Lip-Sync
Detection

Generates a sound detection for lip-sync.

Map Lip-Sync

Automatically maps Automatically maps drawings in an element to the mouth
chart you have generated for a sound. This can save time when you are lipsynching a voice track.

Sound Display

Sound Name

Shows the name of the sound file, as well as the file format. The line running
vertically through the column frames between the same file name indicates acontinuity of the same sound file in these frames.

Mouth Shapes

Shows the letter (or name depending on the way you named your character's
different mouth positions) in the column's frames. There is only one mouth
position allotted per frame and this position should correspond to the sound fileafter performing a lip-sync.

Waveform

Shows a vertical display of the sound file's actual waveform. In the column
header, in the field under the column name, you can type in a percentage to zoom
in or zoom out on the waveform, or pass the scroll cursor
Waveformicon.

Sound Edit

266

over the Zoom

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Insert Blank Cell

Places an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure andPull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that follow it.

Annotation
Import FileLets you import an image file in an Annotation column.

Change Pen Colour

Lets you change the pen colour by selecting one from the Select Colour dialog
box.

Pen Width

Lets you select a pen preset or change the pen width (in pixels).

Eraser Width

Lets you modify the width of the Eraser tool.

Erase All

Removes all text and drawn annotations. Annotations that you type in cannot be
erased using this method.

Erase Selected
ImagesRemoves images you select in the Annotation column.

Erase Selected Texts

Removes text you select in the Annotation column.

Enable Drawing

Lets you draw in the Annotation column using your mouse or pen tablet.

267

Chapter 3: Layers

Chapter 3: Layers
In Harmony, everything that constitutes the different elements of a scene, including drawing layers, soundeffects, visual effects and pegs is represented by a layer in the Timeline view.
At the core of the rendered picture is the drawing layer, which is used to display drawings. Those layers are
rendered from bottom to top, with the bottommost layer appearing in the background, and the topmost layer
appearing in the foreground.
Some layers, such as Peg, Bone or Quadmap layers, are made to offset drawing layers. They must be created as
the parent of a drawing layer, or of a hierarchy of drawing layers, in order to transform the layers in therendered image.
Other layers, such as Blur and Transparency layers, are made to transform the picture output by drawing
layers. They must be created as children of drawing layers, or groups of drawing layers, in order to transformthe drawings.
Deformation Layers

270

Bone Layers

271

Deformation Composite Layer

273

Game Bone Layer

274

Kinematic Output Layer

276

Effect Layers

277

Blending Layer

278

Blur Layer

284

Blur-Gaussian Layer

286

Colour-Override Layer

288

Colour-Scale Layer

292

Cutter Layer

294

Glow Layer

296

Highlight Layer

300

Shadow Layer

304

Tone Layer

307

Transparency Layer

311

Image Layers

313

Colour-Card Layer

314

268

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Drawing Layer

316

Move Layers

329

Camera Layer

330

Peg Layer

331

Quadmap Layer

333

Sound Layer

336

269

Chapter 3: Layers

Deformation Layers
Deformation layers are layers that make deformers. In Harmony, deformers are made of chains of deformation
layers laid out in a hierachy. Each deformation layer represents a point in the deformation chain.
Bone Layers

271

Deformation Composite Layer

273

Game Bone Layer

274

Kinematic Output Layer

276

270

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Bone Layers
The Bone node is one of the main nodes used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone andan articulation. You can chain Bone nodes to create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool can beused to create and connect those nodes automatically.

Properties

Parameter

Descriptions

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Sideand Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone x-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

271

Chapter 3: Layers

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the resting
position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset

2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are individual one fromanother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function.

(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function to be animated over time.

Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the animation
position. This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

LengthThis is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function to be animated over time.

272

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Deformation Composite Layer
The Deformation-Composite node is automatically added to a rig when creating a split deformation chain. It is
used to link the different nodes of a split deformation chain together before deforming the drawing it is linked
to.

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no
visible effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera,
Perspective, Side and Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

273

Chapter 3: Layers

Game Bone Layer
The Bone node is one of the main node used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone andan articulation. Chaining Bone nodes will create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool can beused to create and connect those nodes automatically.

Parameter

Descriptions

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset

2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

274

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are individual from eachother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function curve.

(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

LengthThis is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function curve to be animated over time.

275

Chapter 3: Layers

Kinematic Output Layer
The Kinematic Output node lets you hook a separate element that you want to be linked to the deformation
chain but not be part of the deformation, such as a hand to an arm or an arm to the body. These elements will
follow the movement of the chain just like a regular cut-out character hierarchy piece without being influenced
by the deformation of the arm. If you don't use the Kinematic Output, the piece's pivot will not follow the
deformation.
Connect a Kinematic Output node below the deformation node you want your drawing to follow.

276

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Effect Layers
Effect layers can be connected under a layer or under a group to transform the image.
Should you need to apply the same effect to several layers combined, you must group them together sothat Harmony composes those layers into a single image before applying the effect.
Blending Layer

278

Blur Layer

284

Blur-Gaussian Layer

286

Colour-Override Layer

288

Colour-Scale Layer

292

Cutter Layer

294

Glow Layer

296

Highlight Layer

300

Shadow Layer

304

Tone Layer

307

Transparency Layer

311

277

Chapter 3: Layers

Blending Layer
T-COMP2-005-001
By default, layers are composited onto each other directly. This means that opaque pixels in front-most layers
hide pixels in layers further back, and semi-transparent pixels on front-most layers are blended with pixels
further back proportionally to their alpha ratio. This does the job for solid objects. However, some types oflayers and effects may look better when composited into the scene using more advanced approaches. The
Blending node can be used to composite an element, effect or group using one of many different algorithms
that may make it look much better in the final render.

NOTE
The effect of the Blending node is only visible when the Camera view is in Render Preview
mode.

Connection
A Blending layer can be connected under a layer, an effect or a group to affect the way it will be composited
into the scene.

Properties

278

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible effecton the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Side and Top
views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Lets you rename the node.
Choose the blending effect mode you wish to apply to your layer.

NOTE
Some of the available blending modes have a BETA or Legacy variant to them.

ll

A BETA blending mode is one that has been recently addedin Harmony and which was made to more closely resemble results
obtained in professional photo editing software such as Adobe
Photoshop.
A Legacy blending mode is a blending mode that was present inolder versions of Harmony. Starting from Harmony 10, theseblending modes were enhanced by de-multiplying colours before
compositing the image then re-multiplying them. Their legacy
version remain available to ensure scenes created in older versions ofHarmony do not render differently.

Blend Mode
l

l

l

l

l

l

Normal: Composites the image without any specific blending effect.
Add / Add Legacy: Adds the colour values of each channel in the overlay pixel
and the underlay pixel. For example, adding two dark grey pixels with a valueof 100 in each channel will result in a light grey pixel with a value of 200 ineach channel. Likewise, if one of the pixels is red and the other is green, theresulting pixel will be yellow.
Burn / BETA Colour Burn: Darkens each channel in the underlay pixel with the
darkness value of the corresponding channel in the overlay pixel, by increasing
the contrast of the underlay pixel.
Darken / BETA Darken: For each channel, uses the value that is the darkest
between the underlay pixel and the overlay pixel.
BETA Linear Burn: Darkens each channel in the underlay pixel with the
darkness value of the corresponding channel in the overlay pixel, by reducing
the brightness of the underlay pixel.
Multiply / BETA Multiply: Multiplies the value of each channel in the underlay

279

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

pixel with the value of each channel in the overlay pixel, treating those values
as ratios. Multiplying anything with black will result in black, and multiplying
anything with white will leave the colour unchanged.
ll

Dodge / BETA Colour Dodge: Lightens each channel in the underlay pixel withthe brightness value of the corresponding channel in the overlay pixel, bydecreasing the contrast of the underlay pixel.
Erase: Subtracts the overlay pixel's alpha from the underlay pixel, "cutting out"
the overlay from the underlay. The overlay pixel's colour information is
ignored.

l

l

l

l

Lighten / Lighten Legacy / BETA Lighten: For each channel, uses the valuethat is the brightest between the underlay pixel and the overlay pixel.
BETA Linear Dodge: Lightens each channel in the underlay pixel with thebrightness value of the corresponding channel in the overlay pixel, byincreasing the brightness of the underlay pixel.
Screen / BETA Screen: The reverse of multiply. Multiplies the reverse value ofeach channel in the underlay and overlay pixel, treating those values as ratios.
Multiplying anything with white will result in white, and multiplying anythingwith black will leave the colour unchanged.
Vividlight: This colour dodges overlay pixels with a value above 50% onto
underlay pixels, and colour burns overlay pixels with a value below 50% onto
underlay pixels. The brighter the overlay pixel is, the more intense the colour
dodging effect will be. The darker the overlay pixel is, the more intense thecolour burning effect will be.

l

l

l

l

Hardlight / Hardlight Legacy / BETA Hardlight: This screens overlay pixels
with a value above 50% onto underlay pixels, and multiplies overlay pixels
with a value below 50% onto underlay pixels. The brighter the overlay pixel is,
the more intense the screen effect will be. The darker the overlay pixel is, themore intense the multiplying effect will be. Blending any colour with white or
black will result in white or black, and blending a colour with plain grey will
leave the colour unchanged.
Linearlight: This linear dodges overlay pixels with a value above 50% onto
underlay pixels, and linear burns overlay pixels with a value below 50% onto
underlay pixels. The brighter the overlay pixel is, the more intense the linear
dodging effect will be. The darker the overlay pixel is, the more intense thelinear burning effect will be.
Overlay / Overlay Legacy / BETA Overlay: Like hardlight, exept it screens or
multiplies the underlay pixel over the overlay pixel, based on the value of theunderlay pixel.
Pin Light: For each channel, if the overlay pixel's value is above 50%, use thelightest pixel between the underlay and overlay pixels. If the overlay pixel's

280

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

value is below 50%, use the darkest pixel between the underlay and overlay
pixels.
llSoftlight / BETA Softlight: Each channel of the overlay pixel lightens or
darkens the corresponding channel of the underlay pixel on a softer scale. The
effect is proportional to how dark or bright the overlay pixel is, but inversely
proportional to how dark or bright the underlay pixel is.
Difference / Difference Legacy: For each channel, this takes the darkest pixel
among the overlay and underlay pixels, subtract it from the lightest pixel, andoutputs the result.

l

l

l

Divide / Divide Legacy / BETA Divide: For each channel, this divides the valueof the underlay pixel by the value overlay pixel. Both values are treated asratios, so the resulting colour is brighter. A white overlay pixel will leave theunderlay colour unaffected, and a black overlay pixel will always result inwhite.
Exclusion / BETA Exclusion: Adds the overlay and underlay pixel, thensubtracts the multiplied value of both pixels twice. This results in an effectsimilar to Difference, except that while the Difference mode producesconsistently high contrast pixels, the contrast of the resulting pixels with the
Exclusion mode is proportional to how dark or bright the overlay pixels are.
Subtract / Subtract Legacy / BETA Subtract: For each channel, subtracts thevalue of the overlay pxiel from the value of the underlay pxiel. For example, if
the underlay pixel is white, and the overlay pixel is dark gray, the resulting
pixel will be light gray. Likewise, if the underlay pixel is yellow, and the overlay
pixel is red, the resulting pixel will be green, as yellow is a mix of green andred.

lAlpha: Adds the opacity of the overlay pixel to the opacity of the underlay
pixel, ignoring the colour of the overlay pixel.

281

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

NOTES
l

l

This mode adds to the alpha of the image, but does not
modify its colours. Because colours in Harmony are premultiplied with black, adding alpha to the image without
affecting its colours is equivalent to replacing part or all of its
transparency with black.
The effect of this blending mode can only be observed in oneof the following conditions:
l

l

l

l

If the blending node is connected to a bitmap composite,which is then connected to another composite thatcombines other elements in the scene. The effect will not
be visible on elements that are connected to the same
composite as the blending node.
If you render the scene in images with an alpha channel,
then composite the rendered images in third party
software.
If you set the mode of the Camera view to Matte View.

Colour: Outputs a colour with the hue and saturation of the overlay pixel, andthe luminosity of the underlay pixel. The overlay layer can hence be used to"colourize" the underlay layer.

l

l

l

l

l

SWF Blend Mode

Hue: Outputs a colour with the luminosity and saturation of the underlay pixel
and the hue of the overlay pixel.
Invert: Inverts the underlay pixel proportionally to the alpha value of theoverlay pixel. The overlay image hence acts as a "matte" for an invert effect.
Luminosity / BETA Luminosity: Outputs a colour with the hue and saturationof the underlay pixel and the luminosity of the overlay pixel. This is the reverseof the Colour blending mode.
Replace: Ignores the underlay pixel completely, outputting the overlay pixel as
if nothing existed behind it. This applies to all overlay pixels that have an alphavalue of at least 1, so the negative space of the overlay image will not hide theunderlay image. If the overlay pixel is not fully opaque, it will be mixed withblack.
Saturation: Outputs a colour with the luminosity and hue of the underlying
colour, and the saturation of the source colour.

If you intend to export your scene in SWF format, you can use this option to choose
which blend mode to use for this effect in the exported Flash movie. Since Flash does
not support all the blending modes supported by Harmony, this is left as a separate282

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

option. You can ignore this option if you don't intend to export your scene in SWF
format.
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Normal: Composites the image without any specific blending effect.
Multiply: Multiplies the value of each channel in the underlay pixel with thevalue of each channel in the overlay pixel, treating those values as ratios.
Multiplying anything with black will result in black, and multiplying anythingwith white will leave the colour unchanged.
Screen: The reverse of multiply. Multiplies the reverse value of each channel inthe underlay and overlay pixel, treating those values as ratios. Multiplying
anything with white will result in white, and multiplying anything with black
will leave the colour unchanged.
Lighten: For each channel, uses the value that is the brightest between theunderlay pixel and the overlay pixel.
Darken: For each channel, uses the value that is the darkest between theunderlay pixel and the overlay pixel.
Difference: For each channel, this takes the darkest pixel among the overlay
and underlay pixels, subtract it from the lightest pixel, and outputs the result.
Add: Adds the colour values of each channel in the overlay pixel and theunderlay pixel. For example, adding two dark grey pixels with a value of 100 ineach channel will result in a light grey pixel with a value of 200 in eachchannel. Likewise, if one of the pixels is red and the other is green, theresulting pixel will be yellow.

l

l

l

l

Subtract: For each channel, subtracts the value of the overlay pxiel from thevalue of the underlay pxiel. For example, if the underlay pixel is white, and theoverlay pixel is dark gray, the resulting pixel will be light gray. Likewise, if theunderlay pixel is yellow, and the overlay pixel is red, the resulting pixel will begreen, as yellow is a mix of green and red.
Invert: Inverts the underlay pixel proportionally to the alpha value of theoverlay pixel. The overlay image hence acts as a "matte" for an invert effect.
Overlay:Like hardlight, exept it screens or multiplies the underlay pixel over theoverlay pixel, based on the value of the underlay pixel.
Hardlight: This screens overlay pixels with a value above 50% onto underlay
pixels, and multiplies overlay pixels with a value below 50% onto underlay
pixels. The brighter the overlay pixel is, the more intense the screen effect will
be. The darker the overlay pixel is, the more intense the multiplying effect willbe. Blending any colour with white or black will result in white or black, andblending a colour with plain grey will leave the colour unchanged.

283

Chapter 3: Layers

Blur Layer
T-HFND-010-007
The Blur effect creates an effect that softens, fogs or obscures the image evenly in all directions. This effect isuseful when you want to make cloudy images not realistically seen in detail, such as a drawing object that is
farther back or in the background of your scene, usually blurry due to the laws of atmospheric perspective.
Other uses include the general softening of objects such as snow, stars and shadows that do not naturally havea hard outline.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When this option is deselected, the effect's values284Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

remain unchanged regardless of any depth or scale changes. This option should
be deselected when multiple drawings are composited and attached to this effect.

RadiusSize of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the strength or reach of the blur.
The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position. Click the
Edit Curve button to change these values over time by adjusting the function
curve.

Quality

Select High for a slow and accurate operation or Low for a faster operation with amore raw look.

Matte

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied tothe opaque areas of the matte drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect isapplied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

285

Chapter 3: Layers

Blur-Gaussian Layer
T-COMP2-003-002
The Blur-Gaussian effect softens the image, reducing the amount of noise and detail. The look of the Gaussian
blur is smooth, but does take some rendering time. This effect is useful when rendering time is less important,and quality is more important. Also, you can use a matte with this effect to isolate areas of the image.

For detailed video tutorials and sample scenes by Adam Phillips, see:https://www.toonboom.com/resources/video-tutorials/chapter/adam-phillips-harmony-effects 
Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

286

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When this option is deselected, the effect's values
remain unchanged regardless of any depth or scale changes. This option should
be deselected when multiple drawings are composited and attached to this effect.

Repeat Edge Pixels

Makes the blur algorithm operate as if the pixel values beyond the edge of thelayer are the same as the values of the edge pixels. This keeps edges sharp,
preventing them from darkening and becoming more transparent.

BlurrinessDirectional

Blurs according to the length, width, and angle you specify. For example, if acharacter is walking east, the blur may fall to the west.

BlurrinessAmount of blur applied to the layer.

Horizontal BlurrinessLength of the blur.

Vertical Blurriness

Thickness of the blur.

Angle

The direction in which the blur is applied: sideways, up, down, 90 degrees, 45
degrees, and so on.

Bidirectional

Blurs in both horizontal and vertical directions.

Matte

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied tothe opaque areas of the matte drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect isapplied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

Precision

Blurs the image the number of times the precision indicates at different radius(between 0 and the specified radius).

287

Chapter 3: Layers

Colour-Override Layer
The Colour-Override effects processes the colours in a drawing layer. Using this effect, you can change colours
from the palette without affecting the actual palette, swap clone palettes, or even replace a specific colour zone.
The drawings in this layer must be .tvg files as the Colour-Override uses the colour palettes linked to them.

The Colour-Override effect lets you:l

Change colour values in drawings during the compositing process.

l

Use colour values from a specific colour palette in the palette list.

lEstablish the priority of override palettes in the palette list. For example, you may have different clonesof the same palette, such as a daytime and nighttime version.

lIsolate specific areas of a drawing by selecting certain colours. For example, using specific colours togenerate a matte for a glow effect.

lHide certain colours.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:288

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Interface

Palettes
The Palettes section displays the palettes in the palette list of the selected layer. You can move these palettes
into the Whole Palette Overrides section to reorder them. If you have cloned palettes, the higher one in the list
will override the others. This is useful for overriding the clone palette ordering set in the scene through theColour view.
You can load additional palettes in the palette list from either your project, by clicking on The Palettebutton, or your computer by clicking on the Browsel

The Palettebutton.

button allows you to load a palette contained within the project hierarchy (Environment,

Job, Scene and Elements).
l

The Browse

button allows you to load a palette located outside the project hierarchy, anywhere on

your system or server. If you link to a palette outside of your project, you will be prompted with thefollowing warning message:

You can hover your mouse over the palette name in any of the override sections to display the path to thepalette.

289

Chapter 3: Layers

Colours
The Colours section displays the colour swatches of the selected palette. Move a swatch into the ColourOverrides section to change its value.

Whole Palette Overrides
The Whole Palette Overrides section forces the use of a particular palette (clone palette) or palette list ordering
during the compositing process. You must drag palettes from the Palettes section to change their order.
Harmony uses the palettes in the order they appear in the palette list to find the colour values associated withthe colour IDs of each colour zone. To apply a different version of a colour palette to, for example, switch from a
day to a night palette, use the Override section to change the order of the colour palettes (you must be working
with cloned palettes).

290

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Individual Colour Overrides
When you drag a swatch from the Colours section to this section, you can override its value. The default
override mode is set to New RGBA so you can override the RGB value as well as the transparency value.
The Current column always displays the colours from the currently active palette. Selecting a clone palette in
the Palettes area will not change the colours if you haven't changed the active palette in the Whole PaletteOverrides section. The update will be done once you close and reopen the Colour Override Layer Properties
window.

291

Chapter 3: Layers

Colour-Scale Layer
The Colour-Scale effect offsets an image's colours. This effect is useful in creating ambient transitions, such as
from daytime to nighttime.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Red

The factor by which to multiply red values in the image.

292

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Green

The factor by which to multiply green values in the image.

Blue

The factor by which to multiply blue values in the image.

Alpha

The factor by which to multiply alpha values in the image.

Hue

The colour or hue to offset the image.

Saturation

The amount of colour to offset the image.
Enter the value for the colour to offset the image. The actual colour values of theimage are not changed; instead, the channels are multiplied by a selected amount.
For example:
l

Value
l

l

Invert Matte

A value of 1 does not change the colour values.
A value greater than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to 255 (orwhite).
A value less than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to zero (0 orblack).

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied tothe opaque areas of the matte drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect isapplied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

293

Chapter 3: Layers

Cutter Layer
T-HFND-010-009
The Cutter effect cuts out a portion of an image. To do this, it needs to be connected to the drawing it isintended to cut as well as to a matte layer. The cutter will take the shape of the drawing in the matte layer andcut this shape out of the drawing layer. This is especially useful if you want to make a character disappear
between a background element, or if you want to cut out a hole in the middle of a character.
Like all effects that use a matte, the Cutter's effect has an Inverted parameter, which is disabled by default.
When enabled, the Cutter will have the reverse effect: Instead of cutting the matte's shape out of the drawing,
it will cut everything outside of the matte's shape out of the drawing, leaving only the parts of the drawing thatare covered by the matte.
The Cutter effect can be used with 2D-3D integration. Rendered 2D drawings, integrated with 3D models,display soft, anti-aliased edges, even where the Cutter effect is applied.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties

294

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Sideand Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Inverted

When this option is enabled, the Cutter node will invert the matte shape to cut
the drawing. Instead of cutting the image intersecting with the matte, it will cut
any artwork outside of the matte shape.

295

Chapter 3: Layers

Glow Layer
T-HFND-010-009B
The Glow effect turns your image into a glow area with a bright soft-edged light or diffuse light region aroundan image. The Glow effect is useful for creating a shining rim around objects, such as the sun or stars. Clone yourlayer to display the original image on top of the glow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:296

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Sideand Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.
Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:l

Blur Typel

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that makeup the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the
Directional Angle and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

297

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value
goes from 0 to 360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise.
For example:

Directional Anglel0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimalvalue between 0 and 1. For example:
Directional Falloff Ratell

Invert Matte

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from theedge of the character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edgeof the image.

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied toopaque areas of the drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect is applied totransparent or empty areas of the drawing.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in thesource drawing to generate the effect.

Use Source Colour

NOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

Multiplicativemode.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the background. Thisintensifies the effect.

ColourRed

The amount of red to add to the colour in the background image.

Green

The amount of green to add to the colour in the background image.

298

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Blue

The amount of blue to add to the colour in the background image.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for theeffect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. Thisparameter can take a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully
applied. At 0, the effect is not visible.

299

Chapter 3: Layers

Highlight Layer
T-HFND-010-009C
The Highlight node allows you to brighten an image's area to simulate a light source. For this effect, you willneed to create a matte to determine the shape and position of the highlight on a separate element, so that you
can blur the edges to create a softer effect. By adjusting the Highlight properties, you can control the type andamount of blur, as well as the colour of the Highlight effect.

Connection
The Highlight effect layer must be connected as a child of the drawing layer or group which you want it toaffect, and must have a matte drawing layer or group added to its Matte attribute. The part of its parent image
that are covered by the matte drawing will have a highlight applied to it.

300Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Layer Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible effect on therendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Side and Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo a change of
depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remain unchanged regardless of depth orscale changes. It is recommended that this option be disabled when multiple drawings arecomposited and attached this effect.
Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:l

Blur Typel

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up the edge ofthe matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the Directional Angle
and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

301

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blur effect. The blurradius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value goes from 0 to360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise. For example:

Directional
Angle

l

0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimal value between 0
and 1. For example:
Directional
Falloff RatellMultiplicative

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge of thecharacter to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge of the image.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the source image. This intensifies theeffect.

ColourRed

The amount of red to add to the colour of the source image.

Green

The amount of green to add to the colour of the source image.

Blue

The amount of blue to add to the colour of the source image.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for the effect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. This parameter cantake a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully applied. At 0, the effect is not
visible.

Matte

302

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the affect is applied to opaque areas ofthe matte and transparent areas of the matte are ignored. When this option is enabled, the effectis applied to transparent areas of the matte and opaque areas of the matte are ignored.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in the matte drawing
to generate the effect.

Use Matte
ColourNOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

303

mode.

Chapter 3: Layers

Shadow Layer
With the Shadow effect, you can turn a drawing into a shadow. It doesn't matter if the drawing layer is a fully
coloured character. The Shadow effect will render it into a grey, semitransparent, slightly blurry silhouette. You
must clone your layer to see the original image displayed on top of the shadow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Sideand Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

304

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:l

Blur Typel

RadiusRadial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that makeup the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the
Directional Angle and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

Enter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value
goes from 0 to 360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise.
For example:

Directional Anglel0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimalvalue between 0 and 1. For example:
Directional Falloff Ratell

Invert Matte

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from theedge of the character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edgeof the image.

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the effect is applied toopaque areas of the drawing. When this option is enabled, the effect is applied totransparent or empty areas of the drawing.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in thesource drawing to generate the effect.

Use Source Colour

NOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

Multiplicativemode.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the background. Thisintensifies the effect.

305

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

ColourRed

The amount of red to subtract from the colour in the background image. To obtaina shadow effect, this value must be negative.

GreenThe amount of green to subtract from the colour in the background image. To
obtain a shadow effect, this value must be negative.

Blue

The amount of blue to subtract from the colour in the background image. To
obtain a shadow effect, this value must be negative.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for theeffect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. Thisparameter can take a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully
applied. At 0, the effect is not visible.

306Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Tone Layer
T-COMP2-004-004
The Tone effect allows you to add a dark-coloured region to your drawing and simulate the shaded area awayfrom a light source. To produce the tone effect, create a drawing to control where the tone will appear. The
Tone effect uses a matte to determine the shape and position of the tone on your drawing and can be blurredat the edges to create a softer effect.

Connection
The Tone effect layer must be connected as a child of the drawing layer or group which you want it to affect,
and must have a matte drawing layer or group added to its Matte attribute. The part of its parent image thatare covered by the matte drawing will have a tone applied to it.

307Chapter 3: Layers

Layer Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible effect on therendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Side and Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo a change of
depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remain unchanged regardless of depth orscale changes. It is recommended that this option be disabled when multiple drawings arecomposited and attached this effect.
Allows you to choose between the following blur types for the effect:l

Blur Typel

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up the edge ofthe matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction configured with the Directional Angle
and Directional Falloff Rate parameters.

308

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blur effect. The blurradius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you set the Blur Type to Directional, this sets the angle of the blur. The value goes from 0 to360, with 0 meaning west, and angles going counterclockwise. For example:

Directional
Angle

l

0: Blurs the image to the west.

l

90: Blurs the image to the south.

l180: Blurs the image to the east.

l

270: Blurs the image to the north.

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a decimal value between 0
and 1. For example:
Directional
Falloff RatellMultiplicative

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge of thecharacter to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge of the image.

Multiplies the colours of the effect with the colours of the source image. This intensifies theeffect.

ColourRed

The amount of red to subtract from the colour of the source image. To obtain a shadow effect,
the value must be negative.

GreenThe amount of green to subtract from the colour of the source image. To obtain a shadow effect,
the value must be negative.

Blue

The amount of blue to subtract from the colour of the source image. To obtain a shadow effect,
the value must be negative.

Alpha

The alpha value of the effect.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker dialog, in which you can visually select a colour for the effect.

Intensity

Allows you to set the factor by which to multiply the intensity of the effect. This parameter cantake a decimal value between 0 and 1. At 1, the effect is fully applied. At 0, the effect is not
visible.

309

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description

Matte

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to generate the effect. By default, the affect is applied to opaque areas ofthe matte and transparent areas of the matte are ignored. When this option is enabled, the effectis applied to transparent areas of the matte and opaque areas of the matte are ignored.
Instead of using the colour in the Colour parameters, this uses the colours in the matte drawing
to generate the effect.

Use Matte
ColourNOTE
The effect of this parameter is only visible in Render View

310

mode.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Transparency Layer
T-HFND-010-008
The Transparency effect is used to make an image partially transparent. The Transparency effect is usefulwhen fading images in and out, such as a phantom or to make something partially see-through, such as awindow.

Refer to the following example to connect this effect:

You can enter a value in the Transparency field or change the transparency value over time by linking it to afunction curve. Entering a value of 100 in the Transparency field will make the element 100% transparent, inother words, invisible. Entering a value of 0 will render the element completely opaque.
It is also possible to adjust a drawing layer's transparency directly in the Layer Properties window without
using the Transparency layer. In the layer's properties, go to the Drawing tab and adjust the Opacity
parameter. This parameter is visible in OpenGL mode.

311

Chapter 3: Layers

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

Transparency

Lets you set the opacity of an element. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 100
will make the element 100% transparent and a value of 0 will render the element
completely opaque.

312

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Image Layers
Image layers generate an image that display in your scene's render. The drawing layer, which is the main typeof layer used in Harmony, generates an image based on the drawings in its element which are exposed at thecurrent frame. The Colour-Card simply fills the render area with a solid colour.
Colour-Card Layer

314

Drawing Layer

316

313

Chapter 3: Layers

Colour-Card Layer
T-ANIMPA-012-001
The Colour Card allows you to fill the scene's background with a solid colour when there is no backgroundimage. If no drawing or colour-card is present to cover the scene's background, the scene will be rendered on apitch black canvas.

NOTE
By default, the Colour Card has a Z ordering value of 12 Backward. This puts the Colour cardbehind all elements that have a value lower than 12 Backward. Most of the time, the Colour card
will appear automatically behind all the scene elements as they are all set to 0 Backward, unless
you have changed the Z ordering of the scene components. If so, the Colour Card will be in front of
the elements that are pushed back to more than 12 fields backward.

Connection
The Colour Card does not need to be connected to anything in your scene. It simply needs to be added to it
alongside your drawing layers and groups.

Because a Colour Card has a default position on the z-axis of 12 Backward, it will appear behind all the layers inyour scene regardless of whether or not it has layers underneath it.

314

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Layer Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Allows you to enable or disable the layer. When disabled, a layer has no visible
effect on the rendered image, nor on the preview in the Camera, Perspective, Sideand Top views.

Colour Swatch

Sets the colour of the layer in the Timeline view.

Name

Allows you to enter a name for the node.

DepthThis parameter can be used to determine whether the colour card displays behindor in front of elements with the same position on the z-axis.

Offset Z

The position of the Colour Card on the Z-axis. By default, this is set to 12 B toensure the Colour Card appears behind other elements in the scene. You can set
this to 0 F to make the Colour Card respect the order of the layers in the Timelineview.

ColourThe colour and transparency of the Colour Card. You can also attach theseparameters to function columns to change their values over time.
Click the colour swatch to open the Colour Picker window and select a colour.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can specify the colour.

Invert Matte

If an image is connected to the Colour Card's matte port, by default, the colour isonly applied on the opaque areas of the matte. If this parameter is enabled, thecolour is applied to the transparent areas of the matte instead.

315

Chapter 3: Layers

Drawing Layer
The Drawing layer is at the core of a scene's structure. A drawing layer is linked to an element, which contains
a series of drawing, and its Xsheet column, which indicates when and for how long each drawing is exposed.
The layer is what connects the element and its exposure to the rendered image. It indicates the position of thedrawings relative to other elements and to the stage, as well as the drawing's connections with pegs, groups
and effects, if any.
Although drawing layers can be transformed and animated on their own, it is typical to connect them under aparent peg. This allows you to keep the position and animation information of the element in the peg, making iteasier to manipulate the exposure and the transformations separately. This is especially useful in digital cut-out
animation where manipulating and transforming layers is often the main method of simulating movement, andchanging drawings is the secondary method.

You can also connect a drawing layer as a child of another drawing layer. Just like with pegs, anytransformation done to the parent layer, whether on itself or through one of its parents, will also be applied tothe child layer.

Optionally, you can connect a matte drawing to a drawing layer. When a drawing layer has a matte drawing,
only the parts of the drawings that intersect with the opaque areas of the matte drawing will be rendered. This
allows you to accomplish the same effect as connecting the drawing layer to a cutter effect.

316

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Layer Properties
The drawing layer's properties are organized in the following tabs:lTransformation TablDrawing TablControls TablLine ThicknesslAdvanced Tab

Transformation Tab
The Transformation tab contains parameters for adjusting the position, scale, rotation, skew and pivots of anelement.

Parameter

Description

Position

3D Path: Use a 3D path to position the element. A 3D path uses a single function317

Chapter 3: Layers

to define the position on the X, Y and Z axes. This function is made of control
points linked by a curvilinear path, making the movement follow a natural curve.
The pace and ease of the movement is determined by a single velocity function.
Separate: Positions the element using separate functions for the X, Y and Z axes.
This allows to control the direction and pace of the movement across all threeaxes separately. Unless ease is applied to the axes, the trajectory of the element
will follow straight lines going between each keyframe.
Path: If the 3D Path option is selected, this field allows you to create or select the
3D Path function used to position the element.
Path (x) Axis: The position of the element on the East-West axis, in fields.
Path (y) Axis: The position of the element on the South-North axis, in fields.
Path (z) Axis: The position of the element in the Back-Front axis, in fields.
Velocity: If the 3D Path option is selected, this function is used to control thepace at which the element moves towards each control point in the 3D Pathfunction, on all three axes simultaneously.

Scale

Locked: Uses a single scale parameter to scale the element, preserving its
proportions.
Separate: Uses a separate parameter to scale the element on the X and Y axis,
allowing to stretch or squash the element.
(x) Axis: The horizontal scale factor. The default value is 1.
(y) Axis: The vertical scale factor. The default value is 1.
Scale in Fields: With this option enabled, the scale factor is based on the amountof fields in the scene. For example, to shrink one of the dimensions of an element
to half its original size, the scale factor would normally bet set to 0.5. If thisoption is enabled and the amount of fields in the scene is 12, then the scale factor
to shrink the element by half would be 6.
Ignore Parent Scaling: When this option is enabled, scaling factors applied to aparent layer will not be applied to the current layer. This can be handy in cut-out
rigs when you need to scale an arm without affecting the forearm.

RotationAngle z: The angle at which the element is rotated, based on the 360 degrees
scale. Values below 0 or above 360 degrees will cause the rotation to cycle.

Skew

Skew: The angle at which the element is skewed. This value can range from -90
to 90 degrees.

Pivot(x) Axis: The horizontal position of the pivot point of the element relative to the318Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

pivot point of the drawing, in fields.
(y) Axis: The vertical position of the pivot point of the element relative to the pivot
point of the drawing, in fields.

NOTE
These parameters can be changed visually by clicking and dragging thepivot point when using on of the tools in the Advanced Animation toolbar.

An element layer has two pivots:l

The pivot of the element, which is set by the Pivot parameters above.

l

The pivot of the currently exposed drawing, which is set using the
Drawing Pivot

tool.

This preference is used to determine what to do with the pivot point of thecurrently exposed drawing:lDrawing Pivot
lDon't Use Embedded Pivot: Ignores the pivot point of the exposeddrawing. The pivot point of the element is positioned using the Pivot
parameters above, relative to the centre of the drawing.
Apply Embedded Pivot on Parent Peg: Use the pivot point of the exposeddrawing to determine the position of the pivot point of the parent peg ofthe drawing layer. This is useful when making a character rig where eachelement has a parent peg, and those parent pegs are intended to be used
for animation. The pivot point of these parent pegs will be based on thepivot point set for the exposed drawing.

l

Apply Embedded Pivot on Drawing Layer: Use the pivot point of thedrawing to determine the pivot point of the element. This means the pivot
point is positioned using the Pivot parameters above, but relative to thepivot point of the drawing.

319

Chapter 3: Layers

TIP
The two latter options are useful when making a character rig where alayer can represent a body part from different angles. Since each angle isrepresented by a drawing, and each angle is liable to have a different
pivot point, you can set the pivot point of each angle by using the Drawing
Pivot

tool on each drawing. Then, if you want to animate the drawing

layers directly, you can set this parameter to the Apply Embedded Pivot

on Drawing Layer option, and if you want to animate using the parent
pegs of the drawing layers, you can set this parameter to the Apply
Embedded Pivot on Parent Peg option, so that these pivots are used
when animating the different parts of the rigs.

Drawing Tab
The Drawing tab contains parameters for the art layers, bitmap images and the element's matte drawing.

320Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Element Columns

Drawing Path: Displays the full path to the current drawing.
These parameters allow you to set whether each art layer in the drawing layer isenabled, and whether they should contain vector or bitmap artwork. By default,
options for the Line Art and Colour Art layers will be available. If the Enable
Overlay and Underlay Arts preference is enabled, options for the Overlay Art andUnderlay Art layers will also be available.

Art Layers

Enabled: Determines whether the art layer is displayed.
Vector: Makes the art layer enabled for vector artwork, Vector drawing tools will
be used to draw in this art layer, and vector artwork information will be preserved.
Bitmap: Makes the art layer enabled for bitmap artwork. Only bitmap-compatible
drawing tools will be enabled when drawing on this layer, and all artwork will berasterized into a bitmap image.
Colour: Determines whether or not the colours in the image is processed. If
unchecked, the image will be solid black.
Transparency: Determines whether or not the transparency in the image isprocessed. If unchecked, the image will be fully opaque.
Transparency Type: If the layer contains bitmap images with a transparency
channel, there are several approaches to rendering the image's transparency. You
may need to select the proper transparency type to make sure Harmony renders
the image as intended.
ll

Bitmap File Optionsll

Premultiplied with Black: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are
blended with black.
Premultiplied with White: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image
are blended with white.
Straight: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are left as is(unmatted).
Clamp Colour to Alpha: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are
blended with black. On import, each of the RGB channels is clamped sothat a color value never exceed the alpha value for a given pixel. When the
RGB values are multiplied with the alpha value, that is to say, if you have apixel of value R=247, G=188, B=29 and the alpha is 50% or the image has
a 50% transparency, then the actual RGB values output would be half of
the amounts listed above.

Colour Space: If the element is displaying original bitmap files that are not taggedwith their colour space information, this allows you to set the colour space in321

Chapter 3: Layers

which Harmony should render the image.
lllLinear: The default value. The linear colour space is one where theintensity of each primary is directly proportional to their value. Typically,visuals are rendered in a linear colour space until the final compositing
stage.
sRGB: The most common colour space used with computer and digital
device displays. With this colour space, the relation between the value ofeach primary and their intensity is defined by a gamma function.
Rec.709: A colour space commonly used for HD television. It is very
similar to sRGB with a slightly lower gamma curve.

Matte

Invert Matte: If a drawing, group or effect is added to the drawing's Matteattribute, the part of the drawing that intersect with the matte's opaque areas will
be cut out by default. If this parameter is enabled, the part of the drawing thatintersect with the matte's transparent areas will be cut out instead.

Controls Tab
The Controls tab contains animation control options.

Parameter

Description
Animate Using Animation Tools: By default, a drawing layer can be animateddirectly, as if it was its own peg. If you disable this option, it will only be possible
to animate the layer using its parent peg. If the layer has no parent peg, it will be
immutable.

Animation

This can be useful if you want to create cut-out character rigs that should only be
animated using pegs, which can help separate the drawing exposure from thetransformations on the drawings. If every drawing layer in a character rig has thisoption disabled, only layers that have a parent peg will be animatable, and theanimator will only be able to animate on the pegs. This also rules out thepossibility of accidentally animating an element directly and using its parent peg

322

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

concurrently.
When this option is disabled, clicking on the drawing layer in the Camera view
with the Transform tool will automatically select the layer's parent peg.
If the layer's controls are displayed, you can see its animation trajectory in the
Camera view. This is referred to as the spline. By default, the position of eachpoint in the spline is based on the element's pivot point. However, you can use
the spline offset to give it a more fitting position if desired. You can do this byusing the Spline Offset tool of the Advanced Animation toolbar, or by manuallyentering the offset values in the Spline Offset fields.
(x) Axis: The horizontal offset of the spline, in fields.
(y) Axis: The vertical offset of the spline, in fields.
Spline Offset(z) Axis: The depth offset of the spline, in fields.

TIP
To display the animation trajectory of the layer in the Camera view, selectthe layer, then do one of the following:l

In the Camera toolbar, click on Show Control.

l

From the top menu, select View > Show > Control.

lPress Shift + F11 (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + F11 (macOS).

Line Thickness
The Line Thickness tab contains options regarding the way pencil lines in the element are rendered. These
options can be very useful to enhance the quality of line art without having to work on it.

323

Chapter 3: Layers

Parameter

Description
Adjust Pencil Lines Thickness: Enables the options below to adjust the line
thickness in the rendered image.
Normal Thickness: This setting makes the line thickness adjustments take one of
two very different behaviors:llEnabled: The line thickness settings are applied to pencil lines in all art
layers in the element. This setting should be used if you want to adjust theline thickness of pencil lines.
Disabled: The line thickness settings are applied to all art, whether brushstrokes or pencil lines, in the line art layer, so that it fits the desired
thickness pattern around art in the colour art layer. This setting should be
used for drawings that have their line art on the line art layer and theircolour art on the colour art layer, which is typical of traditional andpaperless animation productions.

NOTELine Thickness

When this option is disabled, all artwork in the line art layer that
does not surround artwork in the colour art layer will be cropped
out.

Zoom Independent Thickness: Makes the thickness of pencil lines remainunchanged when the camera zooms in or zooms out.
Proportional: The factor by which to adjust line thickness. The original line
thickness in the drawing will be multiplied by this value. A value between 0 and 1
can be used to make pencil lines thinner.
Constant: The offset by which to adjust line thickness. This value will be added
to the original line thickness in the drawing. A negative number can be entered tomake pencil lines thinner.
Minimum: The minimum pencil line thickness allowed. Line thickness will not go
below this value.
Maximum: The maximum pencil line thickness allowed. Line thickness will not go
above this value. Set it to 0 to disable maximum line thickness.

Deformation

Pencil Lines Quality: The quality of the rendered pencil lines when deformed bydeformation chains. Increasing this parameter is unlikely to wield noticeable result
unless rendering in very high resolutions.
Preserve Line Thickness: If this option is checked, the thickness of pencil lines
will not be affected by deformations. Only their directions will be affected. Also, if
a pencil line is textured, it will not be stretched or squashed by deformations.

324

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
This setting must be enabled for the Pencil Lines Smoothing and Fit Error
parameters to be available.

Pencil Lines Smoothing: The smoothing factor applied to pencil lines whenrendering. This value can range from 0 to 10. The higher it is, the more corners
and points will appear smoothed out.
Fit Error: When this parameter is increased, pencil lines in the rendered image will
have less vector points and the curves between the remaining vector points will
be adjusted to fit the original shape. This setting can be increased if the amountof details and points in the pencil lines creates problems around deformation
articulations and corners. Its value can range from 1 to 100.

NOTEThe Fit Error parameter will have no effect if the Pencil Lines Smoothing
parameter is set to 0.

Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab contains options for setting the alignment of drawings, line thickness, vector render
options, and more.

Parameter

Description

Alignment

Alignment Rule: The alignment rule selections are intended to deal with drawings
that were created on paper of a different size or orientation from the defaultalignment rule (set up in the Scene Settings dialog box) or imported bitmap

325Chapter 3: Layers

images. The drawings are then scaled to match the Harmony alignment rectangle.
Note that alignment rules are not based on the camera frame, but on the scene
frame. Refer to the Fundamentals Guide to learn more about scene alignment andscene settings.
l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Left: The default alignment for drawings; aligns the drawings to the left
side of the scene’s alignment rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings tomatch their height to the alignment rectangle of the scene.
Right: Aligns the drawings to the right side of the alignment rectangle.
Harmony scales the drawings to match their height to the height of thealignment rectangle of the scene.
Top: Aligns the drawings to the top of the alignment rectangle. Harmony
scales the drawings to match their widths to the width of the alignment
rectangle of the scene.
Bottom: Aligns the drawings to the bottom of the alignment rectangle.
Harmony scales the drawings to match their widths to the width of thealignment rectangle of the scene.
Centre Fit: Centers the drawings.
Centre Fill: Centers the drawings and then scales them so the width orheight fills the available space.
Centre LR: Aligns the drawings in the left-right centre of the alignment
rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings to match their height to theheight of the alignment rectangle of the scene.

l

l

l

l

Centre TB: Aligns the drawings in the top-bottom centre of the alignment
rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings to match their widths to thewidth of the alignment rectangle of the scene.
Stretch: Scales the drawings so they fit within the alignment rectangle ofthe scene. This is particularly useful for images that you will manipulate
with a Quadmap node. If the drawings in the Quadmap node do not havethe same aspect ratio as the alignment rectangle of the scene (from the
Scene Settings dialog box), the handles on the quadmap will not appear
on the corners of the image, making it difficult to manipulate thequadmap. In this case, you would set the drawing layer of the quadmap
images to Stretch to make the handles appear on the corner of the image.
This can have the effect of distorting the images, but it is not an issue
with images that will be distorted through the Quadmap node anyways.
As Is: Leaves the drawings aligned as they are.
Centre First Page: Aligns the centre of the first part of a standard pan celwith the centre of the field chart.

Turn Before Alignment: Rotates the drawings in the selected element 90 degrees
to the left before scaling and aligning them according to the alignment rule, andbefore performing any offset, rotation or scaling for the element or peg. This and326

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

the Alignment Rule are intended for drawings that were created on paper of adifferent size or orientation than the other paper in the scene, and requiresalignment so they are treated accurately.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the drawing on the horizontal axis.
Flip Vertical: Flips the drawing on the vertical axis.
Antialiasing Quality: The smoothness (antialiasing) setting used to make the crisp
vector contours appear smooth.
lNone - No Transparency: Dsables antialiasing, renders semi-transparent
pixels either fully opaque or fully transparent, and fills single-pixel gaps
with an opaque pixel to avoid generating out-of-place gaps when lines
intersect each other.

lLow: Disables antialiasing, but renders transparency.

lMedium Low: Renders vector artwork with basic antialiasing.

llMedium: Renders vector shapes with improved antialiasing. Bitmap
texture fills will appear blurred.
High: Renders vector shapes with improved antialiasing, without blurring
bitmap texture fills.

TIP
Vector Render Options

It is recommended to leave this setting to High unless you are working ona pencil test, or another type of scene where rendering speed is more
important than rendering quality.

TIP
If the production requires exporting line art without antialiasing to colour
them in a third-party software, it is recommended to use the None - No

Transparency setting. This setting automatically fills one-pixel gaps
created by crisp lines intersecting each other, which would otherwise need
to be filled manually in the third-party software.

Antialiasing Exponent: Determines how much the artwork is scaled up to apply
antialiasing onto it. A higher value will results in sharper edges, and a lower value
will result in softer edges. Typical values range between 0 and 3. Higher values
may be attempted but may result in overly crisp outlines. Negative values willcause the outlines to appear blurry.
Texture Filter: This setting determines how textures in the element are resampledwhen rendering:327

Chapter 3: Layers

l

l

l

Miscellaneous

Bilinear: This option takes the four pixels around each point and makes abilinear interpolation between them, which may make them look blurry.
Nearest: When sampling the texture up, this option generates extra pixels
by using the colour of the nearest defined pixel. When sampling the
texture down, this option simply removes pixels from the texture.
Nearest (Filtered): This option is similar to Nearest, but it adds an extra
layer of resampling to make all pixels look like they are the same size.

Opacity: Lets you quickly change the transparency of the selected element.
Opacity settings here will be reflected in both OpenGL preview, and full render.

328

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Move Layers
Move layers are used to animate layers as well as camera motions.
Camera Layer

330

Peg Layer

331

Quadmap Layer

333

329

Chapter 3: Layers

Camera Layer
You can setup the camera position by entering coordinates and values in the Layer Properties view.

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Turns the camera layer on or off.

Change Track Colour

The Change Track Colour button lets you change the colour of the exposed
frames; this helps you to quickly locate a layer in the Timeline view. Click the
Change Track Colour button to open the Select Colour window and choose a newcolour. You can modify the colour for any type of layer, such as group, peg,
drawing, and effects.

Name

Displays the current layer name. You can rename the layer by typing in a new layer
name.

Position

Displays the current position of the camera layer using X-axis (East/West), Y-axis(North/South) and Z-axis (Forward/Backward) coordinates. To reposition yourcamera frame, type in the new values corresponding to the desired position
coordinates. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the value of eachfield.

Angle

Displays the current rotation value. To set a new rotation position, type in a new
angle value. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the new angle value.

Pivot

Displays the current position of the rotation pivot of the camera layer. The camera
will perform a rotation taking the position of the pivot as its angle centre. Bydefault, the pivot is set at the centre of the camera frame. To reposition the pivot
point, enter new X and Y coordinates values in the appropriate field. To see thepivot's position, the Rotate tool must be selected.

330Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Peg Layer
Find below a description of all the Peg node parameters.

Transformation Tab
Parameter

Description
3D Path: Use a 3D path to position the element. A 3D path uses a single function
to define the position on the X, Y and Z axes. This function is made of control
points linked by a curvilinear path, making the movement follow a natural curve.
The pace and ease of the movement is determined by a single velocity function.
Separate: Positions the element using separate functions for the X, Y and Z axes.
This allows to control the direction and pace of the movement across all threeaxes separately. Unless ease is applied to the axes, the trajectory of the element
will follow straight lines going between each keyframe.

Position

Path: If the 3D Path option is selected, this field allows you to create or select the
3D Path function used to position the element.
Path (x) Axis: The position of the element on the East-West axis, in fields.
Path (y) Axis: The position of the element on the South-North axis, in fields.
Path (z) Axis: The position of the element in the Back-Front axis, in fields.
Velocity: If the 3D Path option is selected, this function is used to control thepace at which the element moves towards each control point in the 3D Pathfunction, on all three axes simultaneously.
Locked: Uses a single scale parameter to scale the element, preserving its
proportions.
Separate: Uses a separate parameter to scale the element on the X and Y axis,
allowing to stretch or squash the element.
(x) Axis: The horizontal scale factor. The default value is 1.
(y) Axis: The vertical scale factor. The default value is 1.

Scale

Scale in Fields: With this option enabled, the scale factor is based on the amountof fields in the scene. For example, to shrink one of the dimensions of an element
to half its original size, the scale factor would normally bet set to 0.5. If thisoption is enabled and the amount of fields in the scene is 12, then the scale factor
to shrink the element by half would be 6.
Ignore Parent Scaling: When this option is enabled, any scaling value applied to aparent layer is ignored in the current layer. This can be handy in cut-out rigs when
you need to scale an arm without affecting the forearm.

331

Chapter 3: Layers

RotationAngle z: Lets you type in a degree value for the rotation angle. Note that you canenter values greater than 360 and -360 degrees. If you enter 720, the object will
rotate twice.

Skew

Skew: Lets you type in a degree value between -90 to 90 for the skew angle.

Pivot(x) Axis: The horizontal position of the pivot point of the element relative to thepivot point of the drawing, in fields.
(y) Axis: The vertical position of the pivot point of the element relative to the pivot
point of the drawing, in fields.

332

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Quadmap Layer
T-COMP2-010-001
The Quadmap transformation layer lets you deform the shape of an element. For example, you can use it tocreate a drop-shadow effect on an element.

You can edit the Quadmap visually in the Camera view.

How to edit the Quadmap in the Camera view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Add Layerbutton and select Quadmap.

2. Connect the drawing you want to deformto the Quadmap.

3. In the Tools toolbar, disable the Animate mode to change the value for the Quadmap over the entire
duration of the element.
4. In the Timeline view, click on the Quadmap layer to select it.
5. From the top menu, select View > Show > Control or pressShift + F11.
The quadmap handles appear around the element in the window. There is also a pivot point at thecentre of the quadmap frame that you can reposition.
6. In the Camera view window, use the Transform tool to move the points on the quadmap. Shift +click to select multiple points.

333Chapter 3: Layers

TIP
The position of the points can be animated. To do this, open the Quadmap layer layer properties
and create functions for each of the coordinates.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you rename the node.

2D PathChanges the X and Y values simultaneously and control the velocity of thechange.

334

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Separate

Changes the X and Y values separately. Each one can be attached to separate
function curves.

335

Chapter 3: Layers

Sound Layer
When you select a sound layer in the Timeline view, the options related to that layer appear in the Layer
Properties view.

If you double-click on a sound layer in the Timeline view, or in a sound column in the Xsheet view, the Sound
Element Editor dialog will open. This dialog allows you to fine-tune the sound track's lip sync, start time, stoptime and volume.

336

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

337

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Chapter 4: Tools Properties
Harmony has a wide variety of drawing and manipulation tools and each one of them has a series of options
and modes available in the Tool Properties view. This section covers these options.

Brush Tool Properties

340

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

360

Close Gap Tool Properties

362

Contour Editor Tool Properties

363

Cutter Tool Properties

366

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties

369

Dropper Tool Properties

371

Ellipse Tool Properties

372

Envelope Tool Properties

379

Eraser Tool Properties

382

Ink Tool Properties

398

Line Tool Properties

400

Morphing Tool Properties

408

Paint Tool Properties

412

Pencil Tool Properties

416

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

426

Perspective Tool Properties

432

Polyline Tool Properties

434

Rectangle Tool Properties

441

338

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

448

Rigging Tool Properties

450

Select Tool Properties

451

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

460

Stroke Tool Properties

462

Text Tool Properties

464

Transform Tool Properties

467

Zoom Tool Properties

470

339

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties
When you select the Brush

tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Brush Properties
The following properties affect the brush's size, smoothing and other properties for the drawing style of yourbrush. Those properties can be saved into brush presets for later use.
Icon

Property

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Preview Area

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Brush Properties
dialog.
Brush Properties Dialog

340

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of thebrush properties, a list of brush presets and other drawing options, theBrush Properties dialog gives you access to all the available options foryour brush's tip and texture. For more information on
the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Brush Properties Dialogsection
below.
Defines the maximum width of brush strokes.
Maximum Size

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of thestroke will vary between its maximum size and minimum size dependingon the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, the width of thestroke will always be its maximum size.
Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Smoothing

NOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.

Lets you set the opacity for each instance of the brush tip that gets printed
into your canvas. Contrary to the Opacity parameter, the flow parameterFlow

has a cumulative effect. This means that a lower flow will make your brushstrokes more transparent towards its extremities and more opaque in its
center. Your stroke's flow will also accumulate if you draw over it. By
default, your brush's flow varies with the amount of pressure you put on
your tablet pen.

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view whendrawing on a bitmap layer.

Opacity

The Opacity parameter are where Lets you set the opacity of your brushstrokes. Contrary to the Flow parameter, the Opacity parameter is noncumulative. Your whole brush stroke's opacity will not exceed the Opacity
parameter. By default, the Opacity parameter varies depending on theamount of pressure you put on your tablet pen.

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view whendrawing on a bitmap layer.

341

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Brush Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Description
By default, Harmony has preloaded brush presets. You can also create
your own brush presets by configuring your brush, then saving its
properties into a new preset. It is also possible to export and import brush
presets.

Presets list

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Creates a dynamic brush preset based on the selected drawing. A
dynamic brush is a drawing that you can paint or stamp.

New Dynamic BrushNOTE
You can also create a dynamic brush preset that cycles throughseveral drawings. To do this, create the drawings on several
layers, then select them all using the Select tool in the Camera
view, with the Single mode option disabled.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

342

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset. This is the default setting.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are integrated into your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork. Note that they will appear over your artwork while drawing yourstroke, until you release the brush.

Draw Behind

When enabled, your brush strokes will only repaint existing artwork andwill not add colour to empty areas. If you repaint semi-transparent
artwork, your artwork will not become more opaque than it already is.
Repaint BrushAs you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.

Automatically Create
Colour Art

NOTEThis option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.

343

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

By default, when drawing, each new stroke is created as a separate
drawing object, which can be edited independently from other parts of
the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automatically merges
strokes into existing artwork.
Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.
When drawing on a bitmap layer, artwork is always flattened.

In the Colour view, it is possible to make some of the colours in yourpalettes protected from change. When enabled, the Respect Protected
Colour option will prevent the brush tool from drawing over areas filledwith a protected colour.
Respect Protected
ColourNOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.
When drawing on a bitmap layer, colour is not linked to yourpalettes and cannot be protected.

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option can be used when painting with agradient colour to always position the gradient in the same way it was

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

stored, making it consistent across brush strokes. You can store a
gradient by selecting a zone painted with a gradient with the Select tool,
then clicking on Store Colour Gradientin the Tool Properties view.

NOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.

Brush Properties Dialog
Brushes have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Brush Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right ofthe stroke display area.

The Brush Properties dialog has five different tabs, minus the Smoothing tab if you are working on a bitmap
layers. Below is detailed information about the options available in each tab:344

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidel

Tip Tab on page 345lSmoothing Tab on page 350lTransparency Tab on page 351l

Dual Tip Tab on page 354lPaper Texture Tab on page 357

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your brush tip.

345

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Property

Description
Allows you to select between one of the following brush types:lBrush Type

Solid Vector Brush: Creates vector shapes filled with a solid colour.
Makes artwork lightweight, scalable and easy to tweak. Since this kind ofbrush can only create solid colour shapes, solid vector brushes have alimited set of options including size, roundness, angle, centerline
smoothing and contour smoothing.

346

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidel

Textured Vector Brush: Creates vector shapes filled with a texture. This
gives you access to bitmap brush tips, paper textures, transparency andseveral other options.

NOTE
This option is not available when working on a bitmap layer. With bitmap
layers, brushes are always textured, and textured brush options arealways available.

Brush Tip LibraryThis is where you select the shape of the brush tip. By default it is round. Notethat some tips are designed to have semitransparent areas, even when the
maximum brush opacity is set to 100%.
To create a custom brush tip, you must prepare the file ahead of time, either inHarmony or in a third-party software, such as Adobe Photoshop. Colour is notsupported and transparency is not supported in the traditional sense. Black
appears as 100% opaque, white appears as 100% transparent and all the shadesof grey in between appear as varying degrees of semitransparency. A range of fileformats are supported—.jpeg, .png, .tif, .psd, .tga to name a few. Alpha channels
are disregarded on import. It is recommended that your file be between 100 x
100 pixels and 400 x 400 pixels.
You can also import brush tips that you exported from Harmony, so you canshare them with colleagues.
The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick andthin effect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen
tablet.
ll

Minimum and Maximum Size

Maximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation toand as a percentage of the maximum size.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be
forcing a uniform line width using the Maximum Size value.

347

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape andorientation of the tip.
lRoundness and AnglelRoundness: Squashes the height of the tip from its centre point. 100%roundness = the native height of the tip. A smaller percentage will makethe brush tip look flatter and more narrow. The squashing is NOT relative
to the angle value—if the tip is rotated, the squashing function still uses
the brush tip's original orientation.
Angle: Rotates the brush tip counter-clockwise. 0° = the tip's nativeorientation.

The Hardness and Spacing parameters allow you to change the softness andspacing of the marks made by the brush tip. You can preview the hardness andspacing at the top of the Brush Properties window, stroke preview area.

Hardness

The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the brush tip's edges. The
lower the value, the softer the tip edge. The higher the value, the sharper the tipedge. Be aware that some brush tips are not 100% opaque, so they will always
appear somewhat soft, even at 100% hardness.

Defines the amount of space between each stamp of the brush. A value of 100%
sets the stamp marks edge to edge, if there is no white space around the shape.
The larger the value, the greater the space between marks. A really large value
can make the brush stroke appear as a string of individual marks. Conversely, asmall spacing value will give the appearance of a fluid brush stroke.
Spacing is only evident when making a continuous stroke.
Spacing348

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Randomness

The Randomness parameters let you create a varied brush stroke. Refining these
options can give your stroke a lovely, non-mechanical look.
You can create variation between the thick and thin of your brush stroke just by
setting the Maximum and Minimum Size values. If you add randomness to themix, pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Lightpressure will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure
will create random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, thelarger the range of random variation.

Random Size

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating
width variation on your stroke, whether you are applying randomness ornot. Therefore, you would be forcing a uniform line width using theMaximum Size value.

Sets the range for random rotation around the set Angle value. For example, if
the Angle is set to 45° and the Random Angle set to 10°, the software will
choose values between 40°–50° (plus or minus 5 degrees, equaling a total of 10
degrees).

Random Angle

Random Spacing

Sets the range for random spacing around the set Spacing value. For example, if
the Spacing is set to 50% and the Random Spacing is set to 10%, then Harmony

349

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

will choose values between 45%–55% (plus or minus 5 percent, equaling a totalof 10 percent).

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Harmony should automatically smooth your brushstrokes as you paint.

NOTE
The Smoothing tab is only available when working on a vector layer, as bitmap layers do notsupport smoothing.

Property

Description

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on your brush stroke's
direction, curves and corners. A higher setting will prevent your line from being
shaky, but is liable to reduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into curves.

350

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Contour Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on outer contour of thebrush stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

Transparency Tab
The Transparency tab allows you to decide if your brush has antialiasing as well as to set its flow and opacity
settings.

NOTE
The Transparency tab's options are only available on vector layers if the Brush Type option of the
Tip tab is set to Textured Vector Brush. On bitmap layers, those options are always available.

Property

Description
Enabled by default. This option causes the contours of the brush strokes toblend with the surrounding colours, to create an illusion of smoothness
otherwise not possible due to the picture resolution.

Antialiasing

If antialiasing is disabled, the brush's texture will only render fully transparent or
fully opaque pixels. Disabling this option can be useful if you need your outlines
to be very crisp, if you want to make pixel art or if you need your brush strokes torender in solid colors with no variation, which makes them easier to repaint orprocess in third party software.

NOTE
When disabled, all other options in the Transparency tab are disabled.

351

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

The Maximum and Minimum Flow parameters let you set the range for the rate at
which paint flows from your brush. The analogy works better with a pen. The
greater the flow, the more ink comes out, hence the more consistent the colour
and texture of the line. If the flow is light, then the colour and texture of the line
may look spotty. This feature works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum and Minimum Flow

Maximum Flow: Sets the maximum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke.
Minimum Flow: Sets the minimum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke. It is defined as a percentage of theMaximum Flow value. If the Minimum Flow value is set to 100%, thentablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The flow will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Flow value.

The Maximum and Minimum Opacity parameters are where you set the opacity
range for a brush mark. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum Opacity and
Minimum Opacity

Randomness

Maximum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush mark when
the pressure is heavy.
Minimum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush mark when thepressure is very light. It is defined as a percentage of the Maximum
Opacity value. If the Minimum Opacity value is set to 100%, then tablet
pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The opacity will be set tothe constant rate of the Maximum Opacity value.

Th Randomness parameter lets you set the range for the randomness of the flow
and opacity. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

352

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

You can create variation in the flow of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Flow values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure
sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create
random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random
values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger the range ofrandom variation.

Randomness Flow

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Flow value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating flow variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform flow using theMaximum Flow value.

Random Opacity

You can create variation in the opacity of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Opacity values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure
will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create
random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger therange of random variation.

353

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Opacity value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating opacity variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform opacity using
the Maximum Opacity value.

Dual Tip Tab
The Dual Tip tab lets you set the parameters for creating a dual tip brush. The primary bitmap brush tip and thedual tip always work together. You can set the parameters for the primary tip in the Tip tab and those for thedual tip in the Dual Tip tab. The Blend mode you select determines how the tips are combined.
By default, the Blend Mode is set to Multiply and the Random Angle to 360°.

354

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Dual Tip, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Dual Tip tab.
Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Brush Type option of the Tip tab must be set
to Textured Vector Brush.

Property

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your brush uses adual tip. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Dual Tip tab will bedisabled.

Blend Mode

The Blend modes let you decide how the primary tip and the dual tip are combined.

Multiply

This is the default blend mode. When the two brush tips are combined in this mode,
they essentially cut each other out in overlapping areas, where one or both tips havean area of 100% transparency. The less opaque the brush tips are, the lighter their
combination.

355

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

In this mode, the primary tip cuts out the shape of the dual tip. Where the tip shapes
overlap, within the boundaries of the primary shape, the colour and opacity appear
darker.

Colour Dodge

356

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

This mode treats the two tips as two different and separate brushes that have thesame colour and follow the same path.

CombinePaper Texture Tab
The Paper Texture tab lets you configure a paper-like texture for your brush. You can also add textures byimporting image files, or import paper textures that were previously exported from Harmony.

357

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
To use a Paper Texture, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Paper
Texture tab. Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Brush Type option of the Tip tab
must be set to Textured Vector Brush.

Property

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your brush uses apaper texture. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Paper Texture tab will
be disabled.

Texture Scale

Increase or decreases the size of the paper texture.

Additive

This option layers the texture on top of itself as you scribble overlapping lines in one
continuous stroke. If this option is turned off, areas of overlapping lines from a single,
continuous stroke will appear the same, in terms of darkness and texture, as nonoverlapping areas.

358

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

This option defines the way separate, overlapping strokes behave. If this option isenabled, the paper texture's position does not change with each sweep of the brush.
If this option is disabled, each sweep of the brush produces a different texture
position. The texture orientation always stays the same.

Aligned359

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Centerline Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Centerline Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold theAlt key to temporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold theAlt key to temporarily use Lasso mode.

When enabled, selecting several control points will make amanipulator bounding box appear. You can use this manipulator
to scale and rotate the selection of points.

Show Centerline Editor Controls

Apply to Line and Colour Art

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both the Line Art
and Colour Art layers of your drawing simultaneously.

360Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers enabled,
they will also be affected when this option is enabled.

361

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Close Gap Tool Properties
When you select the Close Gap tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Auto-Flatten Mode

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new
stroke is created as a separate drawing object, which
can be edited independently from other parts of theartwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.

362

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Contour Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Contour Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to select multiple
items by drawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt
key to temporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt
key to temporarily use Lasso mode.

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will
snap to it.
Snap to Contour

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point
to.

363

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

When enabled, selecting several control points will make a manipulator
bounding box appear. You can use this manipulator to scale and rotate
the selection of points.

Show Contour Editor
Controls

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both the Line Art andColour Art layers of your drawing simultaneously.
Apply to Line and Colour
Art

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers enabled, they will
also be affected when this option is enabled.

Operations
Icon

Property

Description
The Smooth operation lets you smooth out selected drawing strokes
and remove extra points.
l

From the top menu, select Drawing> Optimize > Smooth orpress Alt + Shift + S.

Smooth Selection

Split Pencil Line and Join
Pencil Lines

When drawing with the Polyline tool, your drawing has an even line
thickness. You can use the Pencil Editor to adjust the thickness point
by point, but if you want to adjust it quicker, you can use the Split
Pencil Line and Point Pencil Lines options to create segments and364

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

apply a pencil stencil to your drawing. Note that if you did not join the
pencil lines on your polyline stroke, the segments between the points
will act as separated segments.

365

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Cutter Tool Properties
When you select the Cutter tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to select multiple items bydrawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key totemporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to select multiple items
by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key totemporarily use Lasso mode.

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both the Line Art and Colour Art
layers of your drawing simultaneously.
Apply to Line andColour Art

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers enabled, they will also beaffected when this option is enabled.

Apply to Synced
Drawing Layers

When working on a synced layer, the tool is applied to the current layer and all
the layers that are synced to it. This option only works in the Camera view.

Use Mouse

When using the Lasso selection type, the Use Mouse Gesture option lets you

366Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

automatically delete any extra sections of line in your artwork by simply dragging
your mouse over it.

NOTE
GestureFor this operation to work, you lines CANNOT be flattened.

When using the Lasso selection type, the Use Mouse Gesture Breaker Mode
option lets you draw an invisible stroke on a pencil line to cut it in two individual
objects. Once a pencil line is cut with this option, you will be able to select thetwo portions independently with either the Cutter tool, Pencil Editor tool or
Select tool.
Use Mouse
Gesture Breaker
Mode

NOTE
This option only works with pencil lines.

If you erase the end of a pencil line or erase a pencil line through the centre, newline tips or line ends are created. Use the Tip Style option to customize the shapeof the new line tips that are created.
Tip Style

Antialiasing

When drawing on a bitmap layer, lines are no longer clean vector shapes. For theedges to be smooth, a slight amount of antialiasing is used. When using the
Cutter tool, you can cut a portion of your drawing with or without antialiasing.
By default, the option is enabled. If you want to cut your drawing using a hardedge, you can select the Antialiasing Off option.

367

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

368

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties
The Drawing Pivot tool lets you set the pivots on your character. You can set the drawing pivots on drawings
and symbols.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description
The Set the Pivot for Symbol on All Frames option isenabled by default. When you set a drawing pivot on
a symbol, all of its cells use the same drawing pivot.
This means you do not have to set a drawing pivot on
all frames. Once you set it, it is done.
If you prefer to set a different drawing pivot for aseries of cells, you can deselect the option and set
your pivots on each cell or cell range.

Setting the Drawing Pivot for Symbols on
All Frames

NOTE
If you have already set several different
pivots on your symbol's cells and selected
the Set the Pivot for Symbol on All Frames
option, once you set a new pivot on thesame symbol, all of its pivots will be reset
and will use your new pivot.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position
it on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

369

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

When you click the Reset Pivot option, the drawing
Reset Pivot

pivot of the selected drawing or symbol is reset to thecentre of the Camera view.
When you import new extra drawings, such as hands
and mouths, you can use the drawing pivot that wasset on your drawings and report them to the symbol's
cells. Use the Copy Pivot to Parent Symbol commandfor this.

NOTE

Copying Pivot on Parent Symbol

When you copy drawing pivots to the parent
symbol, there is no link between thedrawings' pivots and the symbol's pivots. If
you modify the drawing pivot later, it will
not link to the symbol. You would need toperform the operation again. If you need tomodify the symbol's pivots, you can do it
directly on the symbol's cells.

370Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Dropper Tool Properties
When you select the Dropper tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Sample All Layers

On bitmap layers, if strokes with transparency located on separated art
layers overlap, the Dropper will pick the combination of the two colours.
When disabled, the Dropper will pick the colour on the current art layer.

Do not Pick
Transparency

On bitmap layers, when enabled, the dropper will pick the colour at 100%of opacity even if the selection has some transparency.

371

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties
When you select the Ellipse tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a few
less options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the circle.

Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

372

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

l

l

l

Presets

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Brush

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Draw Behind

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork. Note that they will appear over your artwork while drawing yourstroke, until you release the brush.

373

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Use the Automatic Filling option to automatically fill your shape with theselected colour as you draw. By default, the Shape tool creates the outlineof an empty shape that you can later fill using the Paint tool. This option
is unavailable for the line tool.
Automatic Filling

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap
to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

374

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option can be used when painting with agradient colour to always position the gradient in the same way it wasstored, making it consistent across brush strokes. You can store a
gradient by selecting a zone painted with a gradient with the Select tool,
then clicking on Store Colour Gradient

Draw Circle

in the Tool Properties view.

Enable this option to draw perfect circle (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Ellipse tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Ellipse tool's lines
using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

Size and Smoothness Tab
The Size and Smoothness tab allows you to select your pencil's size, its smoothing parameters as well as theshape of its tips and corners.

375

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can376Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
In the Pencil Properties view, the Texture tab allows you to select a pencil texture from the currently selected
pencil texture palette to use with the Pencil tool. You can also add, remove or rename textures, save the current
pencil texture palette as the default one, or import the pencil texture palette into your scene.
The pencil texture palette used in the Texture tab of the Pencil Properties dialog is the one selected in the
Colour view. You can select a pencil texture palette by selecting it from the pencil texture palette list in the
Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

New Texture

Allows you to import an image file into a new pencil texture swatch in thecurrent pencil texture palette. The pencil texture's effect on your pencil line
will be based on the image's transparency channel, and will follow your377

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

pencil lines on its horizontal axis.

Delete Texture

Deletes a pencil texture swatch from the current pencil texture palette.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected pencil texture swatch in the current pencil texture
palette.

Pencil Texture List

Displays the pencil textures in the current pencil texture palette and allows
you to select one to use with the Pencil tool.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the name of the currently selectedpencil texture palette, forreference. To select a different pencil texture palette, you must select it in
the Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

378

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Envelope Tool Properties
Selecting the Envelope tool displays its properties and options in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Increase the width and height values to add morecolumns and rows to the deformation grids.

Width and Height

Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you toselect multiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

TIP

Lasso

When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you
to select multiple items by drawing a rectangle aroundthem.

Marquee379

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Lasso mode.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position
it on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

Snap to Grid

To display more controls,you can click on the Show
Advanced Controls button.

Show Advanced Controls

Allows you to perform drawing operations on boththe Line Art and Colour Art layers of your drawing
simultaneously.

Apply to Line and Colour
Art

380

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers
enabled, they will also be affected when thisoption is enabled.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counterclockwise.
You can modify the central line smoothness of yourline using this option. This parameter smooths thedeformed lines. Increasing the value will result in asmoother line with fewer control points. The more you
increase the value, the less details and curves you willget. Use the left and right arrows to increment the

Smoothvalue by one full unit. Use the Up - Down slider toquickly increment the value.

381

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Eraser Tool Properties
When you select the Eraser

tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

The Eraser tool properties are almost identical to the Brush tool properties.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Stroke Preview Area

Eraser Properties
Dialog

The arrow button right of the display area opens the Eraser Properties
dialog, which gives you access to all the parameters and options for youreraser. The Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of theeraser properties, a list of eraser presets and options for the Eraser toolthat are not related to the eraser properties. For more information on
the Eraser Properties dialog, see the Eraser Tool Properties section below.

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the eraser.

382

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of thestroke will vary between its maximum size and minimum size dependingon the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, the width of thestroke will always be its maximum size.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.
Lets you set the opacity for each instance of the eraser tip that gets erased

Flowfrom your artwork. Contrary to the Opacity parameter, the flow parameterhas a cumulative effect. This means that a lower flow will make youreraser strokes less effective towards its extremities and more effective inits center. Your stroke's flow will also accumulate if you draw over it. By
default, your eraser's flow varies with the amount of pressure you put on
your tablet pen.

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view whendrawing on a bitmap layer.

The Opacity parameter are where Lets you set the opacity of your brushstrokes. Contrary to the Flow parameter, the Opacity parameter is non-Opacity

cumulative. Your whole brush stroke's opacity will not exceed the Opacity
parameter. By default, the Opacity parameter varies depending on theamount of pressure you put on your tablet pen.

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view whendrawing on a bitmap layer.

New Eraser

Creates a new preset based on the current eraser properties.

Delete Eraser

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Eraser

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Erasers

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Erasers

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

383

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both the Line Art andColour Art layers of your drawing simultaneously.
Apply to Line andColour Art

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers enabled, they will
also be affected when this option is enabled.

If you erase the end of a pencil line or erase a pencil line through thecentre, new line tips or line ends are created. Use the Tip Style option tocustomize the shape of the new line tips that are created.
Tip Style

Apply to Synced
Drawing Layers

When working on a synced layer, the tool is applied to the current layer
and all the layers that are synced to it. This option only works in the
Camera view.

Eraser Properties Dialog
Erasers have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Eraser Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right ofthe stroke display area.

The Eraser Properties dialog has five different tabs, minus the Smoothing tab if you are working on a bitmap
layers. Below is detailed information about the options available in each tab:l

Tip Tab on page 385lSmoothing Tab on page 389

lTransparency Tab on page 390384Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidel

Dual Tip Tab on page 393lPaper Texture Tab on page 396

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your eraser tip.

Tool Name

Description
Allows you to select between one of the following eraser types:lEraser Typel

Solid Vector: Simply cuts out the eraser stroke's shape fromthe vector artwork. A solid vector eraser always completely
erase the artworks leaving hard seams.
Textured Eraser: Allows to configure the eraser with thesame options as with a textured brush. A textured eraser will
decrease the opacity of bitmap textures in textured brushstrokes if it doesn't completely erase it. If it completely
erases a brush stroke, it will cut out the erased part from thevector artwork.

385

Chapter 4: Tools PropertieslTextured, Preserve Vector: Like a Textured Eraser, exceptthat it will not cut out from the vector shapes, even if it fully
erases pixels in a textured brush stroke's texture.

NOTE
Textured erasers only work as expected on textured brushstrokes. Using a Textured eraser on a solid vector brushstroke or on a pencil line will only cut the eraser stroke's
shape out of it. If you use a Textured, Preserve Vector typeeraser on a solid vector shape or on a pencil line, the eraser
will not erase anything.

NOTE
This option is not available when working on a bitmap
layer. With bitmap layers, erasers are always textured, andtextured eraser options are always available.

This is where you select the shape of the eraser tip. By default, it isround. Note that some tips are designed to have semitransparent
areas, even when the maximum eraser opacity is set to 100%.
Eraser Tip Library

To create a custom eraser tip, you must prepare the file ahead oftime, either in Harmony or in a third-party software, such as Adobe
Photoshop. Colour is not supported and transparency is notsupported in the traditional sense. Black appears as 100% opaque,white appears as 100% transparent and all the shades of grey inbetween appear as varying degrees of semitransparency. A range offile formats are supported—.jpeg, .png, .tif, .psd, .tga to name a few.
Alpha channels are disregarded on import. It is recommended thatyour file be between 100 x 100 pixels and 400 x 400 pixels.
You can also import eraser tips that you exported from Harmony, so
you can share them with colleagues.

Minimum and Maximum Size

The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce thethick and thin effect on your stroke. This works with the pressure
sensitivity of a pen tablet.

386

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference GuidellMaximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke inrelation to and as a percentage of the maximum size.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates thepossibility of creating width variation on your stroke. In
other words, you would be forcing a uniform line width
using the Maximum Size value.

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change theshape and orientation of the tip.
lRoundness and AnglelRoundness: Squashes the height of the tip from its centre
point. 100% roundness = the native height of the tip. A
smaller percentage will make the brush tip look flatter andmore narrow. The squashing is NOT relative to the angle
value—if the tip is rotated, the squashing function still uses
the brush tip's original orientation.
Angle: Rotates the brush tip counter-clockwise. 0° = thetip's native orientation.

The Hardness and Spacing parameters allow you to change thesoftness and spacing of the marks made by the eraser tip. You canpreview the hardness and spacing at the top of the Eraser
Properties window, stroke preview area.

Hardness

Spacing

The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the eraser tip's
edges. The lower the value, the softer the tip edge. The higher thevalue, the sharper the tip edge. Be aware that some eraser tips are
not 100% opaque, so they will always appear somewhat soft, evenat 100% hardness.

Defines the amount of space between each stamp of the eraser. A

387

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

value of 100% sets the stamp marks edge to edge, if there is no
white space around the shape. The larger the value, the greater the
space between marks. A really large value can make the eraser
stroke appear as a string of individual marks. Conversely, a small
spacing value will give the appearance of a fluid brush stroke.
Spacing is only evident when making a continuous stroke.

Randomness

The Randomness parameters let you create a varied bitmap eraser
stroke. Refining these options can give your stroke a lovely, nonmechanical look.
You can create variation between the thick and thin of your eraser
stroke just by setting the Maximum and Minimum Size values. If you
add randomness to the mix, pressure sensitivity from your drawing
tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create random values
around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random
values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger
the range of random variation.

Random Size

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size to 100% eliminates thepossibility of creating width variation on your stroke,
whether you are applying randomness or not. Therefore,
you would be forcing a uniform line width using theMaximum Size value.

Random Angle

Sets the range for random rotation around the set Angle value. For

388

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

example, if the Angle is set to 45° and the Random Angle set to 10°,the software will choose values between 40°–50° (plus or minus 5
degrees, equaling a total of 10 degrees).

Sets the range for random spacing around the set Spacing value.
For example, if the Spacing is set to 50% and the Random Spacing
is set to 10%, then Harmony will choose values between 45%–55%(plus or minus 5 percent, equaling a total of 10 percent).

Random Spacing

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Harmony should automatically smooth your eraser
strokes as you paint.

389

Chapter 4: Tools PropertiesNOTE
The Smoothing tab is only available when working on a vector layer, as bitmap layers do notsupport smoothing.

Tool Name

Description

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on your eraser stroke's
direction, curves and corners. A higher setting will prevent your line from being
shaky, but is liable to reduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into curves.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Harmony should perform on outer contour of theeraser stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

Transparency Tab
The Transparency tab allows you to decide if your eraser has antialiasing as well as to set its flow and opacity
settings.

390

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
The Transparency tab's options are only available on vector layers if the Eraser Type option of the
Tip tab is set to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.. On bitmap layers, those options
are always available.

Tool Name

Description
Enabled by default. This option causes the contours of the eraser strokes toblend with the surrounding colours, to create an illusion of smoothness
otherwise not possible due to the picture resolution.

Antialiasing

If antialiasing is disabled, the eraser will either fully erase pixels or leave themintact.

NOTE
When disabled, all other options in the Transparency tab are disabled.

The Maximum and Minimum Flow parameters let you set the range for the rate at
which your eraser's effect flows. The greater the flow, the more consistent theeffect is. If the flow is light, then the effect may look spotty. This feature works
with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum and Minimum Flow

Maximum Opacity and
Minimum Opacity

Maximum Flow: Sets the maximum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke.
Minimum Flow: Sets the minimum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke. It is defined as a percentage of theMaximum Flow value. If the Minimum Flow value is set to 100%, thentablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The flow will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Flow value.

The Maximum and Minimum Opacity parameters are where you set the opacity
range for a eraser mark. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
l

Maximum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the eraser mark when
the pressure is heavy.

391

Chapter 4: Tools PropertieslRandomness

Minimum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the eraser mark when
the pressure is very light. It is defined as a percentage of the Maximum
Opacity value. If the Minimum Opacity value is set to 100%, then tablet
pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The opacity will be set tothe constant rate of the Maximum Opacity value.

Th Randomness parameter lets you set the range for the randomness of the flow
and opacity. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
You can create variation in the flow of your eraser stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Flow values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure
sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create
random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random
values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger the range ofrandom variation.

Randomness Flow

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Flow value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating flow variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform flow using theMaximum Flow value.

392Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Maximum and Minimum Opacity values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure
will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create
random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger therange of random variation.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Opacity value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating opacity variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform opacity using
the Maximum Opacity value.

Dual Tip Tab
The Dual Tip tab lets you set the parameters for creating a dual tip eraser. The primary bitmap eraser tip andthe dual tip always work together. You can set the parameters for the primary tip in the Tip tab and those forthe dual tip in the Dual Tip tab. The Blend mode you select determines how the tips are combined.
By default, the Blend Mode is set to Multiply and the Random Angle to 360°.

393

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
To use a Dual Tip, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Dual Tip tab.
Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Eraser Type option of the Tip tab must be set
to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.

Tool Name

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your eraser uses adual tip. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Dual Tip tab will bedisabled.

Blend Mode

The Blend modes let you decide how the primary tip and the dual tip are combined.

Multiply

This is the default blend mode. When the two eraser tips are combined in this mode,
they essentially cut each other out in overlapping areas, where one or both tips havean area of 100% transparency. The less opaque the eraser tips are, the lighter their
combination.

394

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

In this mode, the primary tip cuts out the shape of the dual tip. Where the tip shapes
overlap, within the boundaries of the primary shape, the colour and opacity appear
darker.

Colour Dodge

395

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

This mode treats the two tips as two different and separate erasers that have thesame colour and follow the same path.

CombinePaper Texture Tab
The Paper Texture tab lets you configure a paper-like texture for your eraser. You can also add textures byimporting image files, or import paper textures that were previously exported from Harmony.

396

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Paper Texture, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Paper
Texture tab. Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Eraser Type option of the Tip tab
must be set to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.

Tool Name

Description
The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your eraser uses a

Enable/Disable

paper texture. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Paper Texture tab will
be disabled.

Texture Scale

Increase or decreases the size of the paper texture.
This option layers the texture on top of itself as you scribble overlapping lines in one
continuous stroke. If this option is turned off, areas of overlapping lines from a single,
continuous stroke will appear the same, in terms of darkness and texture, as nonoverlapping areas.

Additive

This option defines the way separate, overlapping strokes behave. If this option isenabled, the paper texture's position does not change with each sweep of the eraser.
If this option is disabled, each sweep of the eraser produces a different texture
position. The texture orientation always stays the same.

Aligned397

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Ink Tool Properties
When you select the Ink tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Tool
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows
you to select multiple items by drawing a lasso
around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you canpress and hold the Alt key to temporarily
use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows
you to select multiple items by drawing a rectangle
around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you canpress and hold the Alt key to temporarily
use Lasso mode.

Show Inkable Lines

Highlights all pencil lines (no brush strokes) on theselected layer. Pencil line segments that are alreadyinked with the selected swatch colour from thecolour palette are also not highlighted.

Be Smart on Connecting Lines

As you hover and move the cursor acrossintersecting pencil lines, the path that you create
will be highlighted. When you click on your mouseor stylus the highlighted segments are inked. With
this option disabled, all the intersecting segmentsthat your cursor comes near will be highlighted
and become part of the selection, even if they were
not situated in the direction of the chosen path.

398

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
This option only works if the Ink tool is in
Hover mode.

Use this mode instead of the Hover Mode. In the
Hover Mode, any potentially inkable pencil line will
have its central vector line highlighted as the Inktool’s cursor hovers over it. Use Ctrl

Select Mode(Windows/Linux) or ⌘ (macOS) to toggle between
the two modes.
In the Paint tool properties, this option keeps aselection highlighted around the latest paintedzone after using the Paint, Repaint, Unpaint, orPaint Unpainted tool.

Select Newly Painted, Repainted,
and Unpainted Contours/LinesRaise

As you ink the pencil line, the segment will be
moved on top of the other intersecting strokes.
Disable this option for the line to be sent behind.
Hold down the Alt key to perform the opposite
operation as you ink.

Mitre

As you hover over two perpendicular or nearly
perpendicular segments, a highlighted path with acorner is created. Clicking on these highlighted
segments inks both segments and makes themappear as a single stroke with a corner or bend.
Options include: As Is, Round, Miter, and Bevel.

Tip StyleLets you customize the edge of the Ink tool.
Options include: Round, Flat, and Bevel.

399

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Line Tool Properties
When you select the Line tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a few
less options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the line.

Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

400

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

l

l

l

Presets

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Brush

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Draw Behind

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork. Note that they will appear over your artwork while drawing yourstroke, until you release the brush.

401

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap
to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.
Auto-Flatten Mode

402

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

When using the pencil tool, you can automatically close strokes with aninvisible stroke.

Auto-Close Gap

It is recommended to keep this option enabled when drawing with thePencil tool.
The Line Building mode is very useful when drawing long lines andcurves in small increments with pencil lines or the Line tool. As the pencil
lines are central vector lines, it may be difficult to align the line tips
perfectly to create a uniform stroke and close all gaps.
In this mode, you can draw lines in small increments and the tips are
merge into one single stroke.

Line Building Mode

NOTE
This mode only works with pencil lines or the line tool.

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option can be used when painting with agradient colour to always position the gradient in the same way it wasstored, making it consistent across brush strokes. You can store a
gradient by selecting a zone painted with a gradient with the Select tool,403

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

then clicking on Store Colour Gradientin the Tool Properties view.

Enable this option to draw perfect circle (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Draw Circle

Pencil Properties Dialog
Since the Line tool draws pencil lines, you can use the Pencil Properties dialog to customize the type of lines it
draws. To open the Pencil Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

Size and Smoothness Tab
The Size and Smoothness tab allows you to select your pencil's size, its smoothing parameters as well as theshape of its tips and corners.

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

404

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
In the Pencil Properties view, the Texture tab allows you to select a pencil texture from the currently selected
pencil texture palette to use with the Pencil tool. You can also add, remove or rename textures, save the current
pencil texture palette as the default one, or import the pencil texture palette into your scene.
The pencil texture palette used in the Texture tab of the Pencil Properties dialog is the one selected in the
Colour view. You can select a pencil texture palette by selecting it from the pencil texture palette list in the
Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

405

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Description
Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

New Texture

Allows you to import an image file into a new pencil texture swatch in thecurrent pencil texture palette. The pencil texture's effect on your pencil line
will be based on the image's transparency channel, and will follow yourpencil lines on its horizontal axis.

Delete Texture

Deletes a pencil texture swatch from the current pencil texture palette.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected pencil texture swatch in the current pencil texture
palette.

Pencil Texture List

Displays the pencil textures in the current pencil texture palette and allows
you to select one to use with the Pencil tool.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the name of the currently selectedpencil texture palette, for406

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidereference. To select a different pencil texture palette, you must select it in
the Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

407

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Morphing Tool Properties
As you create and adjust your morphing sequences, you will often use the Tool Properties view. Using this view
allows you to do things such as toggle between your key drawings, adjust the easing or select a hint type.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Hint Type drop-down menu allows you to selectthe correct hint to remedy any problem areas in yourdrawing.

Hint TypeYou can have more than one hint type in yourdrawings. You can mix all of the hint types in yourmorphing sequence.
The Hide Hints button temporarily Temporarily hides
the hint points from the key drawings. Use this option
when you have a series of hint points hiding somelines you would like to see.

Do not Pick
Transparency

408

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference GuideShow Morphing in PlaceThe Show Morphing In Place option is used withmorphing layers. Enabling this option prevents thecurrently selected morphing layer from being shownon top of the others and maintains the correct layerordering.

Suggest Hints

The Suggest Hints option is used to automatically set
Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as ahelp tool. If you're not sure where to set hints, you can
use this option. It will set the main hints which you
can then fine tune.
The Switch Between Drawings button is used totoggle Toggles between the two key drawings in yourmorphing sequence. This option is useful whilesetting hints. You can use the default keyboard
shortcut F4 to toggle between your drawings.

Switch Between
Drawings

The Flatten option is used when you have to morph asequence with a semi-transparent or transparent
colour in it.

Flatten

The Quality setting is used to make the lines of themorphed drawings smoother. Adjust this parameter
when you are doing an extreme close up of youranimation.

Quality

The Morphing Layers option is used when working
with morphing layers. You can add, remove andmanage your different morphing layers in this space.

Morphing Layers

409

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

To create new drawings, double-click on the blankarea under the From section to create the source
drawing and the To section for the destination
drawing and type a different value than the ones used
for the main layer.

Add Layer

Adds a new Morphing layer.

Delete Layer

Deletes the selected Morphing layer.

Move Up

Moves the new layer up in the stack.

Move Down

Moves the new lower up in the stack.

Indicates the start frame of the selected Morphing
layer.

Start

Indicates the end frame of the selected Morphing
layer.

Stop

The Easing option is used to adjust the starting andending velocity of your morphing sequence so thatthe motion is smooth and not mechanical.

Ease in and Ease out

You can adjust the Ease In and Ease Out value by
dragging your cursor up and down or typing a newvalue. The values go from -1.0 to 1.0.

410

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The Convert Hints option is used to switch the type ofthe selected hint points. This option is useful when
you position hints and then realize they are not theright type. You can select them and convert them tothe correct type instead of deleting them and setting
new ones.

Convert Hints

Use the Morphing tool to select the hints and thenconvert them by going to the Tool Properties view andselecting the new hint type from the Convert Hints
drop-down menu.
The Time field is used to set the timing on Appearing
Point and Vanishing Point hints. These hints are used
to set the trajectory of appearing and vanishingobjects, With the Time field, select your Appearing
Point or Vanishing Point hint and type the frame
number on which the object will start its appearing or
vanishing animation.

Time

411

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Paint Tool Properties
When you select the Paint tool, its properties and options appears in the Tools Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you toselect multiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

TIP

Lasso

When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you
to select multiple items by drawing a rectangle aroundthem.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Lasso mode.

The Paint tool has four different modes available:llPaint Modes
l

l

412

The Paint mode paints everything it touches,
including empty and filled zones.
The Paint Unpainted mode paints only empty
zones. Any line or filled zone will remainunchanged.
The Repaint mode paints everything it touches
except empty zones. Any zone that is notpainted will remain intact.
The Unpaint mode unpaints everything ittouches, including empty and filled zones.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The Paint and Remove Texture option is used when
you vectorized images as greyscale texture style. An
image vectorized as texture is a mix of bitmap filling
encapsulated in a vector-based frame. Painting a
textured zones with the Paint tool will change the tintof the textured lines. Painting the textured zones using
the Paint and Remove Texture option transforms thebitmap filling into a 100% vector based zone and fills
it with a solid colour.
Paint and Remove
Textures

The Apply to Multiple Drawings option is used for fast
painting in hand-drawn animation. When you want topaint several drawings in a same layer at once, such asa walk cycle, you can enable this option and make aselection in the Camera or Drawing view. All theclosed zones located within your Paint tool selection
are painted with the selected colour swatch.

Apply to Multiple
Drawings

You do not need to enable the Onion Skin preview to
use this option. The option will stay enabled only forthe next action. If you want to use it again, you mustclick on the Apply to Multiple Drawings button again,or press Alt + A.
The Apply to All Visible Drawings option is used to

Apply to All Visible

413

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

paint several drawings on separated layers on thecurrent frames. If you have a character broken inseveral layers, you can enable this option to paint all
your layers at once. The operation is only applied on
the current frame. This option will stay enabled only
for the next action. If you want to use it again, youmust click on the Apply to All Visible Drawings button
again.

Drawings

NOTE
This option is only available in the Camera
view and does not affect symbols.

The Respect Protected Colour option is enabled bydefault. In your Colour view, you can protect somecolour swatches to avoid repainting or unpainting thezones linked to that swatch.

Respect Protected Colour

If you disable this option the Paint tool will not follow
the protect colour rule and will repaint or unpaint theprotected colours on your drawings until you enable
the option again.
When you paint a zone with a gradient or textured
colour swatch, the gradient or texture’s position is set
relative to the size of the zone you are painting. If you
want the Paint tool to use a particular size andposition, you must first store your desired positionand size using the Select tool and then enable the UseStored Colour Gradient option in the Paint tool
properties.

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

Select Newly Painted,
Repainted, and Unpainted

414

In the Paint tool properties, this option keeps aselection highlighted around the latest painted zone

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guideafter using the Paint, Repaint, Unpaint, or Paint
Unpainted tool.

Contours/Lines

The Close Gap option has four modes available. Whenthe option is enabled, Harmony will consume moreresources while painting.

l

Close Gap

l

l

l

415

No Close Gap: The moment a zone has a gap in
it, the Paint tool will not fill the area.
Close Small Gap: If a zone has a small gap in it,
the Paint tool will fill the area. You can zoom
out to make the gap appear smaller and the
Paint tool will paint.
Close Medium Gap: If a zone has a medium gap
in it, the Paint tool will fill the area. You canzoom out to make the gap appear smaller and
the Paint tool will paint.
Close Large Gap: If a zone has a large gap in it,
the Paint tool will fill the area. You can zoom
out to make the gap appear smaller and the
Paint tool will paint.

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Pencil Tool Properties
When you select the Pencil

tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
The following properties affect the pencil's size, smoothing, shape and other properties for the drawing style ofyour pencil. Those properties can be saved into pencil presets for later use.
Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Preview Area

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties
dialog.
Pencil Properties
DialogWhile the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the416Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

pencil properties, a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, thePencil Properties dialog gives you access to all the available options foryour pencil's shape and texture. For more information on
the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Pencil Properties Dialog section
below.
Defines the maximum width of the pencil line.
Maximum Size

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of thestroke will vary between its maximum size and minimum size dependingon the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, the width of thestroke will always be its maximum size.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Presets list

Harmony provides a variety of pencil presets and thickness stencils andalso lets you create and save your own. It is a good idea to create andsave pencils with precise sizes and parameters when you draw anddesign for efficiency and consistency.
A thickness stencil saves the thickness information across the length ofthe line. When drawing with a thickness stencil, the pressure sensitivity

417

Chapter 4: Tools Propertiesof the tablet is discarded. A thickness stencil can be used while drawing,or applied afterwards.
You also have the possibility to apply different textures to your lines byeither using the default presets or importing your own.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Delete Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Presets Menu

Gives access to more options for managing presets.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset. This is the default setting.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are integrated into your artwork.
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork. Note that they will appear over your artwork while drawing yourstroke, until you release the brush.
Draw Behind418

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected Paint colour.

Auto Fill

TIP
By default the pencil line and its fill will be the same colour. If
you want to select different colours for the pencil line and its fill,
you can click on the Unlock Three Colours

button in the

Colour view, then select different colours for Brush strokes, Pencil lines

and Paint fills.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.
Trim Extra Lines

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.

Align Handles After
Trim

Automatically Create
Colour Art

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.

419

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

When using the pencil tool, you can automatically close strokes with aninvisible stroke.

Auto-Close Gap

It is recommended to keep this option enabled when drawing with thePencil tool.

Line Building Mode

The Line Building mode is very useful when drawing long lines andcurves in small increments with pencil lines or the Line tool. As the pencil
lines are central vector lines, it may be difficult to align the line tips
perfectly to create a uniform stroke and close all gaps.
In this mode, you can draw lines in small increments and the tips are
merge into one single stroke.

420Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
This mode only works with pencil lines or the line tool.

The Auto Adjust Thickness tool is useful when you want to render aportion of a line thicker. When tracing a drawing on paper, you will often
go back to a section of a curve to make it thicker to add dynamism to theline. Using the Auto Adjust Thickness tool, you can draw highlightstrokes over the section to make thicker. Once you release the pen or
mouse, the line becomes thicker following the shape and curve of theoriginal stroke. This way is much faster and smoother than using thePencil Editor tool. You do not have to add extra points and adjust theposition and Bezier handles.
Auto Adjust Thickness

The default overlay colour is light yellow. If this colour is difficult to see
because of the background or drawing colour, you can adjust the colour.

Line Pushing Mode

The Line Pushing Mode option lets you draw highlight strokes overexisting pencil lines. You can reshape the curves. Depending how you
draw the pushing stroke over your line, the highlighted section will bereshaped in one direction or the other.
The default overlay colour is light yellow. If this colour is difficult to see
because of the background or drawing colour, you can adjust the colour.

ColourYou can change the colour of the temporary strokes that appear in thedrawing space when using the Line Pushing Mode or the Auto Adjust

421

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Thickness option by clicking on the Colour swatch and selecting a newcolour in the Colour Picker dialog.

Pencil Properties Dialog
Pencils have extra parameters which are not accessible from the Tool Properties view. To open the Pencil
Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

Size and Smoothness Tab
The Size and Smoothness tab allows you to select your pencil's size, its smoothing parameters as well as theshape of its tips and corners.

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will be422Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

ignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
In the Pencil Properties view, the Texture tab allows you to select a pencil texture from the currently selected
pencil texture palette to use with the Pencil tool. You can also add, remove or rename textures, save the current
pencil texture palette as the default one, or import the pencil texture palette into your scene.
The pencil texture palette used in the Texture tab of the Pencil Properties dialog is the one selected in the
Colour view. You can select a pencil texture palette by selecting it from the pencil texture palette list in the
Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

423

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Description
Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

New Texture

Allows you to import an image file into a new pencil texture swatch in thecurrent pencil texture palette. The pencil texture's effect on your pencil line
will be based on the image's transparency channel, and will follow yourpencil lines on its horizontal axis.

Delete Texture

Deletes a pencil texture swatch from the current pencil texture palette.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected pencil texture swatch in the current pencil texture
palette.

Pencil Texture List

Displays the pencil textures in the current pencil texture palette and allows
you to select one to use with the Pencil tool.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the name of the currently selectedpencil texture palette, for424

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidereference. To select a different pencil texture palette, you must select it in
the Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

425

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Pencil Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Pencil Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

426Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

427

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to select multiple
items by drawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key
to temporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to select multiple
items by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt key
to temporarily use Lasso mode.

Defines the maximum width of the pencil line.
Maximum Size

If the pencil line has a constant size, this will define the width of thepencil line all over. If the pencil line has a varying size, this will define thewidth of its larger areas. Areas that are in-between the maximum andminimum size will be resized proportionally.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum width of the pencil line. If the pencil line has avarying size, this will define the width of its smaller areas. Areas that are
in-betwen the maximum and minimum size will be resized proportionally.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

428

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Harmony provides a variety of pencil presets and thickness stencils andalso lets you create and save your own. It is a good idea to create andsave pencils with precise sizes and parameters when you draw anddesign for efficiency and consistency.

Presets

A thickness stencil saves the thickness information across the length ofthe line. When drawing with a thickness stencil, the pressure sensitivityof the tablet is discarded. A thickness stencil can be used while drawing,or applied afterwards.
You also have the possibility to apply different textures to your lines byeither using the default presets or importing your own.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset from the selected pencil line.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you

429Chapter 4: Tools Properties

create and save your own.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use theColour View menu to assign a new palette.
The Smooth operation lets you smooth out selected drawing strokes andremove extra points.
l

From the top menu, select Drawing> Optimize > Smooth or press
Alt + Shift + S.

Smooth Selection

The Pump Pencil Pressure option is used to increase the line thickness ofa selected area on a pencil line.

Pump Pencil Pressure

The Deflate Pencil Pressure option is used to decrease the line thicknessof a selected area on a pencil line.

Deflate Pencil Pressure

Merge Pencil Lines

Pencil lines are central vector lines and it might be difficult to match
pencil line’s tips properly to align them and make it look like it is one430Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidesingle line. With the Select tool, you can select several pencil lines andmerge them as one single object using the Merge Pencil Lines option. The
ends of your lines are adjusted to form one single line.

The Reverse Pencil Thickness option inverts the thick and thin section ona selected pencil line. This option will take the thickest size on the line
and apply it to the thinnest, and it will apply the thinnest to the thickest.

Reverse Pencil Thickness431

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Perspective Tool Properties
Selecting the Perspective tool displays its properties and options in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Selection Tool Options
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you toselect multiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

TIP

Lasso

When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you
to select multiple items by drawing a rectangle aroundthem.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Lasso mode.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position
it on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled432

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

grid.

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both theLine Art and Colour Art layers of your drawing
simultaneously.
Apply to Line and Colour
Art

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers
enabled, they will also be affected when thisoption is enabled.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counterclockwise.

433

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Polyline Tool Properties
When you select the Polyline tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.
NOTE
Like other shape tools, the Polyline tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar tothe ones of the Pencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.

Pencil Properties
Icon

Property

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Preview Area

Pencil Properties
Dialog

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties
dialog.

434

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to the pencil size, alist of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties
dialog gives you access to all the available options for your pencil's shapeand texture. For more information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the
Polyline Tool Properties section below.
Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.

Pencil Presets
Icon

Property

Description

Presets list

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Delete Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Presets Menu

Gives access to more options for managing presets.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and a435

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

preview of their tip.

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset. This is the default setting.

Drawing Options
Icon

Property

Description

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap
to it.
When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected Paint colour.

Auto Fill

TIP
By default the pencil line and its fill will be the same colour. If
you want to select different colours for the pencil line and its fill,
you can click on the Unlock Three Colours

button in the

Colour view, then select different colours for Brush strokes, Pencil lines

and Paint fills.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.
Trim Extra Lines

Align Handles After
Trim

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.

436

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Polyline tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Polyline tool'slines using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

437

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Size and Smoothness Tab
The Size and Smoothness tab allows you to select your pencil's size, its smoothing parameters as well as theshape of its tips and corners.

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.

438

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidell

End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
In the Pencil Properties view, the Texture tab allows you to select a pencil texture from the currently selected
pencil texture palette to use with the Pencil tool. You can also add, remove or rename textures, save the current
pencil texture palette as the default one, or import the pencil texture palette into your scene.
The pencil texture palette used in the Texture tab of the Pencil Properties dialog is the one selected in the
Colour view. You can select a pencil texture palette by selecting it from the pencil texture palette list in the
Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

439

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

New Texture

Allows you to import an image file into a new pencil texture swatch in thecurrent pencil texture palette. The pencil texture's effect on your pencil line
will be based on the image's transparency channel, and will follow yourpencil lines on its horizontal axis.

Delete Texture

Deletes a pencil texture swatch from the current pencil texture palette.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected pencil texture swatch in the current pencil texture
palette.

Pencil Texture List

Displays the pencil textures in the current pencil texture palette and allows
you to select one to use with the Pencil tool.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the name of the currently selectedpencil texture palette, forreference. To select a different pencil texture palette, you must select it in
the Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

440

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Rectangle Tool Properties
When you select the Rectangle tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a
few less options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the rectangle.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip

441

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
ll

End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
Presets

and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Brush

Creates a new preset based on the current brush properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Harmony.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork. Note that they will appear over your artwork while drawing yourstroke, until you release the brush.
Draw Behind

Automatic Filling

Use the Automatic Filling option to automatically fill your shape with theselected colour as you draw. By default, the Shape tool creates the outlineof an empty shape that you can later fill using the Paint tool. This option
is unavailable for the line tool.

442

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap
to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.
Auto-Flatten Mode

443

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option can be used when painting with agradient colour to always position the gradient in the same way it wasstored, making it consistent across brush strokes. You can store a
gradient by selecting a zone painted with a gradient with the Select tool,
then clicking on Store Colour Gradient

Draw Squarein the Tool Properties view.

Enable this option to draw perfect square (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Rectangle tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Rectangle tool'slines using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

Size and Smoothness Tab
The Size and Smoothness tab allows you to select your pencil's size, its smoothing parameters as well as theshape of its tips and corners.

444

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
In the Pencil Properties view, the Texture tab allows you to select a pencil texture from the currently selected
pencil texture palette to use with the Pencil tool. You can also add, remove or rename textures, save the current
pencil texture palette as the default one, or import the pencil texture palette into your scene.
The pencil texture palette used in the Texture tab of the Pencil Properties dialog is the one selected in the
Colour view. You can select a pencil texture palette by selecting it from the pencil texture palette list in the
Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

445

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Use as Default Pencil
Texture Palette

Description
Sets the currently selected pencil texture palette as the default pencil
texture palette in your user preferences. The default pencil texture paletteis added to every scene you create in Harmony. The palette is copied inyour preferences, so it will be added to your new scenes in the exact state
it is when you make it the default pencil texture palette.

Reload Default Texture
PaletteImports the default pencil texture palette as a new pencil texture palette
into your scene's palette list, and selects it as the current pencil texture
palette.

New Texture

Allows you to import an image file into a new pencil texture swatch in thecurrent pencil texture palette. The pencil texture's effect on your pencil line
will be based on the image's transparency channel, and will follow yourpencil lines on its horizontal axis.

Delete Texture

Deletes a pencil texture swatch from the current pencil texture palette.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected pencil texture swatch in the current pencil texture
palette.

Pencil Texture List

Displays the pencil textures in the current pencil texture palette and allows
you to select one to use with the Pencil tool.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the name of the currently selectedpencil texture palette, for446

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidereference. To select a different pencil texture palette, you must select it in
the Colour view—see Colour View on page 518.

447

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties
When you use the Reposition All Drawings tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

OptionDescription
When working on a synced layer, the tool isapplied to the current layer and all the layersthat are synced to it. This option only works in
the Camera view.

Apply to Synced Drawing Layers

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees
clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees
counter-clockwise.
Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields
to enter specific values and precisely
reposition the selected shape.

Offset X and Y

448

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

1. X: Type a value in this field toreposition your selection along the Xaxis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field toreposition your selection along the Yaxis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in the
X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields toenter specific values to resize the selectedshape with precision.

1. Width: Type a value in this field toresize the width of your selection.

Width and Height

2. Height: Type a value in this field toresize the height of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in the
Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or
unlock the ratio between the Widthand Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specificvalues and accurately rotate the selectedshape.

Angle

1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field
to rotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in theAngle value field.

449

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Rigging Tool Properties
In the Tool Properties view, you can customize not only the behaviour of the tool but also the settings of thedeformers that you will create.

Mode
Name

ButtonDescription

Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Bone deformers.

Game Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Game Bone deformers.

Options
Parameter

ButtonShow All Manipulators(Show All Controls)

Description
Lets you immediately see the resting position in red (Setup) andthe animated position in green.

Operations
Name
Reset Deform (Reset
Current Keyframe)

ButtonDescription
Copies the resting position of the deformation skeleton to
the current frame.

450Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Select Tool Properties
When you use the Select tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Tool Name

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you toselect multiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

TIP

Lasso

When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you
to select multiple items by drawing a rectangle aroundthem.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press
and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
Lasso mode.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position
it on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you

451

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

Snap to Grid

Lets you select all the zones and lines in your drawing
painted with the same colour swatch.

Select by Colour
In the Camera or Drawing view, click on any zone orline in your drawing. All zones and lines of the same
colour are selected. Click the Select tool again to returnto the regular Select mode.

NOTE
Only the zones painted with the SAME
colour swatch will be selected. If anotherzone is coloured with the exact same RGB
value (same colour), but not painted with thesame colour swatch, it will not be selected.

Lets you maintain a selection over multiple drawings.
Once this option is enabled, the selection zone madeusing the Select tool will remain as you navigate
through drawings of the same layer and drawings

Permanent Selection

452

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

from other drawing layers. This option can be used tosimultaneously delete artwork inside or outside of theselection on several drawings when combined with
the Apply to Multiple Drawings option.

The Apply to Multiple Drawings option is used toperform an action on all the drawings contained in alayer. With the Select tool, this option can be used to
select and remove vector shapes on all the drawings
contained in a layer. To use it, activate Permanent
Selection option and make a selection that can beapplied to all your drawings. Then, activate the Apply
to Multiple Drawings option and press delete. This will
delete all the shapes that would have been selected by
the permanent selection on every drawing in the layer.
This can be used for example to remove dirt andregistration on the same areas of all the drawings
simultaneously on a layer.
Apply to Multiple Drawings

The Apply to Multiple Drawings option disables itself
after each action.

Allows you to perform drawing operations on both theLine Art and Colour Art layers of your drawing
simultaneously.

Apply to Line and Colour Art

453

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers
enabled, they will also be affected when thisoption is enabled.

When working on a synced layer, the tool is applied tothe current layer and all the layers that are synced to it.
This option only works in the Camera view.

Apply to Synced Drawing Layers

By default, when you draw a selection box in the
Camera view, the Select tool will select only thedrawing strokes of the current drawing. If you prefer
the Select tool to select all the strokes on all layers,
you can disable the Works on Single Drawing option
in the Tool Properties view or disable the Select tool
Works on Single Drawing preference. To do this, go to
the top menu, select Edit > Preferences > Camera(Windows/Linux) or Harmony Advanced >Preferences > Camera (macOS) and uncheck the
Select tool Works on Single Drawing option.

Works on Single Drawing

Operations
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-454

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

clockwise.
Smooth out selected drawing strokes and remove
extra points.
SmoothMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into asingle layer. If you draw new lines to fix a drawing orline with many brush strokes, it can be useful to flatten
them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn
one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint thelines or modify their shape, it will be easier if they areflattened.
FlattenLets you use the outline you traced on one of the four
embedded layers (line art, colour art, overlay, underlay)
and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings on
separate layers. This provides more inking andpainting flexibility.

Create Colour Art fromLine Art

You can also configure this option to create theinvisible strokes on any of the four embedded layers.
The Distribute to Layers option is used to separate theselected art strokes and send them to new drawing
layers. In the Camera view, once you have drawn yourartwork, you can select the strokes you want to
distribute using the Select tool and click on theDistribute to Layers button; you can also selectDrawing > Distribute to Layers. It will automaticallytake every stroke from the drawing selection made in
the Camera view and separate them into a different
layer for each. If an artwork is composed of several

Distribute to Layers

455

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

strokes, you must group them using Edit > Group >Group before using the Distribute to Layers option.
This option cannot be done from the Drawing view.
Use the Store Colour Gradient operation to record theselected gradient’s position. This reuses the storedposition of the gradient when drawing new brushlines or painting colour zones. Enable the Use Stored

Store Colour Gradient

Colour Gradientoption in the Paint or Brush Tool

Properties view to do this.
Converts the selected centre line pencil strokes into
contour strokes brush lines.

Pencil to Brush

Pencil lines are central vector lines and it might bedifficult to match pencil line’s tips properly to alignthem and make it look like it is one single line. With
the Select tool, you can select several pencil lines andmerge them as one single object using the Merge
Pencil Lines option. The ends of your lines areadjusted to form one single line.

Merge Pencil Lines

NOTE
Points must be close enough to be merged. If
there is a large gap between the lines, they
will not be merged.

The Reverse Pencil Thickness option inverts the thickand thin section on a selected pencil line. This option
will take the thickest size on the line and apply it to the

Reverse Pencil Thickness456

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidethinnest, and it will apply the thinnest to the thickest.

Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter
specific values and precisely reposition the selectedshape.

Offset X and Y

1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition yourselection along the X-axis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition yourselection along the Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to modify the value in the X or Y value
field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter
specific values to resize the selected shape with
precision.

Width and Height
1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize thewidth of your selection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize theheight of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to modify the value in the Width or
Height fields.

457

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock
the ratio between the Width and Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values
and accurately rotate the selected shape.

Angle

1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field torotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to modify the value in the Angle value
field.
When you select a pencil line with the Select tool,
additional options appear in the Tool Properties view.
Use the Adjusting the Pencil Line Thickness operation
field to resize the selected centreline strokes. This
operation is not permitted on contour line shapes,
such as brush strokes or shape fills.

Adjusting the Pencil Line
Thickness
1. Minimum Size: Type a value in this field to set
the minimum thickness of the selected
centreline stroke.
2. Maximum Size: Type a value in this field to set
the maximum thickness of the selected
centreline stroke.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to modify the value contained in the
Thickness value field.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil
line.
Pencil Line Shape458

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip,which is the first tip you drew. You can choose
between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip,which is the last tip you drew. You can choose
between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints
are where the line curves abruptly. You could
also define the Join style as the corner style.
You can choose between Round, Mitre andBevel style.

Gives you the flexibility to change the style andthickness of your pencil lines even after they are
drawn. You can apply preset pencil stencils or create
your own.

Pencil Stencils

Pencil lines support texture. Once a pencil line isdrawn, you can apply a preset texture or load yourown. Textures are independent from pencil stencils.

Adding Texture to a
Pencil Line

When you select text with the Select tool, the tool
properties will display the Text tool options on thebottom of the view. You can also press Alt + 9 todisplay only the Text properties in the Tool Properties
view—see Text Tool Properties on page 464.
Adjusting the Text
Selection459

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Smooth Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Smooth Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Smoothing Style options allow you to smooth aportion of your drawing by tracing a smoothing strokeover the zone to optimize or by selecting an area ofthe drawing with the Marquee or Lasso.
Note that by default, the Smooth Editor tool colour isyellow, it was changed to orange for screen grab
clarity.

Smoothing Style

The Show Control Points option allows you to showor hide the Bezier points around lines. When the
Bezier points are displayed, you can see the result ofyour smoothing and the number of points left on the
curve. When it is turned off, only the original artwork
is displayed.

Show Control Points

This is where you set the minimum and maximum
sizes of your drawing tool which will produce thethick and thin effect on your stroke. This works withthe pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

Minimum Size andMaximum Size

This options is available while using the Brush
Smoothing460

style.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference GuidellMaximum and Minimum Size: Defines the
maximum and minimum width of the stroke.
Up/Down arrows: Use the up and downarrows to set the minimum and maximum sizevalue.

The Smoothness impacts the strength of thesmoothing result. The higher the value, the morepoints are removed and the smoother the curve. The
Smoothness range is from 0 to 100; the default value
is 20.

Smoothness

You can modify the colour of the control points
displayed on the artwork while working with the
Smooth Editor tool by double-clicking on the colour
swatch.

Colour461

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Stroke Tool Properties
When you select the Stroke tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Draw Stroke as
Straight Lines

Enable the Draw Stroke as Straight Lines option if you want the new strokes
you draw to be a perfect straight line. Disable the option if you want thestroke to follow the mouse gesture.

Connect Line Ends

Enable the Connect Line Ends option if you want the start or end point of
your new stroke to connect to your existing strokes to make sure no gaps areleft in your drawing.
When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected Paint colour.

Auto Fill

TIP
By default the pencil line and its fill will be the same colour. If you
want to select different colours for the pencil line and its fill, you canclick on the Unlock Three Colours

button in the Colour view, thenselect different colours for Brush strokes
Paint fills

Trim Extra Lines, Pencil lines

and.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.

462

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to make thepoint where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth curve
rather than a hard corner.

Align Handles After
Trim

Auto-Flatten Mode

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created as aseparate drawing object, which can be edited independently from other partsof the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automatically merges
strokes into existing artwork.
Allows you to perform drawing operations on both the Line Art and Colour
Art layers of your drawing simultaneously.

Apply to Line andColour Art

NOTE
If you have Overlay and Underlay Art layers enabled, they will also
be affected when this option is enabled.

Apply to Synced
Drawing Layers

When working on a synced layer, the tool is applied to the current layer andall the layers that are synced to it. This option only works in the Camera view.

Smoothness

You can modify the central line smoothness of your line using this option.
This parameter smooths the initial movement of your line. Increasing thevalue will result in a smoother line with fewer control points. Use the left andright arrows to increment the value by one full unit. Use the Up - Down slider
to quickly increment the value.

463

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Text Tool Properties
Use the Text tool's properties to select the font type and other formatting options you want to apply to thetext.
If you already wrote your text, you must first use the Text tool and select the text portion you want to format.
You can modify the parameters of an entire text box using the Select tool.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Use the Font drop-down menu to select a font. OTF fonts are supported.

Font TypeUse this option to bold your text selection.
Bold

Use this option to italicize your text selection.
ItalicLeft Alignment

Use this option to left align the paragraph.

464

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Use this option to center align the paragraph.

Centered
Alignment

Use this option to right align the paragraph.

Right Alignment

Use this option to justify align the paragraph.

Justified
Alignment

Enter a size for the text.
Font Size

Kerning

Use the kerning field to modify the spacing between letters and characters. You

465

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

can select the Auto Kern option to set the kerning automatically based on the
font’s predefined standard. A negative value decreases spacing between eachcharacter, creating a letter overlap and a positive value increases it.

Enter a value in the Indent field to increase or decrease the indentation on the firstline of your text. A positive value sets the first line of your paragraph farther to theright and a negative value sets it farther to the left.
IndentEnter a value in the Line Spacing field to decrease or increase the space between
each line of text.

Line Spacing466

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Transform Tool Properties
When selecting the Transform tool, several options are available in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a lasso around them.

Lasso

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt
key to temporarily use Marquee mode.

Sets the selection mode to Marquee, which allows you to selectmultiple items by drawing a rectangle around them.
Marquee

TIP
When this option is enabled, you can press and hold the Alt
key to temporarily use Lasso mode.

Peg Selection ModeIn the Camera view, the Peg Selection Mode limits the selection topeg layers instead of drawing layers. This mode is useful when you
have created a character rig using peg layers for each drawing. Thatway, you do not accidentally select the drawing layer when you
want to animate on the peg.
When disabled, the Transform tool selects the drawing layers.

Control Selection Mode

When enabled, it is possible to select one or several controls
displayed in the Camera by drawing a lasso/marquee around them.
By default, drawing a lasso or marquee with the Transform tool467

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

selects layers.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor
point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

Hide Manipulator Controls

The Hide Manipulator Controls button lets you hide the boundingbox and manipulator controls from the Camera view when anelement is selected.
Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Horizontal

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Horizontal from the top
menu or press 4 or 5.
Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip Vertical

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Vertical from the top
menu or press 4 or 5.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter specificvalues and precisely reposition the selected shape.
Offset X ad Y
1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along
the X-axis.

468

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along
the Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify
the value in the X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter specific values
to resize the selected shape with precision.

Width and Height

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width of yourselection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height of yourselection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify
the value in the Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock the ratio
between the Width and Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values and accurately
rotate the selected shape.

Angle

1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field to rotate yourselection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify
the value in the Angle value field.

469

Chapter 4: Tools Properties

Zoom Tool Properties
When you select the Zoom tool, its properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Parameter

Description

Zoom In ModeUse the mouse cursor to zoom in to the Camera or Drawing view.

Zoom OutMode

Use the mouse cursor to zoom out of the Camera or Drawing view.

Operations
Icon

Parameter

Description

Perform Zoom
In

Zoom in the Camera or Drawing view.

Perform Zoom
Out

Zoom out the Camera or Drawing view.

Reset Zoom

Restores the current zoom level to 100%.

Reset View

Restores the original display by resetting any pan, rotation or zoom actions.

The keyboard shortcut is 2.

The keyboard shortcut is 1.

470

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

471

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Chapter 5: Toolbars
Harmony contains toolbars which, by default, are located at the top of the interface. Some views also have a
toolbar which you can reposition to suit your work style. You can show or hide toolbars, as well as customize itwith the tools you use most often and hide the ones you don't.
Top Toolbars

473

Advanced Animation Toolbar

474

Art Layer Toolbar

475

Deformation Toolbar

477

Display Toolbar

480

Easy Flipping Toolbar

481

Edit Toolbar

482

File Toolbar

483

Flip Toolbar

484Game Toolbar

485Mark Drawing Toolbar

487

Onion Skin Toolbar

488

Playback Toolbar

490

Scripting Toolbar

493

Tool Presets Toolbar

494

Tools Toolbar

495

Workspace Toolbar

500

View Toolbars

501

Script Editor View Toolbar

502

Timeline View Toolbar

506

Xsheet View Toolbar

508

472

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Top Toolbars
Harmony has a series of toolbars that are added by default at the top of the interface. These toolbars can be
moved on the sides of the interface as well as within specific views.
All top toolbars can be added through the top menu Windows > Toolbars > desired toolbar.
Advanced Animation Toolbar

474

Art Layer Toolbar

475

Deformation Toolbar

477

Display Toolbar

480

Easy Flipping Toolbar

481

Edit Toolbar

482

File Toolbar

483

Flip Toolbar

484Game Toolbar

485Mark Drawing Toolbar

487

Onion Skin Toolbar

488

Playback Toolbar

490

Scripting Toolbar

493

Tool Presets Toolbar

494

Tools Toolbar

495

Workspace Toolbar

500

473

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Advanced Animation Toolbar
The Advanced Animation toolbar contains tools to position and animate layers. The Scale, Translate andRotate tools can be used to reposition the permanent pivot position of a layer. Unlike the Transform tool, eachtool in the Advanced Animation toolbar performs a single operation, either rotate, scale, translate or scale inrelation to the camera distance.

How to access the Advance Animation toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Advanced Animation.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y
axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element.
You can scale an object up to make it larger or down
to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element
while maintaining its proportions.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the
Camera view as you move them towards or away fromthe camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without
offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, thetrajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements
were drawn in a different location than the centre of
the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is notaligned with your drawing. Also, if you have several
elements attached to one trajectory, you might wantyour trajectory to be at a different location to represent
the group's motion better.

474

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Art Layer Toolbar
The Art Layer toolbar lets you access the art layers. By default, only the Line Art and Colour Art are displayed.
A drawing is composed of two layers, a line layer and a colour layer. The colour layer is always placed under theline layer. These layers are accessible in the Drawing or Camera view (using drawing tools). When you view thefinal drawing, you will see the final composition of the lines and colours, not two separate layers.

You can draw and paint in all layers. If you prefer to work in a single layer, everything can be done in the LineArt layer.
You can change your preferences to enable the advanced use of layers and have access to four layers instead oftwo:lOverlaylLine ArtlColour Artl

Underlay

How to access the Art Layer toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Art Layer.

How to enable the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option
1. Select Edit > Preferences ( Windows/Linux ) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences ( macOS ).
2. In the Preferences dialog box, select the Advanced tab.
3. In the Advanced Options section, select the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option.
4. Click OK.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Preview Line Art andColour Art

Displays all Art layers.

475

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Overlay Art

Makes the Overlay Art layer current.

Line Art

Makes the Line Art layer current.

Colour Art

Makes the Colour Art layer current.

Underlay Art

Makes the Underlay Art layer current.

476

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Deformation Toolbar
T-RIG-007-009
The Deformation toolbar contains the various tools and options used to create a deformation rig. This toolbar isdisplayed in the default interface.
By default, the Deformation toolbar only contains the essential options. If you right-click on the toolbar andselect Customize, you can add additional buttons.

Default Buttons
Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Rigging tool is used to create a Bone deformation
chain. You also use it to set up the resting position.

Rigging Tool

To learn more about the Rigging tool's properties, see
Rigging Tool Properties on page 450.

Show Selected
Deformation Chains andHide All Others

Displays the deformer manipulators for the selecteddrawings or selected deformers in the Camera view,and hides all other deformer manipulators.

Show Manipulator

When several points from a curve or envelope
deformation chain are selected, this displays amanipulator bounding box around them. Using thismanipulator, you can move, rotate and scale theselected points together.

477

Chapter 5: Toolbars

The Reset Current Keyframe copies the resting
position, the original setup of your skeleton before
undergoing any deformation, to your current frame.
Once you have created a deformation chain, you can
use the Rigging tool to adjust the position andappearance of the rig to fit the element. When theskeleton is in place, you can use the Reset Current
Keyframe button to reset the current frame position to
the resting position.

Reset Current Keyframe

The Enable Deformations button allows you to display
your drawings in their original state or with
deformations while creating additional drawings.
Depending on the artwork you need to create, you
might need to refer to the other images either
deformed or in their original position.
Enable Deformations

NOTE
Disabling deformations is only a display
mode. Although drawings will not appear
deformed in the Camera view, evenin Render View mode, they will still be
deformed in the rendered images.

Optional Buttons
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Remove All Keyframes

The Remove All Keyframes option removes all
keyframes on the selected deformation chain.

478

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The Show All Controls button lets you visualize theresting position in red (Setup mode) and the active
position (Animation) in green at the same time

Show All Controls

479

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Display Toolbar
The Display toolbar lets you select the different Display nodes available in the node system.

Harmony Advanced doesn't allow you to add Display nodes. The display selection feature is only available forthe possible scenario that you need to use a specific Display node created by a Harmony Premium user.
When your scene does not have a Display node, it is automatically set to Display All which uses the Timelineview ordering and shows floating nodes from the Node view. You can also set your scene to use Display All
using the Display toolbar.
NOTE
If you try to add a peg or other transformation layer in the Timeline view without having a layer
selected, an error message will display. Make sure to change to Display All. The peg layer will befloating in the Node view and will not be visible in the Timeline view. The Timeline view shows only
layers that are connected to the Composite node.
If you switch to Display All, you run the risk of not realizing when you have floating nodes that are
not connected to your composite. For this reason, it is not recommended to work in Display All
mode.

How to access the Display toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Display.

480

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Easy Flipping Toolbar
T-LAY-003-007
The Easy Flipping toolbar lets you rapidly flip through drawings in the Drawing view as is done with paper
drawings. In order for the features in this toolbar to work, you must be in the Drawing view.

How to access the Easy Flipping toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Easy Flipping.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Previous Drawing

Displays the previous drawing of your animation.

Next Drawing

Displays the next drawing of your animation.

Lets you flip forwards or backwards through yourSliderdrawings by moving the slider.

Loop

Displays drawings in the first frame after you reachthe last frame of your animation.

Easy Flip

Automatically flips through the drawings based on
the FPS.

Preroll

Sets the number of drawings to be flipped throughbefore the starting drawing. The starting drawing isdetermined by the position of the red playhead in theTimeline view.

FPS

Sets the speed of playback in the units of frames per
second.

481

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains common operations such as Copy, Paste, Cut, Undo and Redo. These options can also
be found in the Edit menu.

How to access the Edit toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Edit.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project.
Harmony supports multiple undo, so you can undochanges you made in the order you made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This commandis active only after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste theobject or its properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location
you select in a view.

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements inthe Drawing or Camera view or a layer or cells in theTimeline view.

482Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

File Toolbar
The File toolbar contains the common file operations such as New, Save and Open. These options can also befound in the File menu.

How to access the File toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > File.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New (Harmony Stand
Alone)Creates a new scene while closing any scene already open. The New
Scene dialog box opens, asking for directory, name, and resolution
information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you can browse for a scene
file. You can open a new scene from the current one and the previous
scene will close.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene, drawings, palettes, andpalette lists.
Saves the current file with a different name and at a different location.

Save As

Saves the current state of a scene as another scene. The Save As
window prompts you for a new name and a different location for thisscene before saving it. This will create a complete scene directory for the
new scene.

NOTE
The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.

Import Images

Imports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

483

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Flip Toolbar
The Flip toolbar lets you determine the type of drawing to include in your flipping selection. You can flip throughthe key, breakdown or in-between drawings individually, or view a combination.

How to access the Easy Flipping toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Easy Flipping.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Show Key Drawings

Displays key drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show Breakdown
Drawings

Displays breakdown drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show In-between

Displays in-between drawings when flipping throughDrawings

drawings.

Show Retake Key
Drawings

Displays retake key drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show Retake Breakdown
Drawings

Displays breakdown retake drawings when flipping
through drawings.

Show Retake In-between
Drawings

Displays retake in-between drawings when flipping
through drawings.

484

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Game Toolbar
The Game toolbar contains tools for setting anchors and props, as well as exporting to sprite sheets and Easel
JS.

How to access the Game toolbar
1. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Game.

Tool
Name

Description

Adds or remove the Anchor property for the selected layer. When a layer is an anchor, its

ToggleAnchorpivot point is exported as an anchor in Unity. A prop can be attached to the anchor tofollow the anchor's animation. Since the anchor is the layer's pivot, it will move and rotatewith the anchor layer's movement as well as its parent layers' movement.

TIP
You can see whether a layer has the Anchor property in the Metadata Editor
view—see Metadata Editor View on page 540

Adds or remove the Prop property for the selected layer. When a layer is a prop, it isexported as a prop to Unity. A prop can be attached to an anchor on your character, whichmakes it follow the anchor's animation.
ToggleProp

TIP
You can see whether a layer has the Prop property in the Metadata Editor view—see Metadata Editor View on page 540

Exportto Sprite
SheetsOpens the Export to Sprite Sheets dialog, from which you can export your scene as arigged sprite sheet that can be imported in Unity and which can have props and anchors—
see Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box on page 60.

485Chapter 5: Toolbars

Icon

Tool
Name

Description

Exportto EaselJS

Opens the Export to Easel JS dialog, from which you can export your scene as a renderedsprite sheet that can be imported in Unity—see Export to Easel JS Dialog Box on page 51.

486

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Mark Drawing Toolbar
The Mark Drawing toolbar lets you identify drawings such as key, breakdown and in-between. The drawing
Identification feature can help the animator stay well organized and save time when identifying key,breakdown or in-between drawings in the Xsheet and Timeline views.

How to access the Mark Drawing toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Mark Drawings.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Mark as Key Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a key drawing.

Mark as Breakdown
Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a breakdown
drawing.

Mark as In-between

Identifies the selected drawing as an in-between

Drawing

drawing.

Mark as Retake Key
Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a key retakedrawing.

Mark as Retake
Breakdown Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a breakdown retakedrawing.

Mark as Retake Inbetween Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a in-between retakedrawing.

487

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Onion Skin Toolbar
The Onion Skin toolbar displays previous and subsequent drawings. When designing or animating, it is useful
to see previous drawings. By default, previous drawings appear in a shade of red and next drawings are
displayed in green. In the Onion Skin toolbar, you can select the type of drawing to display.

NOTE
You can change the default onion skin display colours in the Preferences dialog box.
For tasks related to this toolbar, see .

How to access the Onion Skin toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Onion Skin.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Enable Onion Skin in
Other Elements

Displays previous and next drawings in other layers than the current one.
In the Drawing view, use the Enable Onion Skin in Other Elements
feature to see the previous and next drawings of the layers visible inLight Table mode.

Show Key Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as key drawings.

Show Breakdown
Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as breakdown drawings.

Show In-between
Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as in-between drawings.

Show Retake Key

Displays all key drawings marked to be retaken.

488

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Drawings
Show Retake Breakdown
Drawings

Displays all breakdown drawings marked to be retaken.

Show Retake In-between
Drawings

Displays all in-between drawings marked to be retaken.

489

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Playback Toolbar
The Playback toolbar lets you play back animation and sound. Use it to scrub the sound to create your lip-sync,
loop the playback, navigate through frames, and change the playback range and speed.

Name

Play

ButtonDescription

Plays the scene in the Camera or Drawing view.
You can also select Play > Play or Stop from the top menu.
Renders your scene's frames, then opens the rendered frames
in Harmony Play for playback.

Render and PlayThis allows you to preview your scene's animation in real time, withthe effects rendered and with no risk of slowdown.
You can click and hold this button to switch its mode to Record andPlay or Test SWF Movie.
Exports your scene as it appears in the Camera view into a movie file,then opens it in your workstation's default video player.

Record and Play

Test SWF Movie

Enable Loop

This allows you to preview your animation without any risk of
slowdown, but it does not preview the effects in your scene.
However, it is much faster than Render and Play.
Quickly exports your scene as a Flash Movie (.swf), then opens it inyour workstation's default web browser.
If pressed, your scene will repeat indefinitely when playing.
Otherwise, it will stop when the end is reached.
You can also select Play > Loop from the top menu.

Enable Sound

Enable Sound Scrubbing

When pressed, your scene's soundtrack will play during playback.
You can also select Play > Enable Sound from the top menu.
When pressed, you will hear a sample of your scene's soundtrack at
the current frame when moving your scene's playhead in the Timelineview.
This allows you to easily situate where the action is relative to the490Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Name

ButtonDescription

sound track.
You can also select Play > Enable Sound Scrubbing.
Allows you to quickly play your scene forward or backward topreview your animation.
Moving the handle towards the right will play your scene forward,
while moving it towards the left will play your scene backward.
Jog Frames

The closer to the edge you move the handle, the faster the playback
will be, allowing you to dose the speed at which your scene isplayed. When the handle is at the edge, your scene will play at its
actual framerate.
Once the head is released, it returns to the middle and playback
stops.

Frame

Lets you manually enter the current frame number, setting theplayhead's position.
Let's you manually enter the number of the first frame to play during
playback.

Start

TIP
You can also click on Start (just left of the input field) toquickly set the Start frame to the current frame.

Let's you manually enter the number of the first frame to play during
playback.
Stop

TIP
You can also click on Stop (just left of the input field) toquickly set the Stop frame to the current frame.

FPS (Frames per second)

Lets you set the amount of frames that should be played during every
second of playback, which is how the playback speed is determined.

491

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Name

ButtonDescription

NOTE
This does not change the frames per second setting in yourscene's resolution settings.

492

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Scripting Toolbar
The scripting toolbar allows you to create buttons that run functions in your scripts. You can add one button foreach function you want to be able to run, and clicking on the button will instantly run the script function yourlinked it to.

How to add the Scripting toolbar to your workspace
1. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.

l

Right-click on any existing toolbar and select Scripting.

Tool Name

Description

ManageScripts

Opens the Scripts Manager dialog box where you can add scripts and functions toyour Scripting toolbar.

Stop Script

Stops the execution of a script launched from the Scripting toolbar.

493

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Tool Presets Toolbar
The Tool Presets toolbar lets you create new tool presets and manage them.

How to access the Tool Presets toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New Tool Preset

Creates a new tool preset from the current tool
settings.

Manage Presets

Opens the Manage Tool Preset dialog box where you
can update, organize, and delete existing presets.

494

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains all the main tools you need to work in Harmony. In the default workspace, thistoolbar located on the left-most side of the interface. A small triangle at the lower-right corner of a tool
indicates additional tools under the main tool. To access these tools, hold down the left mouse button until the
additional tools appear, then select one.

By default, the Tools toolbar displays several of its tools in pop-up menus that must be opened. It is possible to
make the Tools toolbar display every tool in its individual button instead by enabling the Flat Tools Toolbar
preference. This makes the selection of tools quicker. However, because there is not enough vertical space todisplay all tools, some tools will be hidden from the Tools toolbar by default. Which tools are displayed in the
Tools toolbar when Flat Tools Toolbar is enabled can be customized. The order in which tools are listed in Flat
Tools Toolbar mode can also be customized.

How to make every tool in the Tools toolbar display in buttons rather than pop-up
menus
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences(macOS).

l

Press Ctrl + U (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + U (macOS).

495

Chapter 5: Toolbars

2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Options section, select the Flat Tool Toolbar option.

4. Click OK and restart Harmony.

How to customize which tools are displayed in the Tools toolbar when it is in Flat mode
1. Right-click on the Tools toolbar and select Customize.
The Toolbar Manager dialog appears.

2. In the Available Tools list, select each tool that you want to add to the Tools toolbar, then click on
the Add the selected tool to the toolbar

button.

3. In the Toolbar list, select each tool that you want to remove from the Tools toolbar, then click on the
Remove the selected tool from the toolbar

Tool Name

SelectIcon

button.

Description
Allows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brush strokes,
pencil lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

496

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotateand skew it.

Reposition All
Drawings

Allows you to reposition, scale, rotate and skew all drawings in thecurrent layer.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines andshapes in your artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and move vector
points, move the Bezier handles of the vector points as well as deform
vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating thepoints at the centre of its line rather than its contour.

Pencil Editor

Allows you to adjust the thickness of a pencil line at its different points
and corners, tweak the shape of its extremities and scale its texture.

Smooth Editor

Allows you to optimize contours and lines by removing its extra points,
making them easier to edit.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Envelope

Allows you to deform and warp artwork by moving points and tweaking
lines in a grid.

Edit
Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients andtextures in a colour zone.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick andthin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made ofcentral vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brushstrokes.

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

497

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Ink

Allows you to recolour pencil lines with precision by changing the colourof one segment at a time.

Paint Unpainted

Allows you to quickly fill empty zones in your artwork with a colour or
texture, leaving filled zones unchanged.

Repaint

Allows you to quickly repaint painted zones in your artwork. Empty
zones will remain empty.

Unpaint

Allows you to empty filled colour zones of their colour and texture.

StrokeAllows you to create invisible lines that can serve as colour zones thatcan be filled, or close the gaps in existing colour zones.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the Paint
tool. By drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool will createa small invisible stroke connecting the two closest points around the gap.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines byclicking to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Drawing Pivot

Allows you to position the pivot on a drawing layer by clicking where youwant its location to be.

Morphing

Allows you to create and configure a morphing sequence, which willautomatically generate the in-betweens between two drawings in the498Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

current layer.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Camera and Drawing views.

Zoom

Rotate View

Allows you zoom in and out of the Camera and Drawing views.

Lets you rotate the Camera and Drawing views just like with a realanimation disc.

Animate Mode

Enables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale,skew, etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off theAnimate mode to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the
Animate mode is disabled, keyframes are not created when an object's
parameters change.

Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew
them.

Onion Skin

Displays the previous and next frames of an animation. Useful when
animating cut-out characters.

499

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Workspace Toolbar
The Workspace toolbar lets you load other workspaces. The first time you start Harmony, the default
workspace is loaded. Other workspaces are available such as the Hand-Drawn Animation and Compositing
workspaces; these display different views and toolbars. You can access these workspaces and any you create,from the Windows menu and the Workspace toolbar.

How to access the Workspace toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Workspace.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Workspace List

Allows you to select an existing workspace.

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you canorganize, display, and remove workspace from yourlist.

Save Workspace

When the Automatically Save Workspace preferenceis disabled, the Save Workspace button becomes
available. This allows you to manually save your newworkspace configuration.

500

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

View Toolbars
Harmony has a series of view specific toolbars that are only available in a given view. These toolbars can be
moved only within their view.
All view toolbars can be added, as long as the view is visible, through the top menu Windows > Toolbars >desired toolbar.
Script Editor View Toolbar

502

Timeline View Toolbar

506

Xsheet View Toolbar

508

501

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Script Editor View Toolbar
The Script Editor toolbar gives you quick access to some commonly used commands for editing and testing
scripts in the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 546.

How to access the Script Editor toolbar
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. Click on the Script Editor view to set the focus on it.
3. In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Script Editor.

Icon

ButtonDescription

Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted totype in a name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which location
to save the script in:l

User: Saves the script to your user preferences. You will be able to run andedit the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as the same
user.

NOTE

New Script

If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved tothe preferences for your account on your computer. if you areusing Harmony Server, the script will be saved to the preferences
for your Harmony database user.

lGlobal: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the Harmony database's global script directory. Anyone who islogged in to the database will be able to edit and run this script.

502

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

l

l

l

Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to savethe script to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit
and run the script as long as they are working on a scne inside thisenvironment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the scriptto the current scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script aslong as they are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View.

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Harmony. When you clickon this button, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on your filesystem. Then, you are prompted to select which location to import the script in:l

User: Saves the script to your user preferences. You will be able to run andedit the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as the same
user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved tothe preferences for your account on your computer. if you areusing Harmony Server, the script will be saved to the preferences
for your Harmony database user.

Import Script
l

l

l

l

Global: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the Harmony database's global script directory. Anyone who islogged in to the database will be able to edit and run this script.
Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to savethe script to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit
and run the script as long as they are working on a scne inside thisenvironment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the scriptto the current scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script aslong as they are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.

503

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Icon

ButtonDescription

NOTE
For more information on script locations, see Script Editor View.

Deletes the selected script.

NOTES
l

Delete ScriptlRefresh Script
File List

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources
location, as those are scripts that are installed with Harmony.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources
but which you copied to another location so you could makechanges to it, the original version of the script in the
Application Resources folder will be restored to the list.

Refresh the list of scripts in the Script Editor. If there are new scripts in your user
preferences or your scene's scripts sub-folder, click on this button to be able toopen them in the Script Editor.
Allows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing software.

NOTES
l

Set External
Editorl

Open with
External Editor

Set Target

Run

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing
software is enough if that application supports the AppleScript
Open Document protocol.
On Windows and GNU/Linux, unless your text editor is in yoursystem's PATH environment variable, you will have to type in thefull path to the editor.

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with theandDebug buttons.

Runs the target script and function.

504

Run

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will beprompted to set one when you click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking
on thel

Set Target button.

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run
what you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether anothertarget is set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you cantest and debug the function.

NOTES
l

Debug
l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will beprompted to set one when click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking
on thel

Stop Execution

Set Target button.

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug
what you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether anothertarget is set.

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

505

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Timeline View Toolbar
The 3D Graph toolbar works in conjunction with the elements in the 3D Graph view.

ButtonName

Description

Set Ease TypeCreate Empty Drawing

Duplicate Drawing

Insert Keyframe

Delete Keyframes

Set Motion Keyframe

Set Stop-Motion Keyframe

Go to Previous Keyframe

Go to Next Keyframe

Add Key Exposure

Delete Key Exposure

Centre On Selection

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Create Keyframes On

Opens the Create Keyframes On dialog box, where you can set theoptions to create a new keyframe every x number of frames.

506

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Fill Empty Cells

Paste Mode: All Drawing
Attributes

Paste Mode: Keyframes Only

Paste Mode: Exposures Only

Add Prefix or Suffix

How to access the Timeline view toolbar
You can add the Timeline view toolbar to the Timeline view by:l

Going to the top menu and selecting Windows > Toolbars > Timeline view.

lright-clicking on the space at the top of the Timeline view and selecting Timeline view.

507

Chapter 5: Toolbars

Xsheet View Toolbar
The Xsheet toolbar contains the common timing operations such as Add Column, Delete Column, Clone
Column, and so on. These options can also be found in the top menu.

508

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

509

Chapter 6: Views

Chapter 6: Views
The Harmony interface is composed of different views, each one designed for a specific purpose. You can modify
the location of the views by adding a new view as a tab or as a window. You can also swap the location of aview.
When a view is active, a red rectangle appears around the view. Keyboard shortcuts and top menu options areassociated with the active view. If a menu option is greyed out, it means it does not apply to the layer, drawing
or other type of selection or the option does not apply to the active view.
Camera View

511

Colour View

518

Drawing View

524

Function View

527

Guides View

530

Integrated Help View

533

Layer Properties View

534

Library View

536

Message Log View

539

Metadata Editor View

540

Model View

542

Perspective View

543

Script Editor View

546

Side View

548

Timeline View

551

Tool Properties View

561

Top View

562

Xsheet View

564

510

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Camera View
The Camera view is the centre of operations in Harmony. In this view, you can draw, paint, animate, set up yourscene, manipulate objects, open symbols and preview your animation.
The Camera view also has a top and bottom toolbar that you can use to navigate in the view, change thedisplay mode or go up your symbol hierarchy.

How to access the Camera view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Camera.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Camera.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use in the Camera view to draw, animate or
set up the scene.

511

Chapter 6: Views

The Editing Stack menu displays the names of thesymbols and their hierarchy when you are editing asymbol. You can click on the different names to go
back up to the different parent symbols or the
top/current project.

Editing Stack

The Camera View toolbar contains all the tools andoptions you can use in the Camera view to draw,
animate or set up the scene. The toolbar can bedisplayed or hidden by right-clicking on it andCamera View Toolbar

selecting or deselecting the Camera View toolbar.
When you have a drawing layer or drawing selected,
the Light Table button button allows you to fade thecolours of the other layers so you can see the current
artwork better as you edit with a drawing tool. Notethat the light table does not work when using a layer
editing tool, such as the Transform tool.
Light Table

When this button is enabled, the drawing that you are
currently editing with a drawing tool is temporarily
displayed in front of all the other elements. The actual
scene is not modified.

Current Drawing on Top

The Camera Mask button shows or hides Displays ablack mask around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing
the unnecessary artwork. This option is handy when
you're animating and setting up the scene. It allows
you to see your scene’s composition better.

Camera Mask

512

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

You can also access this from the top menu byselecting View > Show > Camera Mask.

The Safe Area button shows or hides Displays the TV
safety zone and the centre of the camera frame. The
safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as thesafety zone and frame’s centre.
You can also access this feature from the top menu byselecting View > Show > Safe Area.
Safe Area

When you select an object in the Camera view with
the Transform tool, a bounding box always appears
around the object and the artwork is tinted in fuchsia,
red or yellow. Enabling this option will only keep thebounding box and remove the colour tint.
BBox Selection Style

Outline Locked Drawings

513

Drawings that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot
be selected in the Camera view) are displayed as
wireframes.

Chapter 6: Views

The Reset View button resets any panning, zoomingor rotation done in the Camera view and returns thedisplay to the initial settings. You can also press Shift+ M.

Reset View

The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce the Camera
or Drawing view display.
To make the camera frame size always match the sizeof your view, select the Fit to View option. Click thedrop-down arrow and select a zoom level or press 1
and 2.

Zoom Menu

The OpenGL View Mode button switches the Camera
view to fast display, letting you see your animation
play in real time. The OpenGL display requires lessmemory. The final look of your effects is not shown in
the OpenGL View Mode. You must switch to theRender View Mode to see your effects.

OpenGL View Mode

514

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

The Render View Mode button swithes the Camera
view to a fully rendered display showing the final
image of the current frame. If a modification is done toyour current frame or if you move to a different frame,
click the Update Preview button to update the display
if your preview does not update automatically.The
Render View Mode display lets you see the final lookof your frames including effects and antialiasing. You
cannot play back your scene in Render View Mode. To
see your scene fully rendered and to play it back, youmust press the Render and Play button in the
Playback toolbar.

Render View Mode

The Matte View Mode button switches the Camera
view to a matte display showing the alpha channel ofthe elements in your scene. The transparency level
ranges from 0 to 100 percent. Zero percent iscompletely transparent and represented by black and100 percent is completely opaque and represented bywhite. Everything in between these extremes has atransparency level somewhere between 1 and 99
percent and is represented in various shades of grey.

Matte View Model515

To access the Matte View mode, click on the
Render View button and select Matte View
from the drop-down menu.

Chapter 6: Views

The Depth View mode displays images in a relative
white to black gradient scale. The object(s) closest to
the camera are displayed in white and the object(s)furthest from the camera are displayed in black. If theposition of the last object changes along the z-axis,
that object will still remain black, so long as it retains
its position as the object the farthest back. It does notmatter where that object is in 3D space, it just matterswhat its position is relative to the other object in thesame space. The objects closest and farthest from thecamera set the range of the white to black scale. All
the other objects fall somewhere in between.

Depth View Model

To access the Depth View mode, click on the
Render View button and select Depth View
from the drop-down menu.

Drawing NameThe Drawing Name field displays the name of theselected drawing, as well as the layer containing it. If
the cell does not contain any drawing, an Empty
Cell text is shown in the field.

Tool Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of the selected
tool. If you temporarily override a drawing tool using akeyboard shortcut, the tool’s name will be highlighted
in red. You can temporarily override a tool by holding
its keyboard shortcut without the Alt key. For

516

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

example, the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S. If you holddown the S key, you will switch to the Select tool.
When you release the key, you will return to the tool
you were using.
The Frame Number field displays the number of thecurrent frame.

Frame Number

The colour swatch displays the currently selected

Selected Colour

colour in the Colour view.

517

Chapter 6: Views

Colour View
The Colour view is where you create colours and palettes and import existing palettes into your project. The
Colour view is also necessary for drawing, painting and creating colour styling.

How to access the Colour view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Colour.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Colour.

Palette List Panel
Icon

OptionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the commands and options that you canuse in the Colour view to manage colours and palettes.

518

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Collapse/Expand Palette
List

Allows you to show or hide your palette list and its options. By default,
the palette list is displayed, but you may want to hide it if you areworking with a single palette and want to allow more vertical space forthe colour swatch list.

Add Palette

Allows you to create a new palette.

Deletes the currently selected palette. If the colour swatch is used inyour project, zones painted with colour swatches which have been
deleted will turn red, easily identifying them so you can repaint themwith another colour swatch.

Remove Palette

Link Palette

Allows you to add a palette from a different location, be it in a scene,
job, environment or even an element to your palette list. The palette will
be linked to its original location rather than copied to your scene's
folder. Hence, if you make changes to the original palette, it will affectthe colour of elements in your scene.
If you want to import a palette as a copy into your scene's palette library,right-click on your palette list and select Import. You can also link to apalette in any location on your machine or network by selecting Link
to External.
Moves palettes further up or down the palette list.

Order Palette List

Edit Palette List Mode
Indicator

If a palette has been cloned, the highest palette among the original
palette and its clone(s) will be used by Harmony. This can be overridden
by using a Colour-Override effect—see Colour-Override Layer on page288.
In Harmony Server, this icon appears when you have the modifying
rights on your scene's palette list. While several users can work on ascene at the same time, only one user may have the right to modify apalette list at any given time.

519

Chapter 6: Views

NOTE
In Harmony Stand Alone, you can always modify your scene's
palette list. On Harmony Server, you must unlock your palette
list before making modifications to it.

Show Colour Palettes

Shows only colour palettes in the palette list. This is the default option.

Show
Pencil Texture Palettes

Shows only pencil texture palettes in the palette list.

Show All Palettes

Shows both colour and pencil texture palettes in the palette list.

Palette List
Icon

Description

In Harmony Server, this indicates that you have the rights to modify the palette.

Indicates that the palette is stored at the same level as its palette list. For example, a palette that is stored
in the scene's palette library and which is listed in the scene's palette list, or a palette that is stored in anelement's palette library and which is listed in that same element's palette list.
Indicates that the palette file is stored in an external location, such as a different scene, an element in adifferent scene, a job other than the scene's job, or an environment other than the scene's environment.
This means the palette is liable to be missing if it is moved from its original location, or if the scene isexported from the database into an offline scene or to a different database.
This indicates that the palette is stored at a higher level than its palette list, making it a shared palette. For
example, a palette in your scene's palette list that is stored in the palette library of the scene's job or
environment, or a palette in an element's palette list that is stored in the palette library of the scene.
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation. For example, a palette file that is stored in one of the scene's
element folders, but which is added to your scene's palette list. The whole scene can use the palette, butsince it's stored inside an element, deleting that element will make your whole scene lose access to thatpalette.

520

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Colour Swatch List Panel
Icon

OptionDescription

Add Colour

Adds a new colour swatch to the bottom of your colour list.

The Remove Colour button lets you delete the currently selectedcolour swatches. If the colour swatch is used in your project, andconfirmation dialog will appear prompting you to confirm that you
want to delete the colour. Zones painted with colour swatches whichhave been deleted will turn red, easily identifying them so you can
repaint them with another colour swatch.

Remove Colour

Add Texture

Allows you to import a bitmap image as a texture, which can be
painted with just like a colour. When used with the Brush or Paint
tools, bitmap textures are tiled inside the shape they fill. The scaling
and position of the texture inside their shape can be tweaked with theEdit Gradient/Texture tool. When used with the Pencil tool or one of
the Shape tools, a bitmap texture will follow the pencil line's
direction.

521

Chapter 6: Views

Set Current Brush Colour

When enabled, the colour you select in the colour view will beselected for the Brush tool.

Set Current Pencil Colour

When enabled, the colour you select in the colour view will beselected for the Pencil tool, as well as other tools that create pencil
lines, such as the Line, Rectangle, Ellipse and Polyline tools.

Set Current Paint Colour

When enabled, the colour you select in the colour view will beselected for the Paint tool.
When enabled, the colour you select will be selected for all drawing
tools. When disabled, you can select individual colours for the Brush,
Pencil and Paint tools.

Link/Unlink Three Colours

In Harmony Server, this allows you to get the modifying rights to theselected palettes.
Edit Palette Mode

Since several people can work on any given scene at the same time,and a palette can be shared between scenes, palettes may be loadedin read-only mode when opening a scene on a Harmony database.
Then, an user would only be able to edit a palette by first activating
Edit Palette Mode. This prevents several users from making changes

522Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guideon the palette at the same time, since a user cannot activate Edit
Palette Mode on a palette that is already being edited by someone
else. This also prevents users from accidentally making modifications
on important palettes.
In Harmony Server, this icon appears when you have the modifying
rights on the currently selected palette.
Edit Palette Mode Indicator

NOTE
In Harmony Stand Alone, you can always modify yourpalettes.

Each colour swatch available in the Colour view can have its own
name, making it easy to identify which colour is used to paint whatpart of your character or background.

Colour Swatch NameNOTE
Two colours can have the same name. Harmony identifies
colours by an identification number.

Also referred to as colour pots, the colour swatch is the actual colour
information for a colour in your palette. It is represented by arectangle displaying the colour in the list.
Colour Swatch

523

Chapter 6: Views

Drawing View
In Harmony, you can draw in both the Drawing or Camera views. Although the two views are similar, there aresome differences when it comes to drawing.
Only the selected drawing is displayed by default in the Drawing view. You can use features, such as the lighttable to display the current drawing of all the enabled layers of your scene in washed-out colours, or the Onion
Skin to display the previous and next drawings of the currently selected drawing layer.

How to access the Drawing view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Drawing .

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

524

button and select Drawing.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use in the Drawing view to draw, animate andpaint.

Drawing Area

This is the main space in the Drawing view. It is where
you draw and where the drawings are displayed.
The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce the Camera
or Drawing view display.
To make the camera frame size always match the sizeof your view, select the Fit to View option. Click thedrop-down arrow and select a zoom level or press 1
and 2.

Zoom Menu

Drawing NameThe Drawing Name field displays the name of theselected drawing, as well as the layer containing it. If
the cell does not contain any drawing, an Empty
Cell text is shown in the field.

Tool Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of the selected
tool. If you temporarily override a drawing tool using akeyboard shortcut, the tool’s name will be highlighted
in red. You can temporarily override a tool by holding
its keyboard shortcut without the Alt key. For
example, the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S. If you holddown the S key, you will switch to the Select tool.
When you release the key, you will return to the tool
you were using.

525

Chapter 6: Views

Frame NumberThis field displays the current frame of the animation
you are working on.

Cursor Coordinates

This indicates the position of the your pointer in thedrawing area.

Colour Picker

The Colour Picker allows you to select a colour for
drawing.

526

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Function View
The Function view lets you edit function curves and parameters. It contains a visual graph for adding, removing,and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting the velocity. The Function view allows you to display multiple
functions in the background as a reference.

How to access the Function view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Function.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Function.

How to display functions in the Function view
1. Open the Function view.
The Function view is blank until you select the layer containing the functions you want to display.

527

Chapter 6: Views

2. To display a function in the Function view, click on the layer containing the functions to adjust in theTimeline view.
3. To select the functions you want to edit, select them in the Function list.

Parameter

Description

Function List

When selecting a layer in the Timeline view, all the corresponding functions are
displayed (if any). Select the functions you want to see and edit, and hide theones you don't.

Display Toolbar

Allows you to modify how the editing area is displayed. You can hide the grid,disable the synchronization with the current frame, reset the zoom level andnormalize the function display by stacking them one over the other to comparethem regardless of their value range.

Current Frame

Displays the current scene frame.

Selected Keyframe Value

Displays the value of the selected keyframe.

Display Advanced Parameter
Values

Displays the Projection, Bias, Tension and Continuity parameters to adjust the
curve around the selected keyframe.

Keyframe, Velocity andInterpolation Options

This toolbar lets you add and delete keyframes, adjust the velocity curve, adjust
the segments to motion or stop-motion keyframes and set the velocity to create
steps instead of a constant progression.

Function Types

This toolbar lets you click on the different function types to enable or disable all
the listed functions of that type.

Value Scale

Displays the value range for the displayed editing area. It can be referenced toknow the value of a keyframe.

528

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Selected Keyframe

The selected keyframe is displayed in red. When selected, the keyframe values are
displayed in the corresponding fields.

Bezier Handles

The Bezier handles let you adjust the ease in and ease out of each keyframe. The
more the handle is pulled out horizontally, the slower the animation will be. The
more the handle is pulled out vertically, the faster the animation will be.

Function Curve

The thin line going from keyframe to keyframe is the actual curve. The section of acurve located between two keyframes is called a segment.

Frame Scale

The Frame Scale displays the frame range for the displayed editing area. It can bereferenced to know the current frame of a keyframe.

529

Chapter 6: Views

Guides View
The Guides view enables you to manage drawing guides for a given storyboard panel. Use Drawing Guides toassist you in creating a drawing with perspective.
Guides can be added, selected, renamed, deleted, cut, copied, pasted and reordered. Guides can also beexported to a file and re-imported later.

Icon

Name

Description

Enable Guide

Enables or disables drawing guides.

Options

When enabled:l

Align with Guide

The Brush, Pencil, Line and (optionally) Eraser tools are constrained by
the Drawing Guide to draw/erase straight lines only.

When disabled:l

The drawing tools are not constrained by the Drawing Guide, allowing
you to do freehand strokes. The guide acts as a visual aid only.

Lock Guide

Locks the editing of a Drawing Guide to prevent its accidental modification while
drawing.

Enable Guide
with Eraser

Toggles the use of Drawing Guides with the Eraser tool.

530

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

When enabled:lFull Cursor
DisplayShow ReferenceLines

Drawing Guide axes extend to the edge of the drawing area.

When disabled:lDrawing Guide axes are short.

lDrawing Guide axes disappear while drawing a stroke.

Toggles the display of a visual reference consisting of lines that converge
towards the vanishing point(s).
Adjusts the amount of reference lines to display.

Number of Lines

Guides List
Allows you to add a guide to the scene's guides list. You can add a guide of oneof the following types:

New Guidel

Square gridl1-point perspectivel2-point perspective

l3-point perspective (bird’s eye view)l3-point perspective (worm’s eye view)

Delete Guide

Deletes the selected Drawing Guide(s) from the scene's guides list.

Guides View
Menu

Opens a menu with the following commands:

RenameGuide

Renames the selected Drawing Guide.

Cut

Cuts the selected Drawing Guide(s) from the list and adds it to the clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected Drawing Guide(s) to the clipboard.

531

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

Name

Description

Paste

Pastes Drawing Guide(s) from the clipboard to the scene's guides list. Pasted
guides are inserted under the selected guide.

ImportGuidesImports Drawing Guides from a source file and inserts them at the bottom of thescene's guides list. Duplicate guides are filtered out to avoid cluttering the list.

ExportSelected
GuidesExports the selected Drawing Guide(s) to a destination file.

Displays the scene's list of guides and allows you to select which guide todisplay and use.
Drawing Guides
List

532

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Integrated Help View
Use the Integrated Help when you are unsure about what a certain menu item is or the function of a specificpreference in the Preferences panel.
If you keep the Integrated Help window open for the entire duration of your work session, then you can use theforward and backward arrows to scroll through a history of the help information that you called up during yoursession.

How to access the Integrated Help view
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Integrated Help.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

533

button and select Integrated Help.

Chapter 6: Views

Layer Properties View
The Layer Properties editor or view lets you adjust the properties of a layer in the Timeline view The Layer
Properties can be viewed as a floating window or as a view (docked).
Each layer has its own set of properties that can be modified, including effect and peg layers. Display the Layer
Properties editor or view if you want to modify some of the layer’s properties, such as the name or theantialiasing quality.
NOTE
To know more about the parameters displayed in the Layer Properties view, see Layers on page268.

How to access the Layer Properties view
Do one of the following:534

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guidel

From the top menu, select Windows > Layer Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Layer Properties.

How to access the Layer Properties editorlDouble-click on a layer in the Timeline viewlRight-click on a layer in the Timeline view and select Layer Properties.

l

Select a layer in the Timeline view and press Shift + E.

535

Chapter 6: Views

Library View
The Library view is used to store elements such as animation, drawings, backgrounds and character models so
as to reuse in different scenes and projects. You can also use the Library view to create and store symbols, aswell as to store and import images and sound files.
To reuse elements from a scene in other scenes, you must create a template so that you can import it into
different scenes. Templates can contain anything from a single drawing to a whole scene structure. You cancreate a template by creating it in a scene, then copying the elements you want in your template into a library.
The resulting template is structured like a mini-scene that contains only the elements you copied into it. A
template does not have any dependencies on the scene it was originally created in. Hence, it can safely be
imported in any other scene.
Additionally, the Library view's Drawing Substitution panel allows you to quickly change the current frame's
exposure to one of the existing drawings in a layer. This is especially useful for animating a cut-out character's
mouths, hands, eyelids and other such body parts which typically contain several drawings to choose from.

How to access the Library view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Library.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Library.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The Library menu lets you access commands related
to the Library view, importing .swf movies and536

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Illustrator files, add a new folder, and refresh thelibrary’s content.
The Preview window lets you see the content of thecurrently selected template or symbol in the
Template/Symbol list.

Preview Window

The Preview Playback button lets you play back thecontent of the selected template or symbol if it
contains more than one frame. Press the Play button
to play back the preview.

Preview Playback

The Library Folder List displays all the folders linked to
the Library view.

There are two default folders:
Library Folder Listll

Symbols: This folder is the only folder
containing symbols. You can organize it byadding subfolders inside.
Harmony Advanced Library: This is a default
folder found on the hard drive in your user
documents. This folder can contain templates,
but no symbols.

You can link new library folders to the Library view
and organize them with subfolders.
When working on a movie or series, you will probably
end up with many templates and symbols in yourlibrary. Using the Search tool, you can quickly find thetemplates and symbols in your folders.

Library Search tool537

Chapter 6: Views

The Template/Symbol list displays the templates orsymbols contained in the selected library folder. You
can display the templates by right-clicking thesymbols’ thumbnails and selecting View >Thumbnails.

Template/Symbol List

538

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Message Log View
The Message log view displays information gathered during a render task, such as which frames and at whattime they were each rendered. The view also contains a list of the colour recovery operations.

How to access the Message Log view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Message Log.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

539

button and select Message Log.

Chapter 6: Views

Metadata Editor View
The Metadata Editor view allows you to view and modify the information for props and anchors when creatinga game character or asset in Harmony. It displays your scene's metadata as well as the metadata for thecurrently selected layer and allows you to add, remove or change the value of metadata nodes.

Usually, you do not need to manually add or modify metadata for a game character or asset using the Metadata
Editor. The commands available in the Game toolbar can be used to define props and anchors, which willautomatically fill your scene and layers with the proper metadata. The Metadata Editor is however useful for
visualizing the way Harmony stores this information, to tweak it as necessary and to debug any issue that could
occur when exporting a game asset to Unity.
IMPORTANTYou should avoid using any character but letters, numbers, dashes and underscores in the
Metadata Editor.

How to access the Metadata Editor viewlIn the top-right corner of a view, click the Add Viewl

In the top menu, select Windows > Metadata Editor.

Parameter

Description

540

button and select Metadata Editor.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Displays the metadata for the Harmony scene. Each entry has a name and a value.
Typically, metadata for a scene includes the following entry:

Scene Metadata

Metadata

guideList

Description

This is a node in which the guides created in the Guide View
are stored. This can be ignored—see Guides View.

Displays the metadata for the currently selected layer. Each metadata entry has aname and a value.
Typically, metadata for a node includes the following entries:
Metadata

Description

game.isAnchor

When set to On, this sets the selected layer as
an anchor. This means that, in Unity, the layer's
pivot will be an anchor to which props can be
attached. A prop will follow its anchor's
movement.

game.isProp

When set to On, this sets the selected layer asa prop. In Unity, a prop can be attached to an
anchor to follow its movement.

game.<metadata name>

When a layer has the game.isProp property,
you can add any metadata node to it provided
that the name of the metadata node starts withgame followed by a period (.). This metadata
will be exported to the list of metadata values
for the prop, which can be used in Unity.

Node Metadata541

Chapter 6: Views

Model View
T-ANIMPA-004-004
Once you have a fully painted drawing, you can use it as a colour model and load it in the Model view. Thisdrawing can be used and loaded in any of your Harmony scenes.
Once a drawing is loaded in the Model view, you can use the Dropper

tool to select a colour from the modeland use it to paint in the Camera or Drawing view without having to pick the colour from the colour palette.

How to access the Model view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Model.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Model.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to manage models.

Model View Toolbar

The Model View toolbar contains all the tools andoptions you can use in the Model view to navigate
through and manage models.

542

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Perspective View
T-HFND-008-016
The Perspective view is used during scene setup. It allows you to see a multiplane scene’s orientation. The
Perspective view is similar to a 3D display, as it lets you rotate the scene through all possible angles tounderstand the spacing between the elements. You can also position and rotate your layers and the camera
inside the 3D display to achieve some 3D setup and camera moves.

How to access the Perspective view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Perspective.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Perspective.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Perspective view.

543

Chapter 6: Views

Editing Stack

The Editing Stack menu displays the names of thesymbols and their hierarchy when you are editing asymbol. You can click on the different names to go
back up to the different parent symbols or the
top/current project.

X Control

The red circle rotates the view on its X axis.

Y Control

The green circle rotates the view on its Y axis.

Z Control

The blue circle rotates the view on its Z axis.

GridThis is a perspective (3D) grid reference.

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain yourorientation when navigating in the Perspective view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective
view.

Reset Rotation

Resets the rotation of the Perspective view.

Zoom Menu

This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from thelist. Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available;
you can also select Fit To View to automatically use azoom level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

544

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer anddrawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.
This field displays the currently selected colour in the

Colour Swatch

palette.

545

Chapter 6: Views

Script Editor View
The Scripting view allows you to edit scripts to run in Harmony directly from the application. It displays a list ofavailable scripts, from which you can select an existing script, edit it, test it and save it. The Script Editor will
highlight the syntax of your script for easy reading.

How to access the Script Editor view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Parameter

button and select Script Editor.

Description
The location of the scripts you are editing. The script editor can list, open and edit
scripts from the two following scopes:
l

Scope
l

User: Scripts are saved alongside your user preferences. Those scripts canloaded, executed and edited in any scene, but only as the currently logged
in user.
Scene: Scripts are saved to the scripts subfolder of the currently opened
scene. This scope is for scripts that should be used in the scene
specifically, but should be available to any user that opens the scene.

546Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
When using Harmony Stand Alone, user scripts are stored in thefollowing location:lllWindows: C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\Toon
Boom Animation\Toon Boom Harmony Advanced\1500scripts
macOS: /Users/[username]/Library/Preferences/Toon
Boom Animation/Toon Boom Harmony Advanced/1500scripts
GNU/Linux: /home/[username]/Toon Boom
Animation/Toon Boom Harmony Advanced/1500-scripts

When using Harmony Server, user scripts are stored in the following
location, depending on the level at which you save them:
l

l

l

l

User: /USA_DB/users/[username]/Harmony
Advanced/1500-scripts
Job: /USA_DB/jobs/[job_name]
Environment: /USA_DB/environments/[environment
name]
Global: /USA_DB/scripts

The list of script files. Selecting a script will open it in the editor and allow you tomake changes to it.

Script list

NOTE
The << Sandbox >> item at the top of the list does not correspond to an
actual script file. It is a temporary container to type and test code, butchanges to the sandbox will not be saved.

EditorA syntax highlighting text editor in which the script is loaded and can be edited.

Search toolbar

Allows you to search for a keyword within the script.

VerifyVerifies that the script has no syntax error.

Save

Save the modifications to the script to its corresponding script file.

547

Chapter 6: Views

Side View
T-HFND-008-015
The Side view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see ascene’s stage from the side. This lets the camera cone and spacing between the elements to be seen.

How to access the Side view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Side.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Side.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Side view.

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in the548Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

camera cone.

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position andfield-of-view (FOV).

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain yourorientation when navigating in the view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective
view.
This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from thelist. Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available;
you can also select Fit To View to automatically use azoom level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Zoom Menu

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer anddrawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in the549

Chapter 6: Views

palette.

550

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Timeline View
T-HFND-006-002
To set your animation timing, you will mostly work with the Timeline and Xsheet views. It's extremely useful to
become familiar with the Timeline view, how it works, and its interface.
The Timeline view is the main view used when adjusting the timing of drawings, adding keyframes andordering layers. The Timeline view displays layers, effects, sounds, keyframe values, scene length, layer names,
drawings, keyframes, timing, and frames.

The Timeline view allows you to read your timing from left to right. It represents the scene’s elements in theirsimplest form. You can also see the layers and their names, as well as the drawing’s exposure. The drawing
name is displayed when you place your pointer over the drawing’s exposure.

How to access the Timeline view
Do one of the following:

551

Chapter 6: Views

lFrom the top menu, select Windows > Timeline.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Timeline.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options that you can use to
manage models.
The Enable/Disable All button lets you enable or disable layers. Disabling alayer makes the scene behave as if it didn't exist, including when rendering
the scene. For example:l

A disabled drawing layer will be invisible.

l

A disabled sound layer will be mute.

l

A disabled peg layer will not affect the position of its child layers.

To disable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable button or press D.

Enable/Disable Layer

To enable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable button or press A.

NOTE
Next to sound layers, the Enable/Disable layer button will look like
this:

.

TIP
You can enable or disable all layers by clicking on the Enable ordisable all layers
button in the top row.

Enable/Disable
Solo Mode

Solo mode allows you to only view specific layers in the Camera view andhide all others. When solo mode is enabled on one layer, only this layer will
be visible. If solo mode is enabled on several layers, and only these layers will
be visible. If solo mode is not enabled on any layer, all enabled layers will bevisible.

552

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

You can also use solo mode on sound tracks. If solo mode is enabled on any
sound tracks, only those sound tracks will play during playback.

TIP
When some layers are in solo mode, you can disable or re-enablesolo mode on all layers that have it enabled by clicking on the Toggle
solo mode on or off
button in the top row.

For when the Onion Skin option is enabled, this allows you to enable ordisable Onion Skin on specific layers.

Add to/Remove fromOnion Skin

TIP
To activate the general Onion Skin preview, in the Tools toolbar, click
the Onion Skin button

Lock/Unlock Layer

The Lock/Unlock Layer button lets you prevent the selection or editing of alayer in the Camera view. To select some of the layers without selecting
others, in the Timeline view, lock the layers you do not want to select. Whena layer is locked, its name is displayed in red.

553

Chapter 6: Views

In the top menu, there is a series of locking options. Select Animation > Lock> select one of the following:l

Lock: Locks the currently selected element.

l

Unlock: Unlocks the currently selected element.

lLock All: Locks all the elements in the Camera view.

l

Unlock All: Unlocks all the elements in the Camera view.

lLock All Others: Locks all the elements in the Camera view except thecurrently selected one.

Each drawing layer has a little colour swatch that has two functionalities:lSingle-clicking a layer's colour swatch toggles Outline mode on oroff. Outline mode makes the layer display as nothing but the outlines
of its vector shapes in the Camera view, allowing you to see thedrawing's shape without it blocking the view of layers behind it.

Toggle Outline Mode /Change Track ColourlShow/HideThumbnails

Double-clicking the layer's colour swatch opens a colour picker
dialog that allows you to change the layer's track colour. The trackcolour displays in the layer's track in the Timeline view, allowing you
to give special visibility to specific layers. It also determines thecolour of the layer's outlines if it's in outline mode.

Expands the layer to display a thumbnail of the drawing in the current frame,
as well as for each drawing in the timeline.

554

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

NOTE
By default, the timeline's zoom level does not allow enoughhorizontal space to fully display the thumbnails of drawings exposedfor one or two frames only. To see the thumbnails for drawings withshort exposure, you must increase the timeline's zoom level—see

Timeline Zoom on page 560.

When a drawing layer is in Show Thumbnails mode:ll

An exposure indicator appears at the right of each exposed drawing
in the timeline, indicating the amount of frames the drawing spansover.
An Opacity parameter appears to the left of the layer, allowing you to
set the layer's opacity level.

TIP
You can show or hide thumbnails for all drawing layers by clicking on
the Show/Hide All Thumbnails

button in the top row.

Allows you to set the opacity level of the layer. Click and drag the value leftor right to decrease or increase the layer's opacity.
Opacity

NOTEThis parameter only displays for drawing layers that are in Show
Thumbnails mode.

Active Drawing Layer
Indicator

This icon appears next to the active drawing layer, which is the layer you
draw on when using drawing tools.

555

Chapter 6: Views

NOTE
The active drawing layer is not always the selected layer. For
example, if you select a drawing layer, then a peg layer, the peg
layer will be the selected layer, but the active drawing layer willremain the last drawing layer you selected, until you select anotherdrawing layer.

The Add Layers button lets you add new layers to the Timeline view. When
Add Layer

you click the Add Layers button, a menu appears displaying the available
layer types.

DeleteThe Delete Layers button lets you delete the currently selected layers in theTimeline view.

Add Drawing Layer

The Add Drawing Layer button lets you automatically add a new drawing
layer to the Timeline view. By default, the layer is named Drawing.
The Add Peg button lets you add a peg layer to the timeline. If several layers
are selected, a peg is added and parented to each layer.

Add Peg

The Expand/Collapse button is used to display the children layers of a parent
layer. Once a layer is parented to another layer, it is indented to the right andthe Collapse/Expand Children button appears on the parent layer allowing
you to show or hide the child layer.
Expand/Collapse

Show/Hide Functions

The Show/Hide Functions button lets you display the functions embedded ineach layer. The functions are the different coordinates and values used torecord a layer’s parameters at each frame. This information is stored on thefunction curves using keyframes.
If the layer can be connected to another layer, for example to use a drawing
layer as a matte, expanding a layer's functions will also list its possible
connections. You can connect layers by dragging and dropping a layer onto

556

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

another layer's connection.

Adds a keyframe at the current frame of the selected function or removes the
keyframe at the current frame of the selected function, if there is one already.
Add/Remove
Keyframe

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Moves the timeline cursor to the previous keyframe on the selected function.
Previous Keyframe

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Moves the timeline cursor to the next keyframe on the selected function.
Next Keyframe

NOTE
This button only displays for function layers.

Displays the Function menu, which allows you to create a new function for
the function layer, or to link it to an existing shared function.
Function Menu

NOTE
This button only displays for functions layers, in the Parameterscolumn—see Show/Hide Parameters on page 559.

Function Keyframe

A frame where the value for one or more of the layer's functions is preset.
The position of each layers in key poses for digital animation is recorded infunction keyframes. You can grab and move function keyframes as well as
copy, cut, paste and delete them.

557

Chapter 6: Views

TIP
If you have a keyframe and a drawing selected simultaneously, andyou wish to delete the keyframe without deleting the drawing's
exposure by doing one of the following:l

In the Timeline toolbar, click on the Delete Keyframe
button.

l

Press F7.

l

From the top menu, select Animation > Delete Keyframe

NOTE
If a collapsed layer has children that have function keyframes, youwill see a white squareinstead.

The Split button lets you split the Timeline view in two sections, allowing
you to see two different portions of the Timeline view. This can be useful if
you need to often switch between two specific points of a lengthy scene.

Split

Drawing Exposure

In the Timeline view, when a drawing is exposed, it is represented by a grey
block that extends from the first frame it is exposed to the last frame it is
exposed.

View Modes

Lets you choose between different view modes allowing you to decide whichlayers are listed in the Timeline view. This can be useful if you're working ona scene with a lot of layers, and you only want layers you will be working on
to appear in the Timeline view so as to declutter it. The following view modes
are available:llNormal View Mode

will show all the layers in your scene.

Selection Only Mode
will hide all the layers that are not currently
selected, leaving only the currently selected layers in the Timeline

558Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

view.
l

View Tagged Layers

will only show layers which you havetagged.

TIP
You can tag a layer by doing one of the following:l

Right click on the layer and select Tag > Timeline Tag.

lOpen the Timeline view menu

and select Edit > Tag> Timeline Tag.

Shows or hides the Parameters column, right of the Layers column. The
Parameters column displays information on the layer at the current frame,depending on the type of layer it is:lll

If the layer is a drawing, it displays the name of the drawing at thecurrent frame.
If the layer is a function, it displays the value of the function at thecurrent frame.
If the layer is a sound track, it displays the sound track's volume.

Show/HideParameters

Using the mouse, you can drag the parameter left and right to change its
value. This is especially useful for quickly changing a drawing's exposure at
the current frame.

Show/Hide Additional
Links

Shows or hides the Additional Links column. The Additional Links column
displays layers that are connected under the layer, but for other purposes
than being the parent of those layers. For example, if a layer is used as the559

Chapter 6: Views

matte of an effect, the effect will be displayed in that layer's Additional Links.
If more than one layers are in a layer's Additional Links, only the first of theselayers will be displayed, followed by the amount of extra linked layers thereare.
By clicking on the Additional Links, you can open a menu listing the linked
layers, and click on one of these layers to navigate to it.
In the following example, the BOOM_Animation layer is used as the matte of
Cutter_1 and Cutter_2:

Timeline Zoom

Reduces or increases the width of frames in the Timeline view. Move theslider right to increase the width or left to reduce it. You can also press 2 tozoom in and 1 to zoom out when the Timeline view is focused on.
If you want to reset the Timeline view's zoom, click on the Timeline Zoon
icon left of the slider.

560

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Tool Properties View
T-HFND-004-002
The Tool Properties view contains the most common options and operations related to the currently selected
tool. When you select a tool from the Tools toolbar, the Tool Properties view updates.
For example, if you choose the Select tool, the Tool Properties view will display the options and operations
related to it, such as Snap to Contour, Apply to All Drawings, Flip Horizontal, and Flatten.

NOTE
To learn more about the options appearing in the Tool Properties view, see Tools Properties on
page 338.

How to access the Tool Properties view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Tool Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

561

button and select Tool Properties.

Chapter 6: Views

Top View
T-HFND-008-014
The Top view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see thescene’s stage from above. This lets the camera cone and the spacing between the elements be seen.

How to access the Top view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Top.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Top.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Side view.

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in thecamera cone.

562

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position andfield-of-view (FOV).

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain yourorientation when navigating in the view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective

Reset View

view.
This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from thelist. Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available;
you can also select Fit To View to automatically use azoom level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Zoom Menu

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer anddrawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

563

Chapter 6: Views

Xsheet View
T-HFND-006-003
The Xsheet view lets you read the timing vertically by displaying it in a grid, with each drawing layer
represented by a column, each frame of your scene represented by a row, and each exposed drawing displayedby its name in the cells. It is meant to work like a traditional animation exposure sheet.
Using the functions panel, you can also view the functions and keyframes of the motion paths for the selectedcolumn, with the value of those functions for each frame listed in the cells.
Contrary to the Timeline view, the Xsheet view does not display pegs, effects or layer hierarchy. Hence, it is
optimized for traditional and paperless animation, whereas the Timeline view is optimized for digital or cut-out
animation.

How to access the Xsheet view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Xsheet.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

564

button and select Xsheet.

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

Icon

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to manage columns and timing.

View Toolbar

The view toolbar contains all the tools and options
you can use in the Xsheet view to manage columns
and timing.
The Xsheet view has three sections. By default, only
the main section is visible. It displays the drawing
layers, also known as drawing columns.

Xsheet Main Section

When using advanced compositing and animation
techniques, unconnected functions (motion paths)
also appear in the main section. Unconnectedfunctions mean that some motion paths are notattached to any particular layer.
When you reconnect functions to a layer, they are stillvisible in the main section.

565

Chapter 6: Views

The Functions section is used for more advanced
techniques. This section displays the functions(paths) related to the selected layer in the Timeline
view. By default, the Functions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button located on
the right side of the main section. Click on the same
button to collapse it. You can also use the Show
Column List button in the Xsheet View toolbar. If you
select a drawing column in the main section of the
Xsheet view, the function columns will not be
displayed. You must select the layer from the Timeline
view.
Functions Section

The Column List section allows you to show and hidecolumns in the Xsheet view. When you hide a layer inthe Xsheet view, it is also disabled in the Timelineview.

Column List Section

566

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

You can use the Column List to hide individualcolumns or hide an entire column type (drawing orfunction) from the Xsheet view. By default, theFunctions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button on theright side of the main section to show the Functions
section. Click on the same button to collapse it. You
can also use the Show Column List

button in the

Xsheet toolbar.
Go to the Xsheet view menu and select View > Show
Column List. Click the Expand button on the right sideof the Functions section to display the Column List
section.

Each column available in the Xsheet view has a header
displaying the column’s name. The column’s name isthe same as the corresponding timeline layer. If you
rename one or the other, they will both be renamed.
A quick access menu is available when you right-click.
This menu contains the command affecting an entire
column such as renaming, changing the default
colour, or deleting a column.

Column Header

The tooltip that appears when you hover at the top ofeach Xsheet column shows the folder path to the567

Chapter 6: Views

source drawings for that column.

In Harmony, the column header shows the layer’s
name and the name of the drawing folder to which it
is linked. If the name of the layer is the same as thedrawing folder, the drawing folder’s name will not be
displayed. To modify the name of the element folder
independently from the column and layer name, youmust select the Advanced Element Mode option
preference in the Advanced tab of the Preferences
dialog box.

A drawing selected in dark red indicates that thedrawing is currently displayed in the Drawing and
Camera views. The current drawing selection is not
linked to the drawing displayed in the Camera view
since drawings from each visible layer are displayed at
once.

Current Drawing

The darker frame appearing in the Xsheet view
represents the current frame.
Current FrameIn the drawing columns, you can see the drawing
names and their exposure. You can use anyalphanumeric symbol to name your drawing. When adrawing is exposed over more than one cell, a vertical

Drawing Exposure

568

Harmony 15.0 Advanced Reference Guide

black line is displayed to indicate the continuity of the
exposure. When there is no drawing in a cell, the cell
will be blank.

On the left side of the Xsheet view, the frame numbers
are shown indicating where you are. These readvertically instead of being displayed horizontally as
they are in the Timeline view.
l

To go to a particular frame, click the frame
number.

Frame NumberslTo select an entire range of frames, click anddrag a selection downwards.

At the bottom-right of the Xsheet view, you can see
the current frame number, as well as the column
containing the drawing currently displayed in the
Drawing view.
Current Frame Display

569

Chapter 6: Views

The functions columns are displayed in the Functions
section of the Xsheet view. They represent the motion
and rotation you applied to a drawing layer.
A function column can also be related to an effect.
Selecting the effect layer shows you thecorresponding function column in the Xsheet view.
The function columns display the position value or
effect value on each cell. If there is a keyframe on acell, a black square is displayed. Holding the samevalue for several frames displays a vertical black line.

Functions Column

You can quickly increase or decrease the exposure of
the selected cell by clicking on the up and down

Increase/Decrease
Exposurearrows in the Increase/Decrease Exposure field.

The Overwrite/Insert button allows you to decide theway the values are inserted into the Xsheet.

Overwrite/Insert Modes

570